JP6690974B2 - Amusement machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine in which a symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode showing a result of a lottery after a variation display of the symbol is performed when a lottery trigger occurs during a game.

  A game machine capable of displaying two types of special symbols in parallel is known (for example, Patent Documents 1 to 3).

JP, 2005-146940, A JP, 2006-141507, A JP, 2013-240588, A

  When two kinds of special symbols are changed in parallel, when the variable display of one special symbol for notifying the hit is stopped, the other special symbol also needs to be stopped. At this time, depending on the stop mode of one special symbol, it is necessary to change the stop mode of the other special symbol, and there is a problem that control of the special symbol becomes complicated.

  An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of simplifying control of two types of special symbols that are changing in parallel.

A gaming machine according to an aspect of the present invention executes a first lottery means for performing a first lottery when a first lottery opportunity occurs during a game, and a first variation effect in which the result of the first lottery is suggested or notified. The first variation effect execution means, the second lottery means for performing the second lottery when a second lottery opportunity different from the first lottery opportunity occurs during the game, and the first variation effect execution means in parallel with each other. can execute provided, and a second variation effect execution means for executing a second variation effect is the result of suggestions or notification of the second drawing, the first shift effect execution means, the first lottery The first variation effect using a movable accessory means that is operated as an effect regarding suggestion or notification of the result is provided to be executable, and when the first variation effect is executed , the winning result of the second lottery is given priority. If you can be notified, please check the winning result of the second lottery. It is possible to execute the first variation effect that performs a predetermined notification, and to perform the second variation effect without executing the first variation effect using the movable accessory means, to perform the second lottery. It is characterized in that it is possible to execute the first variation effect that secures an area of an execution area or holds an area for suggesting a predetermined winning of a result.

  According to one aspect of the present invention, it is possible to simplify control of two types of special symbols that are changing in parallel.

1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 1 according to an embodiment of the present invention. 1 is a rear view of a pachinko machine 1 according to an embodiment of the present invention. It is a front view showing the game board unit 8 provided in the pachinko machine 1 according to one embodiment of the present invention. It is a front view which expands and shows a part of game board unit 8 provided in the pachinko machine 1 by one Embodiment of this invention. FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing various electronic devices equipped in the pachinko machine 1 according to the embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart (1/2) which shows the example of a procedure of the reset start process in the pachinko machine 1 by one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart (2/2) which shows the example of a procedure of the reset start process in the pachinko machine 1 by one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flow chart which shows concretely the example of the procedure of the power failure generation check processing in the pachinko machine 1 by one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows the example of a procedure of interruption management processing in pachinko machine 1 by one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows the example of a procedure of switch input event processing in pachinko machine 1 by one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows the example of a procedure of special symbol B memory renewal processing in pachinko machine 1 by one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows the example of a procedure of special symbol A memory renewal processing in pachinko machine 1 by one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows the example of a procedure of acquisition time production judgment processing in pachinko machine 1 by one embodiment of the present invention. It is the flowchart which shows the constitution example of the special design B game processing in the pachinko machine 1 by one execution form of this invention. It is the flowchart which shows the constitution example of the special design A game processing in the pachinko machine 1 by one execution form of this invention. It is a figure which shows the opening operation pattern of the variable winning a prize device in the pachinko machine 1 by one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows the example of a procedure of special design change pre-processing in pachinko machine 1 by one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows the example of a procedure of special symbol storage area shift processing in pachinko machine 1 by one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the stop timing process of the symbol variation at the time of deviation which is one step of the special symbol variation preprocessing in the pachinko machine 1 by one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the big hit stop symbol selection table in the pachinko machine 1 by one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure showing an example of an opening pattern of variable starting winning a prize device 28 in pachinko machine 1 by one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining an example of the opening pattern of the variable starting winning a prize device 28 at the time of the penalty state in the pachinko machine 1 by one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the reach group determination random number determination table at the time of the loss in the pachinko machine 1 by one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the reach mode determination random number determination table in the pachinko machine 1 by one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the fluctuation pattern random number determination table in the pachinko machine 1 by one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the fluctuation time determination table in the pachinko machine 1 by one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flow chart which shows the example of a procedure of processing during special symbol change in the pachinko machine 1 by one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the special symbol stop display process in the pachinko machine 1 by one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flow chart which shows the example of composition of the display output management processing in pachinko machine 1 by one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows the example of composition of the variable winning a prize device management processing at the time of big hit in pachinko machine 1 by one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the special winning opening opening pattern setting process at the time of a big hit in the pachinko machine 1 by one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flow chart which shows the example of a procedure of big winning opening opening and closing operation processing at the time of a big hit in pachinko machine 1 by one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows the example of a procedure of the special winning opening closing processing at the time of a big hit in pachinko machine 1 by one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows the example of a procedure of end processing at the time of a big hit in pachinko machine 1 by one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows the example of composition of the variable winning a prize device management processing at the time of a small hit in pachinko machine 1 by one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the small winning a prize winning opening opening pattern setting process in the pachinko machine 1 by one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flow chart which shows the example of the procedure of the big winning a prize opening and closing operation processing at the time of small hit in pachinko machine 1 by one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows the example of a procedure of the special winning opening closing processing at the time of a small hit in pachinko machine 1 by one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of a procedure of end processing at the time of a small hit in pachinko machine 1 by one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows the example of a procedure of production control processing in pachinko machine 1 by one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows the example of a procedure of operation memory production management processing in pachinko machine 1 by one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows the example of a procedure of production design management processing in pachinko machine 1 by one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows the example of the procedure of the low probability state effect design management processing in the pachinko machine 1 by one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows the example of a procedure of production design change pre-processing in the pachinko machine 1 by one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows the example of the procedure of change production pattern selection processing at the time of being out which is one step of production design variation pre-processing in pachinko machine 1 by one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows the example of a procedure of high probability state effect design management processing in pachinko machine 1 by one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the remaining number management process in the pachinko machine 1 by one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the time schedule management process in the pachinko machine 1 by one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the operation timing of the parallel variation example 1 of the special symbol in the pachinko machine 1 by one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining operation timing of parallel variation example 2 of a special symbol in pachinko machine 1 by one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining operation timing of parallel variation example 3 of a special symbol in pachinko machine 1 by one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining operation timing of parallel variation example 4 of a special symbol in pachinko machine 1 by one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure (the 1) explaining an example of the display mode of the parallel variation example 1 of the special symbol and the effect symbol in the pachinko machine 1 by one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure (the 2) explaining an example of a display mode of parallel variation example 1 of a special design and a production design in pachinko machine 1 by one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining an example of the display mode of the parallel variation example 2 of the special symbol and the effect symbol in the pachinko machine 1 by one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure (the 1) explaining an example of the display mode of the parallel variation example 3 of the special symbol and the effect symbol in the pachinko machine 1 by one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure (the 2) explaining an example of the display mode of parallel variation example 3 of a special design and a production design in pachinko machine 1 by one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure (the 1) explaining an example of the display mode of parallel variation example 4 of a special design and a production design in pachinko machine 1 by one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure (the 2) explaining an example of the display mode of parallel variation example 4 of a special design and a production design in pachinko machine 1 by one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure (the 3) explaining an example of the display mode of parallel variation example 4 of a special design and a production design in pachinko machine 1 by one embodiment of the present invention.

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. In this embodiment, a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, abbreviated as "pachinko machine") will be described as an example of the gaming machine.
FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment. FIG. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 1. The pachinko machine 1 uses the game ball as a game medium, and the player borrows the game ball from the game hall operator to play the game with the pachinko machine 1. In the game on the pachinko machine 1, each game ball is a medium in which each one has a game value, and the privilege (profit) that the player enjoys as a result of the game is, for example, the game ball acquired by the player. It can be converted into a game value based on the number of. Hereinafter, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 and 2.

〔overall structure〕
The pachinko machine 1 mainly includes an outer frame unit 2, an integrated door unit 4, and an inner frame assembly 7 (plastic frame, game machine frame) as its main body. When viewed from the front facing the player, the integrated door unit 4 is located on the most front side. The inner frame assembly 7 is located on the back side (back side) of the integrated door unit 4, and the outer frame unit 2 is arranged so as to surround the outer side of the inner frame assembly 7.

  The outer frame unit 2 is a structure in which wood and a metal material are combined in a vertically long rectangular shape, and is fixed to an island facility (not shown) in the game arcade by using fasteners such as screws. In the vertically long outer frame unit 2, wood is used for the parts corresponding to the upper and lower short sides, and a metal material is used for the parts corresponding to the left and right long sides.

  The integrated door unit 4 has a structure in which the tray unit 6 is integrated at its lower position. The integrated door unit 4 and the inner frame assembly 7 are attached to the island facility via the outer frame unit 2, and these operate in an openable and closable manner via a hinge mechanism (not shown). The opening / closing axis of the hinge mechanism (not shown) extends in the vertical direction along the left end when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 1.

  A unified lock unit 9 is provided inside the right edge portion (left edge portion in FIG. 2) of the inner frame assembly 7 when viewed from the front in FIG. 1 (see FIG. 2). Corresponding to this, locking tools (not shown) are also provided on the right edge portions (back side) of the integrated door unit 4 and the outer frame unit 2, respectively. As shown in FIG. 1, in a state where the integrated door unit 4 and the inner frame assembly 7 are closed with respect to the outer frame unit 2, the unified lock unit 9 on the back side of the integrated door unit 4 and the inner frame assembly 7 together with the locking tool. The opening of 7 is disabled.

A cylinder lock 6a with a key hole is provided on the right side edge of the tray unit 6.
For example, when the manager of the game arcade inserts a dedicated key into the keyhole and twists the cylinder lock 6a clockwise, the unified lock unit 9 operates and the inner frame assembly 7 and the integrated door unit 4 can be opened. . When all of these are opened from the outer frame unit 2 to the front side (moved like a door), the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is exposed on the front side.

  On the other hand, when the cylinder lock 6a is twisted counterclockwise, only the locking of the integrated door unit 4 is released while the inner frame assembly 7 remains locked, and the integrated door unit 4 can be opened. When the integrated door unit 4 is opened to the front side, the game board unit 8 is directly exposed, and in this state, the manager of the game hall can remove obstacles such as ball clogging in the board surface. When the integrated door unit 4 is opened, the tray unit 6 is also opened to the front side.

  Moreover, the pachinko machine 1 includes the above-mentioned game board unit 8 as a game unit. The game board unit 8 is supported by the inner frame assembly 7 behind (inside) the integrated door unit 4. The game board unit 8 can be attached to and detached from the inner frame assembly 7 in a state where the integrated door unit 4 is opened to the front side, for example. The integrated door unit 4 has a vertically elongated circular window 4a formed in the center thereof, and a glass unit (no reference numeral) is attached in the window 4a. The glass unit is, for example, a combination of two transparent plates (glass plates) cut according to the shape of the window 4a. The glass unit is attached to the back side of the integrated door unit 4 via an attachment tool (not shown). A game area 8a (board surface, game board) is formed on the front surface of the game board unit 8, and the game area 8a is visible to the player from the front side through the window 4a. When the integrated door unit 4 is closed, a space where the game ball can flow down is formed between the inner surface of the glass unit and the board surface.

  The tray unit 6 has a shape that protrudes from the integrated door unit 4 to the front side as a whole, and an upper tray 6b is formed on the upper surface thereof. The upper plate 6b can store game balls (rental balls) lent to the player and game balls (prize balls) obtained by winning. Further, in the tray unit 6, a lower tray 6c is formed at a lower position of the upper tray 6b. In the lower plate 6c, the game balls further paid out in a state where the upper plate 6b is full are stored. Note that the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment is a so-called CR machine (a model that is connected to a CR unit), and the game balls that the player has borrowed from the payout device unit 172 (see FIG. 2) on the back side, apart from the prize balls. It is paid out to the tray unit 6 (upper plate 6b or lower plate 6c).

  A lending operation unit 14 is provided on the upper surface of the tray unit 6, and a ball lending button 10 and a return button 12 are arranged on the lending operation unit 14. When a player operates the ball lending button 10 with a valuable medium (for example, a magnetic recording medium, a memory IC built-in medium, etc.) inserted in a CR unit (not shown), the number corresponding to a predetermined frequency unit (for example, 5 degrees) (For example, 125) game balls are rented out. For this reason, a frequency display section (not shown) is arranged on the upper surface of the lending operation section 14, and the frequency display section displays the remaining frequency of the valuable medium loaded in the CR unit. The player can operate the return button 12 to return the valuable medium with the remaining frequency. Although the CR machine is taken as an example in the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 may be a cash machine (a model that is not connected to the CR unit) different from the CR machine.

  Further, on the upper surface of the tray unit 6, an upper plate ball removing button 6d is installed in front of the upper plate 6b in the upper position, and a lower plate ball removing lever 6e is provided in the center of the lower plate 6c. Is installed. The player can cause the game balls stored in the upper plate 6b to flow down to the lower plate 6c by, for example, pushing the upper plate ball removal button 6d. In addition, the player can drop the game balls stored in the lower plate 6c downward and eject them by sliding the lower plate ball removing lever 6e to the left, for example. The discharged game balls are received in, for example, a ball receiving box (not shown).

  A handle unit 16 is installed in the lower right part of the tray unit 6. The player can operate the handle unit 16 to operate the launch control board set 174 (see FIG. 2) to launch (drive) a game ball toward the game area 8a (ball launch device). The launched game ball rises from the lower edge of the game board unit 8 along the left edge, is guided by an outer band (not shown), and is thrown into the game area 8a. A large number of obstacle nails and windmills (without reference numerals in the figure) are arranged in the game area 8a, and the game balls thrown into the game area 8a are guided and guided by the obstacle nails and the windmill while being guided and guided. Run down. The structure of the game area 8a (board surface, game board) will be described later with reference to another drawing.

[Structure of frame front]
In the integrated door unit 4, a left top lens unit 47 and an upper right lighting unit 49 are installed as components for production. A glass frame top lamp 46 and a left glass frame decoration lamp 48 are incorporated in the left top lens unit 47, and a right glass frame top lamp 50 is incorporated in the upper right electric decoration unit 49. In addition, the integrated door unit 4 is provided with left and right glass frame decoration lamps 52 so as to be continuous below the left top lens unit 47 and the upper right electric decoration unit 49, respectively. It extends from the left and right edges of the door unit 4 to the front surface of the tray unit 6 so as to wrap around. In the integrated door unit 4, the glass frame top lamp 46 and the left and right glass frame decoration lamps 48, 50, 52 and the like are arranged so as to surround the glass unit.

  The various lamps 46, 48, 50, and 52 described above perform effects by, for example, light emission (lighting or blinking, change in luminance gradation, change in color tone, etc.) of the built-in LED. In addition, on the upper part of the integrated door unit 4, the left top lens unit 47 and the upper right electric decoration unit 49 are provided with glass frame speakers 54 and 55, respectively. On the other hand, a glass frame lower speaker 56 is incorporated in the lower left position of the outer frame unit 2. The speakers 54, 55, and 56 output sound effects, BGM, voice, and the like (general sound) to execute the effect.

  Further, in the center of the saucer unit 6, an effect switching button 45 is installed in front of the upper tray 6b. The effect switching button 45 has, for example, a form in which a push-in circular button 45b and a rotary jog dial 45a (jog ring) around the push-in circular button 45b are combined. The player pushes or rotates the effect switching button 45 to operate or rotate the effect contents (for example, the background screen displayed on the liquid crystal display 42, the movable liquid crystal display 43, and the movable liquid crystal display 44 (details will be described later)). ) Can be switched, and for example, some effect (preliminary effect, probable change promotion effect, promotion effect during major role, etc.) can be generated during symbol fluctuation, confirmation display of big hit, or during big hit game.

[Backside configuration]
As shown in FIG. 2, on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, a power supply control unit 162, a main control board unit 170, a payout device unit 172, a flow path unit 173, a firing control board set 174, a payout control board unit 176. Also, a back cover unit 178 and the like are installed. In addition to this, on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, various electronic devices (including a control computer (not shown)) constituting the power supply system and control system of the pachinko machine 1, an external terminal board 160, and a power cord 164 having a power plug. A ground wire 166 having a ground terminal, a connection wiring (not shown), and the like are installed.

  The payout device unit 172 has, for example, a prize ball tank 172a and a prize ball case (no reference numeral), and the prize ball tank 172a is illustrated in a state where the prize ball tank 172a is installed at the upper edge portion (back side) of the inner frame assembly 7. You can store the game balls that have been supplied from the supply route. The game balls stored in the prize ball tank 172a are guided to the prize ball case through the upper prize ball gutter (not shown). The flow path unit 173 guides the game balls sent from the payout device unit 172 toward the tray unit 6 (see FIG. 1) on the front side.

  The external terminal board 160 connects the pachinko machine 1 to an external electronic device (for example, a data display device, a hall computer, etc.). Various external information signals (for example, prize ball information, door opening information, symbol determination frequency information, big hit information, starting mouth information, etc.) indicating the game progress state and maintenance state of the pachinko machine 1 are external from the external terminal board 160. Output to electronic equipment.

  The power cord 164 is connected to, for example, a power supply device (for example, AC 24V) installed in an island facility of a game arcade. As a result, the power source (electric power) necessary for the operation of the pachinko machine 1 is secured. Further, the ground wire 166 is connected to a ground terminal installed in the island facility of the game arcade. As a result, the ground of the pachinko machine 1 is secured.

  FIG. 3 is a front view showing the game board unit 8 alone. The game board unit 8 has a base game board 8b, and a game area 8a is formed on the front surface side of the game board 8b. The game board 8b is made of, for example, a transparent resin plate, and in the state where the game board unit 8 is fixed to the inner frame assembly 7 (see FIG. 1), the front surface of the game board 8b is arranged in parallel with the glass unit. . A game area 8a is formed on the front surface of the game board 8b and inside a firing rail 8c installed in a substantially circular shape.

  In the game area 8a, a relatively large effect unit 40 is arranged at the center position thereof, and the game area 8a is largely divided into a left part, a right part and a lower part with the effect unit 40 as the center. The left side portion of the game area 8a is a first game area (left hitting area) used in a normal game state (low probability state). The right part of the game area 8a is a second game area (right hitting area) used in an advantageous game state (a big hit game state, a small hit game state, a rush state, etc.). Further, in the game area 8a, the first start winning opening 26, the starting gate 20, the normal winning opening 24, the variable starting winning device 28, the second starting winning opening 27, and the first variable winning device 30 around the effect unit 40. And the second variable winning devices 31 and the like are distributed and installed. The first start winning opening 26 is arranged in the center of the lower part of the game area 8a, and the variable starting winning device 28 is arranged immediately below the first starting winning opening 26. The starting gate 20 is arranged on the left side of the variable starting winning device 28, and three normal winning openings 24 are arranged on the left side of the starting gate 20. The first starting winning opening 26, the variable starting winning device 28, the starting gate 20 and the three ordinary winning openings 24 are arranged in the first game area. The second start winning opening 27, the first variable winning device 30, and the second variable winning device 31 are arranged on the right side of the game area 8a. The first variable winning device 30 is arranged on the right side of the variable starting winning device 28 and to the right of the lower portion of the game area 8a. Further, the first variable winning device 30 is arranged above the second variable winning device 31, and the second starting winning port 27 is arranged above the first variable winning device 30. The 1st variable winning a prize device 30, the 2nd variable winning a prize device 31, and the 2nd starting winning a prize mouth 27 are arranged in the 2nd game field.

  The game ball thrown into the game area 8a passes through the starting gate 20 in the course of its flow, enters the first starting winning opening 26, the second starting winning opening 27 or the normal winning opening 24, or , The variable start winning device 28 during operation, the first variable winning device 30 during opening operation, or the second variable winning device 31 during opening operation. Here, the game ball flowing down the left side area of the game area 8a mainly enters the first start winning opening 26, enters the normal winning opening 24, passes through the starting gate 20, or during operation. There is a possibility of entering the variable start winning device 28. On the other hand, the game balls flowing down the right side area of the game area 8a mainly enter the second starting winning opening 27, enter the first variable winning a prize device 30 during the opening operation, or the first opening during the opening operation. There is a possibility of entering the two-variable winning device 31. The game ball that has passed through the starting gate 20 continues to flow down in the game area 8a, but the first starting winning opening 26, the second starting winning opening 27, the normal winning opening 24, the variable starting winning device 28, and the first variable winning device. The game balls entering the 30 and the second variable winning device 31 are collected to the back side of the game board unit 8 through through holes formed in the game board (plywood material, transparent plate, etc. constituting the game board unit 8).

  Here, in the present embodiment, in the structure of the game area 8a (board surface), in the case of entering the game ball into the first starting winning opening 26, the variable starting winning device 28, and the normal winning opening 22, in the playing area 8a It is necessary to hit a game ball into the first game area (left hitting area) on the left side portion (to execute a so-called "left hitting").

  On the other hand, when a game ball is to be entered into the second start winning opening 27, the first variable winning device 30 and the second variable winning device 31, the second game area (right hitting area) on the right side in the game area 8a. It is necessary to hit a game ball (perform a so-called "right hit").

  In the present embodiment, the variable start winning device 28 operates when a predetermined operating condition is satisfied (when a normal symbol is stopped and displayed for a predetermined stop display time in a winning manner), and the variable start accordingly. Allows entry into the winning opening 28a (normal electric accessory). The variable start winning device 28 has, for example, a pair of opening / closing members 28b, and the pair of opening / closing members 28b reciprocate in the left-right direction along the board surface by the action of a link mechanism using a solenoid (not shown), for example. That is, as shown by the dotted lines in FIG. 3, the pair of opening / closing members 28b are in the closed position (closed position) with their tips facing upward, and at this time, it is difficult to enter the variable start winning opening 28a. Has become. On the other hand, when the variable start winning device 28 operates, the opening / closing member 28b is displaced (expanded) from the closed position toward the open position, and the opening width is expanded to the right to open the variable start winning opening 28a. In the meantime, the variable start winning device 28 is in a state in which the game balls can be entered, and it is possible to generate a ball into the variable starting winning opening 28a (variable starting winning means). At this time, the opening / closing member 28b also functions as a member for guiding the entry of the game ball into the variable start winning opening 28a. Here, the state where it is difficult to enter the variable start winning opening 28a is either the state in which the game ball cannot enter or the state in which the game ball is less likely to enter than when the opening / closing member 28b is in the open position. Is. In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the game ball cannot enter the ball when it is difficult to enter the variable start winning port 28a. Further, the arrangement of the obstacle nails installed in the game board unit 8 is basically a mode that does not extremely hinder the flow of the game balls toward the variable start winning device 28 (the variable starting winning opening 28a when opened). However, the game balls do not necessarily enter the variable start winning device 28 (variable start winning opening 28a) at the time of opening operation, and the balls are randomly generated.

  The first variable winning device 30 operates when the prescribed condition is satisfied (when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of a big hit) and when the predetermined first condition (the latter half round) is satisfied. Then, it is possible to win the first big winning opening 30b (special electric accessory, first special winning event generating means).

  The first variable winning device 30 is a device arranged on the lower right side of the effect unit 40 (first attacker), and has, for example, one opening / closing member 30a. The opening / closing member 30a reciprocates in the front-rear direction with respect to the board surface by the action of a link mechanism using a solenoid (not shown), for example. As shown in the figure, the opening / closing member 30a is in the closed position (closed state) along the board surface, and at this time, the winning of the first big winning opening 30b is always impossible (the first big winning opening 30b is closed). . When the first variable winning device 30 operates, the opening / closing member 30a is displaced so as to fall forward with the lower end edge portion thereof as a hinge, and the first big winning opening 30b is opened (open state). During this time, the first variable winning device 30 is in a state where the inflow of the game balls is not disabled, and an event of winning the first big winning opening 30b can be generated. At this time, the opening / closing member 30a also functions as a member for guiding the inflow of the game ball into the first special winning opening 30b.

  The second variable winning device 31 is a case where the prescribed condition is satisfied (when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of a big hit or a small hit), and a predetermined second condition (the first half round) is satisfied. It operates in the case of, and enables winning of the second special winning opening (specific winning opening) 31b (special electric accessory, second special winning event generating means).

  The second variable winning device 31 is a device arranged at the lower right of the effect unit 40 (second attacker), and has, for example, one opening / closing member 31a. The first variable winning device 30 employs a device in which the opening / closing member 30a falls forward. On the other hand, the second variable winning device 31 adopts a type of device in which the right side surface of the pachinko machine 1 is opened with the opening / closing member 31a as the rotation axis in the direction orthogonal to the board surface. Then, the opening / closing member 31a is rotated at a rotation angle of about 90 ° in a direction orthogonal to the board surface by the action of a link mechanism using a solenoid (not shown), for example. The opening / closing member 31a is in the closed position (closed state) in a state of protruding from the board surface to the player side, and at this time, the game ball rolls on the upper surface of the opening / closing member 31a, so the ball enters the special winning opening. Is impossible (the second special winning opening 31b is closed). When the second variable winning device 31 operates, the opening / closing member 31a rotates along the board surface to open the second special winning opening 31b (open state). During this time, the second variable winning a prize device 31 is in a state where the inflow of the game balls is not impossible, and an event of a ball entering the second special winning opening 31b can be generated.

[Probability region (specific region)]
In addition, inside the second variable winning a prize device 31, apart from the second special winning opening 31b, a probability variation region 31d is provided. The probability variation region 31d is a region where the game ball cannot pass when the second variable winning device 31 is in the closed state, and a region where the game ball can pass when the second variable winning device 31 is in the open state. . Further, at the entrance of the probability variation region 31d, a probability variation region opening / closing member 31c for guiding the game ball to the probability variation region 31d is arranged. The probability variation region opening / closing member 31c can be guided to the probability variation region 31d by being opened at a specific timing (details will be described later) during a big hit game or a small hit game.

[Prize winning device unit]
At the lower right portion of the game board unit 8, a winning device unit 300 is arranged. The winning device unit 300 includes a second variable winning device 31. In the winning device unit 300, a through-hole (not shown) through which the game balls that have entered the variable start winning device 28 in operation among the right-handed game balls pass for being collected on the back side of the game board unit 8. Is provided. Further, in the second variable winning a prize device 31, a second special winning opening solenoid 97 (not shown in FIG. 3) for detecting that the game ball has passed through the second special winning opening 31b, and the game ball has a probability variation area 31d. A probability variation area solenoid 99 (not shown in FIG. 3) for detecting passage has been provided. When the second big winning opening 31b is in the closed state, the game ball passes over the winning device unit 300 and rolls to the out opening 32 side.

  In the game board unit 8, an effect unit 40 is installed from the central position to the right side portion. The effect unit 40 has its upper edge functioning as a guide member for changing the flowing direction of the game ball, and is provided with various decorative parts 40a and 40c inside thereof. The decorative parts 40a and 40c can enhance the decorativeness of the game board unit 8 by their three-dimensional modeling, and can perform a dramatic operation by emitting transmitted light by a built-in light emitting device (LED or the like), for example. . In addition, a liquid crystal display (an example of a first variation effect execution means) 42 is installed inside the effect unit 40, and various effect images including effect symbols corresponding to special symbols are displayed on the liquid crystal display 42. Is displayed. In addition, a movable liquid crystal display (second variation effect executing means) 43 and a movable liquid crystal display 44 are installed inside the effect unit 40. The movable liquid crystal display 43 is arranged on the left side of the liquid crystal display 42, and the movable liquid crystal display 44 is arranged on the right side of the liquid crystal display 42. The movable liquid crystal display 43 and the movable liquid crystal display 44 are provided so as to be able to overlap with the liquid crystal display 42. The movable liquid crystal display 43 and the movable liquid crystal display 44 are movably provided on the front surface of the liquid crystal display 42. The movable liquid crystal display device 43 and the movable liquid crystal display device 44 can perform a staging operation as needed.

  The decorative part 40a includes a special symbol A memory number lamp 400 for displaying the number of stored random numbers (details will be described later) of a special symbol A (hereinafter sometimes abbreviated as "special symbol A"), and a special symbol B. A special figure B memory number lamp 401 that displays the number of stored random numbers (hereinafter, referred to as “special figure B” in some cases) (details will be described later) is provided. The special figure A memory number lamp 400 and the special figure B memory number lamp 401 are each composed of two light emitters (LEDs and the like). The special figure A memory number lamp 400 and the special figure B memory number lamp 401 turn on one or both of the two light emitters, and the number of stored random numbers relating to the special symbol is changed by such a lighting method. It is supposed to be displayed. The special figure A memory number lamp 400 and the special figure B memory number lamp 401 are effect lamps that emit light as needed as the game progresses.

  The decorative component 40b is provided with a fourth design 403 according to the special drawing A and a fourth design 404 according to the special drawing B. The fourth symbols 403 and 404 are composed of light emitting devices (LEDs and the like). The fourth symbol 403 blinks, for example, in synchronization with the variable display of the special map A described later, and lights up in a different color according to the symbol of the special map A stopped and displayed after the variable display of the special map A ends. Stay in the state. The fourth symbol 404, for example, blinks in synchronization with the variable display of special map B described later, and lights up in a different color according to the symbol of special map B stopped and displayed after the variable display of special map B ends. Stay in the state. The variable display of special symbols will be described later.

  In this way, the game board unit 8 impresses the player with the features of the pachinko machine 1 based on the configuration of the board surface and the decorativeness of the effect unit 40. Further, when the game board 8b is a transparent resin plate (for example, an acrylic board) as in the present embodiment, various decorative bodies (including a movable body and a light emitting body) arranged not only on the front side but also behind the game board 8b. ) Can add a decorative property.

  In addition, inside the effect unit 40, a decorative component 40c provided on the movable liquid crystal display 43 and a decorative component 40d provided on the movable liquid crystal display 44 are installed. The decorative component 40c is fixed to the movable liquid crystal display 43, and the decorative component 40d is fixed to the movable liquid crystal display 44. Therefore, the decorative component 40c moves to the front surface of the liquid crystal display 42 together with the movable liquid crystal display 43 or retracts from the front surface of the liquid crystal display 42. Further, the decorative component 40d moves to the front surface of the liquid crystal display 42 together with the movable liquid crystal display 44 or retracts from the front surface of the liquid crystal display 42. As a result, the decorative component 40c and the decorative component 40d can enhance the effect of the game together with the movable liquid crystal display 43 and the movable liquid crystal display 44 according to the progress of the game.

  In addition, inside the effect unit 40, a drive source (for example, a motor, a solenoid, etc.) is attached together with the effect movable body 40f. The movable object 40f for effect can perform an effect accompanied by the operation of a tangible object in addition to the effect using the image on the liquid crystal display 42 and the effect by the light emitter. The effect using the movable body 40f can exert an appealing power different from the effect using the two-dimensional image.

  A ball guide passage 40h is formed on the left edge of the effect unit 40, and a rolling stage 40e is formed on the lower edge of the ball guide passage 40h. The ball guide passage 40h opens diagonally upward to the left in the game area 8a, and when a game ball flowing down in the game area 8a flows into the ball guide passage 40h at random, it passes through the inside of the ball guide passage 40h. Then, it is discharged onto the rolling stage 40e. The upper surface of the rolling stage 40e has a smooth curved surface, and on the upper surface of the rolling stage 40e, the game ball can roll in the left-right direction. The game ball rolled on the rolling stage 40e eventually flows down into the lower game area 8a. A ball discharge path 40g is formed at the center of the rolling stage 40e, and the game ball guided from the rolling stage 40e to the ball discharge path 40g is the first start winning opening 26 just below the ball discharge path 40g. It becomes easy to flow into.

  In addition, an out port 32 is formed in the game area 8a, and game balls that have not entered (winned) the various winning ports are finally collected to the back side of the game board unit 8 through the out port 32. In addition, the normal winning opening 24, the first starting winning opening 26, the second starting winning opening 27, the variable starting winning opening 28a, the first variable winning device 30 and the game balls that have entered the second variable winning device 31 are also included. All the game balls hit in the game area 8a are collected on the back side of the game board unit 8. The collected game balls are discharged to the outside of the frame from the back side of the pachinko machine 1 through an out passage assembly (not shown), and join the supply route of the island facility (not shown).

  FIG. 4 is an enlarged front view showing the lower right side of the window 4a of the game board unit 8. In the game board unit 8, for example, a normal symbol display device 33 and a normal symbol working memory lamp 33a are provided on the lower right side in the window 4a, a special symbol A display device 34, a special symbol B display device 35, and a special symbol. A working memory lamp 34a, a special figure B working memory lamp 35a, and a game state display device 38 are provided. The normal symbol display device 33 can display the changing state and the stopped state of the normal symbol by, for example, a 7-segment LED (with a dot). The normal symbol working memory lamp 33a displays a memory number of 0 to 4 by a combination of turning off, lighting and blinking of two lamps (LEDs), for example. For example, the normal symbol working memory lamp 33a displays the memory number 0 in the display mode in which both the two lamps are turned off, and displays the memory number 1 in the display mode in which one lamp is lit, and the same one In the display mode in which the lamp is blinking, two memory numbers are displayed. In the display mode in which one lamp is blinked in addition to the other lamp being turned on, three memory numbers are displayed, and two more lamps are blinked together. In this display mode, the number of stored memories is 4, and so on. Although two lamps (LED) are used here, four lamps (LED) may be used to configure the normal symbol working memory lamp 33a. In this case, the working memory number can be displayed by the number of lamps that are turned on.

  The normal symbol working memory lamp 33a is a display mode after being increased by one in order to remember that each time the game ball passes through the starting gate 20, a passage that triggers the working lottery has occurred (up to four memory To the display mode). Further, the normal symbol working memory lamp 33a changes to the display mode after decreasing by one each time the change of the normal symbol is triggered by the passage of the starting gate 20. In the present embodiment, when the normal symbol working memory lamp 33a is not lit (the number of memories is 0), the normal sphere can already start changing (at the time of stop display), the game ball passes through the starting gate 20. However, the display mode does not change. That is, the number of memories (maximum four) represented by the display mode of the normal symbol working memory lamp 33a represents the number of passages through the starting gate 20 at which the fluctuation of the normal symbol is not yet started.

  Further, the special figure A display device 34 and the special figure B display device 35 are each configured by, for example, a 7-segment LED (with a dot). The special figure A display device 34 is a special symbol A (first example of a first lottery opportunity) when the game ball enters either one of the first starting winning opening 26 and the variable starting winning opening 28a (first lottery opportunity). It is possible to display a fluctuation state and a stop state in a fluctuation display of an example of a special symbol). That is, the special symbol A display device 34 corresponds to the first symbol display means for executing the symbol display in which the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the display mode showing the result of the first lottery after the first special symbol is variably displayed. To do. The symbol display executed by the special figure A display device 34 is a trigger for the variation effect (an example of the first variation effect) of the effect symbols 420a, 420b, 420c described later. The special symbol B display device 35, the variation in the variable display of the special symbol B (an example of the second special symbol) triggered by the game ball entering the second start winning port 27a (an example of the second lottery trigger) The state and the stopped state can be displayed. That is, the special symbol B display device 35 is equivalent to the second symbol display means for executing the symbol display in which the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in the display mode showing the result of the second lottery after the second special symbol is variably displayed. To do. The symbol display executed by the special figure B display device 35 is a trigger for a variation effect (an example of a first variation effect) of effect symbols 430a, 430b, 430c described later. The special figure A display device 34 and the special figure B display device 35 may have a form in which a plurality of dot LEDs are geometrically (for example, circular) arranged.

  In addition, the special figure A working memory lamp 34a and the special figure B working memory lamp 35a each have 0 to 4 memories according to a display mode configured by a combination of turning off or lighting and blinking of two lamps (LEDs), respectively. The number is displayed (memory number display means). For example, the special figure A working memory lamp 34a and the special figure B working memory lamp 35a display 0 memory numbers in the display mode in which both of the two lamps are turned off, and display number 0 in the display mode in which one lamp is turned on. In the display mode in which one lamp is displayed and the same one lamp blinks, two memory numbers are displayed, and in the display mode in which one lamp is blinked and another lamp is turned on, three memory numbers are displayed. Then, in the display mode in which both the two lamps are blinked, the number of storages of 4 is displayed.

  The special figure A working memory lamp 34a, the game ball entered the first start winning opening 26 or the variable start winning opening 28a every time the game ball entered the first start winning opening 26 or the variable start winning opening 28a In order to memorize that, the display mode is gradually increased to one (up to a display mode showing up to four memories), and each time the variation of the special symbol A is started with the entry of the ball as a trigger. The display mode is changed one by one. In addition, the special figure B working memory lamp 35a is increased by one in order to remember that each time the game ball enters the second starting winning opening 27, the fact that the game ball enters the second starting winning opening 27 is stored. The display mode is changed to a later display mode (up to a display mode showing a maximum of 4 memories), and each time the variation of the special symbol B is started upon the entry, the display mode is changed to one after the decrease. . In addition, in this embodiment, when the special figure A working memory lamp 34a is not lit (the number of memories is 0), the first start winning opening 26 or the special symbol A can be already started to change (at the time of stop display). The display mode does not change even if a game ball enters the variable start winning opening 28a. If the special symbol B working memory lamp 35a is not lit (the number of memory is 0), the special symbol B can already start changing (at the time of stop display), the game ball enters the second starting winning opening 27. However, the display mode does not change. In other words, the number of memories (maximum 4) represented by the display mode of the special figure A working memory lamp 34a represents the number of times of ball entry in which the variation of the special symbol A has not yet started at that time. In addition, the number of memories (maximum 4) represented by the display mode of the special figure B working memory lamp 35a represents the number of times the special symbol B has not started to change at that time.

  Further, the game state display device 38 includes LEDs corresponding to, for example, the hit type display lamps 38a, 38b, 38c, the probability variation state display lamp 38d, the time saving state display lamp 38e, and the launch position designation lamp 38f. The combination of lighting of the hit type display lamp 38a, the hit type display lamp 38b and the hit type display lamp 38c informs which of the 14 round big hit, the 8 round big hit, the 2 round big hit and the small hit. It is like this. The gaming state display device 38 is configured by the hit type display lamps 38a, 38b, 38c, the probability variation state display lamp 38d, the time saving state display lamp 38e, and the launch position designation lamp 38f. In this embodiment, a normal symbol display device 33, a normal symbol working memory lamp 33a, a special symbol A display device 34, a special symbol B display device 35, a special symbol A working memory lamp 34a, a special symbol B working memory lamp 35a and The game status display device 38 is attached to the game board unit 8 while being mounted on one integrated display board 89.

[Control configuration]
Next, a configuration related to control of the pachinko machine 1 will be described. FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing various electronic devices mounted on the pachinko machine 1. The pachinko machine 1 includes a main control device 70 (main control computer) that is the center of the control operation, and the main control device 70 mainly has a function of controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko machine 1. . The main controller 70 is built in the main control board unit 170.

  Further, the main control device 70 is equipped with a circuit board (main control board) on which a main control CPU 72, which is a central processing unit, is mounted. The main control CPU 72, together with a CPU core and registers (not shown), a ROM 74, a RAM ( RWM) 76 and other semiconductor memories are integrated as an LSI. The main controller 70 is also equipped with a random number generator 75 and a sampling circuit 77. The random number generator 75 generates a hardware random number (for example, 0 to 65535 in decimal notation) for the big hit determination in the special symbol lottery and the hit determination in the ordinary symbol lottery. The random number generated by the random number generator 75 is input to the main control CPU 72 through the sampling circuit 77. In addition, the main control device 70 is equipped with peripheral ICs such as an input / output (I / O) port 79, a clock generation circuit (not shown), and a counter / timer circuit (CTC). It is mounted on the board. A signal transmission path, a power supply path, a control bus, and the like are formed as a wiring pattern on the circuit board (or inner layer portion).

  The start gate 20 (see FIG. 3) is integrally provided with a gate switch 78 for detecting passage of a game ball. Further, the game board unit 8 (see FIG. 3) corresponds to the first start winning opening 26, the second starting winning opening 27, the variable starting winning device 28, the first variable winning device 30 and the second variable winning device 31, respectively. Then, a first start winning opening switch 80, a second starting winning opening switch 82, a variable starting winning opening switch 83, a first count switch 84 and a second count switch 85 are provided. The first starting winning opening switch 80 is provided to detect the entry of the game ball into the first starting winning opening 26, and the second starting winning opening switch 82 is the entry of the gaming ball into the second starting winning opening 27. The variable start winning opening switch 83 is provided to detect the entry of the game ball into the variable starting winning device 28 (second starting winning opening 28a). In addition, the first count switch 84 is provided for detecting the number of game balls entering the first variable winning device 30 (first big winning opening 30b) and counting the number of entered balls. Further, the second count switch 85 is provided to detect the number of game balls that enter the second variable winning device 31 (the second special winning opening 31b) and count the number of entered balls. Furthermore, the probability variation area switch 95 is a switch for detecting that the game ball has passed through the probability variation area 31d arranged inside the second variable winning device 31 (detection means). Similarly, the game board unit 8 is equipped with a winning opening switch 86 for detecting the entry of a game ball into the normal winning opening 24. Although the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment is configured to use a common winning opening switch 86 for all the normal winning openings 24, each of the normal winning openings 24 has a different winning opening switch 86. , May be configured to detect the entry of a game ball into each of the normal winning openings 24.

  The winning detection signals of these switches are input to the main control CPU 72 via an input / output driver (not shown). Due to the configuration of the game board unit 8, in the present embodiment, the winning detection signals from the gate switch 78, the first count switch 84, the second count switch 85, the winning opening switch 86 and the probability variation area switch 95 are the panel relay terminal board. It is transmitted to main controller 70 via 87. The panel relay terminal plate 87 is provided with wiring patterns, connection terminals, etc. for relaying the respective winning detection signals.

  The normal symbol display device 33, the normal symbol working memory lamp 33a, the special symbol A display device 34, the special symbol B display device 35, the special symbol A working memory lamp 34a, the special symbol B working memory lamp 35a and the game state display device 38, The display operation is controlled based on the control signal from the main control CPU 72. The main control CPU72, the normal symbol display device 33, the normal symbol working memory lamp 33a, the special symbol A display device 34, the special symbol B display device 35, the special symbol A working memory lamp 34a, the special symbol B according to the progress of the game. It outputs a control signal to the working memory lamp 35a and the game state display device 38 to control the lighting state of each LED. That is, the main control CPU 72 and the main control device 70 including the main control CPU 72 have a special figure A display device (an example of the first symbol display means) 34 and a special figure B display device (an example of the second symbol display means) 35, respectively. It corresponds to an example of a symbol control means for controlling. Moreover, the normal symbol display device 33, the normal symbol working memory lamp 33a, the special symbol A display device 34, the special symbol B display device 35, the special symbol A working memory lamp 34a, the special symbol B working memory lamp 35a and the game state display device 38. Is installed in the game board unit 8 in a state of being mounted on one integrated display board 89, and a control signal is transmitted from the main control CPU 72 by relaying the panel relay terminal board 87 to the integrated display board 89. .

  In addition, in the game board unit 8, the normal electric prize solenoid 88, the first big prize corresponding to the upstream of the variable start prize device 28, the first variable prize device 30, the second variable prize device 31, and the probability variation area 31d, respectively. A mouth solenoid 90, a second special winning opening solenoid 97, and a probability variation area solenoid 99 are provided. The normal electric accessory solenoid 88, the first big winning opening solenoid 90, the second big winning opening solenoid 97, and the probability variation area solenoid 99 operate (excite) based on a control signal from the main control CPU 72, and a variable start winning device. 28, the first variable winning device 30 and the second variable winning device 31 are opened / closed (operated), or the probability variation area opening / closing member 31c is moved. Accordingly, the main control CPU 72 and the main control device 70 including the main control CPU 72 open and close the first variable winning device 30 and the second variable winning device 31 when the result of the first lottery or the result of the second lottery is a win. It corresponds to an example of a hit game executing means for executing a hit game to be operated (actuated). The hit game includes a big hit game and a small hit game. The control signals are transmitted from the main control CPU 72 to the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 88, the first special winning opening solenoid 90, the second special winning opening solenoid 97, and the probability variation area solenoid 99 through the panel relay terminal board 87. It

  In addition, a glass frame opening switch 91 is installed in the integrated door unit 4, and a plastic frame opening switch 93 is installed in the inner frame assembly 7. When the integrated door unit 4 is opened independently, a contact signal from the glass frame opening switch 91 is input to the main controller 70 (main control CPU 72). Further, when the inner frame assembly 7 is opened from the outer frame unit 2 (see FIG. 1), a contact signal from the plastic frame opening switch 93 is input to the main controller 70 (main control CPU 72). The main control CPU 72 can detect the open state of the integrated door unit 4 and the inner frame assembly 7 from these contact signals. When the main control CPU 72 detects the open state of the integrated door unit 4 and the inner frame assembly 7, it generates a door open information signal as the above external information signal.

  A payout control device 92 is provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 (prize privilege granting means). The payout control device 92 (payout control computer) controls the operation of the payout device unit 172. The payout control device 92 is equipped with a circuit board (payout control board) on which a payout control CPU 94 is mounted, and the payout control CPU 94 is also configured as an LSI in which semiconductor memories such as a ROM 96 and a RAM 98 are integrated together with a CPU core (not shown). Has been done. The payout control device 92 (payout control CPU 94) controls the operation of the payout device unit 172 based on the prize ball instruction command from the main control CPU 72, and executes the payout device unit 172 with the requested number of game balls. Let The main control CPU 72 generates a prize ball information signal as the external information signal together with the prize ball instruction command.

  In a prize ball case (not shown) of the dispensing device unit 172, the dispensing device substrate 100 is installed together with the dispensing motor 102 (for example, a stepping motor). The payout device substrate 100 is provided with a drive circuit for the payout motor 102. The payout device substrate 100 specifically controls the rotation angle of the payout motor 102 based on the payout number instruction signal from the payout control device 92 (payout control CPU 94), and pays out the instructed number of game balls from the prize ball case. Let out. The paid game balls are sent to the saucer unit 6 (see FIG. 1) through the payout flow passage in the flow passage unit 173 (see FIG. 2).

  Further, for example, the payout passage ball cut switch 104 is installed at the upstream position of the prize ball case, and the payout counting switch 106 is installed at the downstream position of the payout motor 102. When a prize ball is actually paid out by driving the payout motor 102, a count signal from the payout counting switch 106 is input to the payout device substrate 100 each time. Further, when a ball break occurs at the upstream position of the prize ball case, a contact signal from the payout path ball break switch 104 is input to the payout device substrate 100. The payout device substrate 100 transmits the input count signal and contact signal to the payout control device 92 (payout control CPU 94). The payout control CPU 94 can detect the actual number of payouts and the out-of-ball state based on the signal received from the payout device substrate 100.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1, for example, a full tank switch 161 is installed inside the lower plate 6c (see FIG. 1) (the position of the back when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 1). The prize balls (game balls) actually paid out are discharged to the upper plate 6b through the flow path unit 173, but when the upper plate 6b is filled with the game balls, the game balls further paid out are described above. So that it flows into the lower plate 6c. Further, when the lower plate 6c is filled with game balls, the full tank switch 161 is turned on, and a full tank detection signal is input to the payout control device 92 (payout control CPU 94). In response to this, even if the payout control CPU 94 receives the award ball instruction command from the main control CPU 72, the award ball operation beyond that is temporarily suspended, and the unpaid remaining award number is stored in the RAM 98. Note that the memory of the RAM 98 can be backed up even when the power is cut off, and even if a power failure (including a momentary power failure) occurs during the game, the unpaid prize ball remaining number information is not lost. .

  Further, on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, a firing solenoid 110 is installed together with the firing control board 108. Further, a ball feeding solenoid 111 is provided in the tray unit 6. The firing control board 108, the firing solenoid 110, and the ball feed solenoid 111 constitute a firing control board set 174 (see FIG. 2). The firing control board 108 is provided with a drive circuit for driving the firing solenoid 110 and the ball feeding solenoid 111. The ball feed solenoid 111 carries out an operation of sending the game balls stored in the saucer unit 6 one by one to a predetermined launch position in the launcher case. In addition, the firing solenoid 110 hits the game ball sent to the firing position and intermittently and continuously shoots one game ball toward the game area 8a. The game balls are fired at intervals of, for example, about 0.6 seconds (100 or less per minute).

  On the other hand, the handle unit 16 (see FIG. 1) located on the front side of the pachinko machine 1 is provided with a firing lever volume 112, a touch sensor 114, and a firing stop switch 116. The firing lever volume 112 generates an analog signal proportional to the operation amount (so-called stroke) of the firing handle by the player. Further, the touch sensor 114 detects that the player's body is touching the handle unit 16 (shooting handle) based on the change in capacitance, and outputs the detection signal. Then, the firing stop switch 116 generates a firing stop signal (contact signal) according to the operation of the player.

  A launch relay terminal plate 118 is installed in the tray unit 6. The signals from the firing lever volume 112, the touch sensor 114, and the firing stop switch 116 are transmitted to the firing control board 108 via the firing relay terminal board 118. The drive signal from the firing control board 108 is input to the ball feeding solenoid 111 via the firing relay terminal board 118. When the player operates the firing handle, an analog signal (may be an encoded digital signal) is generated by the firing lever volume 112 according to the operation amount, and the firing solenoid 110 is driven based on the signal at this time. As a result, the strength with which the game ball is launched is adjusted according to the amount of operation by the player. The drive circuit of the firing control board 108 stops driving the firing solenoid 110 when the detection signal from the touch sensor 114 is off (low level) or when the firing stop signal is input from the firing stop switch 116. To do. In addition to this, a game ball lending device connection terminal board 120 is connected to the launch relay terminal board 118. When the CR unit is not connected to the game ball lending device connection terminal board 120, the drive circuit of the firing control board 108 also stops driving the firing solenoid 110.

  Further, the tray unit 6 includes a frequency display board 122 and a lending / returning switch board 123. The frequency display board 122 is provided with the display (3 segment 7-segment LED) of the frequency display unit. Also, switch modules connected to the ball lending button 10 and the return button 12 (see FIG. 1 for both) are mounted on the lending and returning switch board 123. When the ball lending button 10 or the return button 12 is operated, the operation signal is transmitted from the lending and returning switch board 123 to the CR unit via the gaming ball or the like lending device connection terminal board 120. In addition, from the CR unit, a frequency signal indicating the remaining frequency of the valuable medium is transmitted to the frequency display board 122 via the game ball lending device connection terminal board 120. A display circuit (not shown) on the frequency display substrate 122 drives the display device based on the frequency signal to numerically display the remaining frequency of the valuable medium. Further, when the valuable medium is not loaded in the CR unit or the remaining frequency of the loaded valuable medium becomes 0, the display circuit of the frequency display board 122 drives the display unit to perform the demo display (the valuable medium). Can also be displayed.

  Further, the pachinko machine 1 is provided with a production control device 124 (production control computer) as a control configuration. The effect control device 124 controls the effect associated with the progress of the game on the pachinko machine 1. The effect control device 124 is also equipped with a circuit board (composite sub-control board) on which an effect control CPU 126, which is a central processing unit, is mounted. The effect control CPU 126 incorporates a semiconductor memory such as a ROM 128 or a RAM 130 as a main memory together with a CPU core (not shown). The effect control device 124 is provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 at a position covered by the back cover unit 178 (see FIG. 2).

  In addition, the effect control device 124 is equipped with an input / output driver (not shown) and various peripheral ICs, as well as a lamp drive circuit 132 and a sound drive circuit 134. The effect control CPU 126 controls the effect based on the command for effect transmitted from the main control CPU 72, gives a command to the lamp drive circuit 132 and the sound drive circuit 134, and emits various lamps 46 to 52 and the panel lamp 53. The speaker 54, 55, 56 actually outputs a sound effect, voice, or the like.

  The effect control device 124 and the main control device 70 are connected to each other via, for example, a communication harness (not shown). However, communication between them is performed in only one direction from the main control device 70 to the effect control device 124, and communication in the opposite direction is not performed. It should be noted that the communication harness may adopt a parallel format according to the bus width of various commands transmitted from the main control device 70 to the effect control device 124, or each driver IC (I / O). The serial format may be adopted according to the hardware configuration of.

  The lamp drive circuit 132 includes, for example, a switching element such as a PWM (pulse width modulation) IC or MOSFET (not shown). The lamp drive circuit 132 switches (or switches duty) the drive voltage applied to various lamps including LEDs, and manages operations such as light emission and blinking of the various lamps. In addition to the glass frame top lamps 46, the glass frame decoration lamps 48, the glass frame side lamps 50, and the saucer lamps 52, various kinds of lamps are also included in the board panel lamps 53 for decoration and effect installed in the game board unit 8 See also FIG. 1). The board lamp 53 corresponds to the LEDs built in the above-mentioned effect unit, the variable start winning device 28, the first variable winning device 30, the second variable winning device 31, and the like. Although FIG. 5 shows an example in which the saucer lamp 52 is connected to the glass frame decorative board 136, the saucer decorative board is installed in the saucer unit 6, and the saucer lamp 52 is provided with the saucer decorative board. It may be configured to be connected to the lamp drive circuit 132 via the.

  The sound drive circuit 134 is, for example, a sound generator including a sound ROM, a sound control IC, an amplifier, and the like, which are not shown. The sound driving circuit 134 drives the upper speaker 54 and the lower speaker 56 (see FIG. 1) to output sound.

  In the present embodiment, a glass frame electric decoration substrate 136 is installed on the inner surface of the integrated door unit 4, and drive signals from the lamp drive circuit 132 and the acoustic drive circuit 134 pass through the glass frame electric decoration substrate 136 and various lamps 46. To 52 and speakers 54, 55, 56. Further, the above-mentioned production switching button 45 is connected to the glass frame electric circuit board 136, and when the player operates the production switching button 45, the contact signal is sent to the production control device 124 through the glass frame electric circuit board 136. Is entered. Further, a jog dial 45a is connected to the glass frame decorative board 136, and when the player rotates the jog dial 45a, the rotation signal is input to the effect control device 124 through the glass frame decorative board 136. Although FIG. 5 shows an example in which the effect switching button 45 and the jog dial 45a are connected to the glass frame decorative board 136, when the saucer decorative board is installed in the saucer unit 6, the effect switching button 45 and The jog dial 45a may be connected to the saucer decorative board.

  In addition, a panel lighting board 138 is installed in the game board unit 8. In addition to the panel lamp 53, a movable body solenoid 57 is connected to the panel lighting substrate 138. The movable body solenoid 57 drives the movable body 40f via a link mechanism (not shown), for example. The drive signal from the lamp drive circuit 132 is input to the panel lamp 53 and the movable body solenoid 57 via the panel illumination board 138, respectively.

  The liquid crystal display 42, the movable liquid crystal display 43, and the movable liquid crystal display 44 are installed on the back side of the game board unit 8. The respective display screens of the liquid crystal display 42, the movable liquid crystal display 43, and the movable liquid crystal display 44 are visible through a substantially rectangular opening formed in the game board unit 8. Further, an inverter board 158 is installed on the back side of the game board unit 8. The inverter substrate 158 generates an AC power source that is applied to, for example, cold cathode tubes provided in the backlight units of the liquid crystal display 42, the movable liquid crystal display 43, and the movable liquid crystal display 44. Further, a production display control device 144 is installed on the back side of the game board unit 8. The display operations of the liquid crystal display 42, the movable liquid crystal display 43, and the movable liquid crystal display 44 are controlled by the effect display control device 144. The effect display control device 144 is equipped with a display control CPU 146, which is a general-purpose central processing unit, and a circuit board (effect display control board) on which the VDP 152 that is a display processor is mounted. The display control CPU 146 is configured as an LSI in which semiconductor memories such as a ROM 148 and a RAM 150 are integrated with a CPU core (not shown). Further, the VDP 152 is configured as an LSI in which semiconductor memories such as an image ROM 154 and a VRAM 156 are integrated together with a processor core (not shown). The VRAM 156 can use part of its storage area as a frame buffer.

  A basic program regarding control of effect is stored in the ROM 128 of the effect control CPU 126, and the effect control CPU 126 executes effect control according to this program. The control of the effect includes control of the effect using the various lamps 46 to 53 and the speakers 54, 55, 56 as described above, as well as the liquid crystal display 42, the movable liquid crystal display 43, and the movable liquid crystal display 44. The effect control by the image display using is included. The production control CPU 126 transmits basic information (for example, production number) relating to the production to the display control CPU 146, and the display control CPU 146 which has received the information specifically produces an image for production based on the basic information. Control to display. In this way, the effect control CPU 126 and the effect display control device 144 including the effect control CPU 126 correspond to an example of a variable effect control unit that controls the liquid crystal display 42, the movable liquid crystal display 43, and the movable liquid crystal display 44.

  The liquid crystal display 42 provides a first variation effect in which the result of the first lottery executed when the game ball enters the one of the first start winning opening 26 and the variable starting winning opening 28a is notified. It corresponds to a first variation effect executing means to be executed. The liquid crystal display 42 executes the first variation effect in conjunction with the variation display of the special symbol A displayed on the special figure A display device 34. The movable liquid crystal displays 43 and 44 execute the second fluctuation effect in which the result of the second lottery executed when the game ball enters the second starting winning opening 27 is notified is executed as the second fluctuation effect. It corresponds to the means. The movable liquid crystal displays 43 and 44 execute the second variation effect in conjunction with the variation display of the special symbol B displayed on the special symbol B display device 35. Although the details will be described later, the first variation effect is an effect that displays a mode in which the effect symbols 420a, 420b, and 420c are variably displayed and then stopped and displayed, on the display screen of the liquid crystal display 42. In addition, the second variation effect is an effect of displaying a mode in which the effect symbols 420a, 420b, and 420c are variably displayed and then stopped and displayed on the display screen of at least one of the movable liquid crystal display 43 and the movable liquid crystal display 44. .

  The display control CPU 146 outputs a more detailed control signal to the VDP 152. The VDP 152 accesses the image ROM 154 based on the received control signal, reads necessary image data from the image ROM 154, and transfers it to the VRAM 156. Further, the VDP 152 expands the image data on the VRAM 156 for each frame (still image per unit time) in the frame buffer, and based on the image data buffered here, the liquid crystal display 42, the movable liquid crystal display 43, and the movable display. Each pixel (full color pixel) of the liquid crystal display 44 is individually driven.

  In addition, a power control unit 162 (power control means) is provided on the back side of the inner frame assembly 7. The power supply control unit 162 has a built-in switching power supply circuit, and when external power (for example, AC24V or the like) is taken from the island facility through the power cord 164, necessary power (for example, DC + 34V, + 12V or the like) can be generated from the external power. The power generated by the power supply control unit 162 is distributed to the main controller 70, the payout controller 92, the effect controller 124, and the inverter board 158. Further, the electric power is supplied to the launch control board 108 via the payout control device 92, and the electric power is supplied to the CR unit via the game ball lending device connection terminal board 120. The low-voltage power for logic (for example, DC + 5V) is generated by a power supply IC (three-terminal regulator or the like) built in each device. Further, the power supply control unit 162 is grounded (grounded) to the island facility through a ground wire 166.

  The external terminal board 160 is connected to the payout control device 92. Various external information signals generated by the main control device 70 (main control CPU 72) are output to the outside from the external terminal board 160 via the payout control device 92. The main controller 70 (main control CPU 72) and the payout controller 92 (payout control CPU 94) can output an external information signal to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 through the external terminal board 160. The signals output from the external terminal board 160 are totaled by, for example, a hall computer (not shown) in the game arcade. Although the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment has a configuration in which various external information signals pass through the payout control device 92, various external information signals are directly output from the main control device 70 to the external terminal board 160. It may have a configuration as described above.

  The above is a configuration example relating to control of the pachinko machine 1. Subsequently, a control process executed by the main control CPU 72 of the main control device 70 will be described.

[Reset start (main) processing]
When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the main control CPU 72 starts a reset start process. The reset start process prepares the initial state of the pachinko machine 1 by recovering the game state (so-called power restoration) based on the backup information saved at the previous power shutdown, or conversely clearing the backup information. This is processing for. Further, the reset start process is positioned as a main process (main control program) for ensuring a stable game operation of the pachinko machine 1 after the adjustment of the initial state.

  6 and 7 are flowcharts showing a procedure example of the reset start process. The processing performed by the main control CPU 72 will be described below step by step.

Step S101:
The main control CPU 72 first sets the stack area start address in the stack pointer, and proceeds to step S102.

Step S102:
Subsequently, the main control CPU72 sets the vector type interrupt mode (mode 2), corrects the default RST type interrupt mode (mode 0), and proceeds to step S103. As a result, after that, the main control CPU 72 can execute a designated interrupt handler by referring to an arbitrary address (however, the least significant bit is 0) as an interrupt vector.

Step S103:
The main control CPU72 executes the reset standby process here, and proceeds to step S104. The process of step S103 is to secure a certain waiting time (for example, about several thousand ms) at the time of reset start (for example, power-on) and check the main power-off detection signal during that time. Specifically, when the main control CPU 72 sets the loop counter for the waiting time, the main control CPU 72 bit-checks the input port of the main power-off detection signal while decrementing the value of the loop counter. The main power-off detection signal is input from, for example, a power supply monitoring IC that is a peripheral device. Then, if the input of the main power-off detection signal is confirmed before the loop counter becomes 0, the main control CPU 72 restarts the process from the beginning. This makes it possible to protect the system when, for example, the operation of turning on and off the main power switch (not shown) is repeatedly performed within a short time (about 1 to 2 seconds).

Step S104:
Next, the main control CPU72 permits access to the work area of the RAM76, and proceeds to step S105. Specifically, the main control CPU72 resets (00H) the RAM protection setting value of the work area. As a result, after that, access to the work area of the RAM 76 is permitted. In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, numerical values of various set values and various numbers are set in hexadecimal. Hereinafter, when a hexadecimal number is indicated, it is indicated by adding "H". For example, “00H” indicates the value “0” represented by a hexadecimal number.

Step S105:
The main control CPU72 initializes the mask register to set the interrupt mask, and proceeds to step S106. Specifically, the main control CPU72 stores in the mask register a value that enables the CTC interrupt.

Step S106:
The main control CPU 72 refers to the input signal from the RAM clear switch saved earlier, and confirms whether or not the RAM clear switch has been operated (switch ON). If the RAM clear switch has not been operated (No), then step S107 is executed.

Step S107:
Next, the main control CPU72 confirms whether or not the backup information is stored in the RAM76, that is, whether or not the backup validity determination flag is set. If the backup is normally completed in the previous power-off process and the backup validity determination flag (for example, "A55AH") is set (Yes), then the main control CPU72 executes step S108.

Step S108:
The main control CPU72 performs a sum check on the backup information in the RAM76. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 performs a sum check on all areas of the work area of the RAM 76 (user work area including the use prohibited area and the stack area) except the backup validity determination flag and the sum check buffer. If the result of the sum check is normal (Yes), then the main control CPU72 executes step S109.

Step S109:
The main control CPU72 resets the backup validity determination flag (for example, "0000H"), and proceeds to step S110.
Step S110:
The main control CPU72 clears the command waiting for transmission immediately before the occurrence of the previous power failure, and moves to step S111.

Step S111:
Next, the main control CPU72 executes the effect control return processing, the process proceeds to step S112. In the process of step S111, the main control CPU72 instructs the effect control device 124 to return a command (for example, a model designation command, a special symbol probability state designation command, a special figure destination determination effect command, an operation memory number increase effect command, an operation). A storage number decreasing time effect command, a number-of-times-cut-counter remaining number command, a special game state designation command, etc.) are transmitted, and the process proceeds to step S112. In response to this, the effect control device 124 is in the effect state that was being executed at the time of the previous power-off (for example, the internal probability state, the effect symbol display mode, the operation memory number effect display mode, the sound output content, various lamps). It is possible to recover the light emitting state).

Step S112:
The main control CPU72 executes a state restoration process, and proceeds to step S116. In the process of step S112, the main control CPU72 sets various values in the work area of the RAM76 based on the backup information, and the game state that was being executed at the time of the previous power-off (for example, the display mode of the special symbol, the internal probability). State, operation memory content, various flag states, random number update state, etc.). Further, the main control CPU72 restores the backed-up value of the PC register.

  On the other hand, when the RAM clear switch is operated when the power is turned on (step S106: Yes), the backup validity determination flag is not set (step S107: No), or the backup information is not normal ( (Step S108: No), the main control CPU72 shifts to step S113.

Step S113:
The main control CPU72 clears the stored contents of the RAM76 other than the prohibited area, and proceeds to step S114. As a result, the work area and stack area of the RAM 76 are all initialized, and even if valid backup information is saved, its contents are erased.

Step S114:
The main control CPU72 initializes the RAM76, and proceeds to step S115.

Step S115:
The main control CPU72 executes effect control output processing, and proceeds to step S116. In the process of step S115, the main control CPU72 outputs a command (a command necessary for effect control) to be transmitted to the effect control device 124 after the initial setting.

Step S116:
The main control CPU72 executes a payout control output process, and proceeds to step S117. In the process of step S116, the main control CPU72 outputs to the payout control device 92 an instruction command for starting the payout of prize balls.

Step S117:
The main control CPU72 executes CTC initialization processing to initialize CTC (counter / timer circuit) which is a peripheral device. In the process of step S117, the main control CPU72 sets the interrupt vector register, and also sets the interrupt count value (for example, 4 ms) in the CTC. As a result, when the CTC interrupt occurs next time, the main control CPU72 can continue the process from the program address of the PC register that was backed up.

  When the procedure from step S101 to step S117 described above is executed in the reset start processing, the main control CPU72 shifts to the main loop shown in FIG.

Step S118:
The main control CPU72 prohibits the interrupt, then executes the power interruption occurrence check process, and proceeds to step S119. In the process of step S118, the main control CPU 72 bit-checks the input port of the main power-off detection signal to monitor the occurrence of power-off (driving voltage drop).

Step S119:
When the power is cut off, the main control CPU 72 clears the output port buffers corresponding to the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 88, the first big winning opening solenoid 90, the second big winning opening solenoid 97, the probability variation area solenoid 99, etc., and the RAM 76. Back up the entire contents of the work area excluding the backup validity judgment flag and the sum check buffer, and save the sum result value in the sum check buffer. Then, the main control CPU72 stores the above-mentioned valid value (for example, "A55AH") in the backup valid determination flag area, prohibits the access to the RAM76, and stops the processing (NOP), and then executes step S120. On the other hand, if the power shutdown does not occur, the main control CPU72 next executes step S120. The detailed procedure of the power failure occurrence check process (step S119) will be described later. Note that there is also a known programming example in which the CPU is caused to execute the processing at the time of the occurrence of power failure as a non-maskable interrupt (NMI) processing.

Step S120:
The main control CPU72 executes the initial value update random number update processing, and proceeds to step S121. In the process of step S120, the main control CPU72 increments the random number for updating (changing) the initial values of various software random numbers. In the present embodiment, various kinds of random numbers except jackpot determination random numbers (hardware random numbers) and hit determination random numbers (hardware random numbers) corresponding to ordinary symbols (for example, jackpot symbol random numbers, reach group determination random numbers, reach mode determination random numbers, and Random pattern random numbers, etc.) are generated on the program. These software random numbers are updated by a loop counter within a predetermined range in another interrupt process (step S201 in FIG. 9), but the initial value of the loop counter (all Random number does not have to be the target) has been changed. The initial value updating random number is used to randomly change the initial value, and in step S120, the initial value updating random number is updated. It should be noted that the reason why step S120 is executed after prohibiting the interrupt in step S118 is that the same processing is executed in another interrupt management process (step S202 in FIG. 9), and therefore, duplication (competition) with this is performed. ) Is to prevent. As described above, in the present embodiment, the big hit determination random number and the hit determination random number are hardware random numbers generated by the random number generator 75, and the update cycle thereof is faster than the timer interrupt cycle (for example, several ms). Since it is (for example, several μs), it is not necessary to update the big hit determination random number and the initial value of the hit determination random number.

Step S121:
The main control CPU72 permits the interrupt and proceeds to step S122.

Step S122:
The main control CPU72 executes other random number update processing, and returns to step S118. The random numbers updated in the process of step S122 are random numbers (reach group determination random numbers, reach mode determination random numbers, fluctuation pattern random numbers, etc.) that do not relate to the determination of the winning type (winning type) among the software random numbers. The process of step S122 is performed in the remaining time when the timer interrupt occurs during the execution of the main loop and the main control CPU 72 executes another interrupt management process (FIG. 9). The details of the interrupt management process will be described later.

[Power failure occurrence check processing]
FIG. 8 is a flowchart specifically showing a procedure example of the power failure occurrence check process (step S119) in the reset start process.
Step S130:
In the power-off occurrence check process, first, the main control CPU72 sets the conditions for power-off occurrence check, and proceeds to step S132. The power failure occurrence check condition can be set, for example, as an on-counter value for confirming that the main power failure detection signal is continuously output.

Step S132:
Next, the main control CPU 72 reads the main power-off detection switch input port and confirms whether or not the main power-off detection signal is output (checks a specific bit). Although not particularly shown, the main power-off detection switch is mounted on, for example, the main controller 70 (see FIG. 5), monitors the drive voltage supplied from the power supply control unit 162, and detects the voltage level of this drive voltage. If the voltage drops below the reference voltage, the main power disconnection detection signal is output. The main power-off detection switch may be incorporated in the power supply control unit 162. If the main control CPU 72 confirms that the main power-off detection signal is not output at the present time (No), it exits the process of step S132 and returns to the reset start process. On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the main power-off detection signal is output (Yes), the main control CPU72 proceeds to the next step S134.

Step S134:
The main control CPU72 confirms whether or not the check condition set in step S130 is satisfied. Specifically, the on-counter value set in step S130 is decremented by 1, for example, and it is confirmed whether or not the result has become 0. If the on-counter value is not 0 at this time (No), the main control CPU72 returns to step S132 to check the main power-off detection switch input port again. Then, when the check condition is satisfied by repeating the loop from step S134 to step S132 (step S134: Yes), the main control CPU72 proceeds to step S136.

Step S136:
The main control CPU 72 corresponds to the test signal terminal and the command control signal in addition to the output ports corresponding to the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 88, the first big winning opening solenoid 90, the second big winning opening solenoid 97 and the probability variation area solenoid 99. The output port buffer to be used is cleared, and the process proceeds to step S138.

Step S138:
Next, the main control CPU72 adds the entire contents of the work area of the RAM76 excluding the backup validity determination flag and the sum check buffer in 1-byte units, and proceeds to step S140.

Step S140:
The main control CPU72 determines whether the addition is completed for all areas, and if it is determined that the sum calculation is completed for all areas (Yes), the process proceeds to step S142, and the sum calculation is completed for all areas. If it is determined that it is not (No), the process returns to step S138. In this way, the main control CPU72 repeats until the calculation of the sum is completed for all areas.
Step S142:
When the sum calculation is completed for all the areas (step S140: Yes), the main control CPU72 stores the sum result value in the sum check buffer, and proceeds to step S144.

Step S144:
Next, the main control CPU72 stores a valid value in the backup validity determination flag area, and proceeds to step S146.

Step S146:
Next, the main control CPU72 stores "01H" indicating the access prohibition in the protect value of the RAM76, prohibits the access to the work area (including the use prohibition area and the stack area) of the RAM76, and proceeds to step S148.

Step S148:
Next, the main control CPU72 enters a standby loop and stops all other processing in preparation for shutting off the main power supply cutoff. After the main power supply is cut off, backup power is supplied from a backup power supply circuit (not shown) (for example, a circuit including a capacitive element mounted on the main control device 70), so that the contents stored in the RAM 76 are lost even after the main power supply is cut off. Retained without doing. The backup power supply circuit may be incorporated in the power supply control unit 162, for example.

  Through the above processing, all the information stored in the work area of the RAM 76 to be backed up (sum addition target) is retained in the RAM 76 as storage even after the main power is turned off. Further, the retained memory is restored as backup information at the time of power failure after confirming the normal checksum in the reset start process (FIG. 6).

[Interrupt management process (timer interrupt process)]
Next, the interrupt management process (timer interrupt process) will be described. FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of interrupt management processing. The main control CPU72 executes an interrupt management process every predetermined time (for example, several ms) based on the interrupt request signal from the counter / timer circuit. Hereinafter, each procedure will be described.

Step S200:
When the interrupt management process is started, the main control CPU 72 first saves the values of the registers (the pairs of accumulator A and flag register F and general-purpose registers B to L) used during execution of the main loop in the RAM 76. The image is saved in the area, and the process proceeds to step S201. Another value can be written in the registers (A to L) after these values are saved in the interrupt management process.

Step S201:
Next, the main control CPU72 executes a lottery random number updating process, and proceeds to step S202. In the process of step S201, the main control CPU72 updates the value of the counter for generating various random numbers for lottery. The value of each counter is incremented in the counter area of the RAM 76 and each loops within a specified range. Various random numbers include, for example, a big hit symbol random number.

Step S202:
The main control CPU72 also executes the initial value update random number update processing in step S202, and proceeds to step S203. Since the content of the process in step S202 is the same as the content of the process in step S201, the description thereof will be omitted.

Step S203:
The main control CPU72 executes an input process, and proceeds to step S204. In the process of step S203, the main control CPU 72 inputs various switch signals from the input / output (I / O) port 79. Specifically, the passage detection signals from the gate switch 78 and the probability variation area switch 95, the first start winning opening switch 80, the second starting winning opening switch 82, the variable starting winning opening switch 83, the first count switch 84, the The input state (ON / OFF) of the winning detection signal from the 2-count switch 85 and the winning opening switch 86 is read.

Step S204:
Next, the main control CPU72 executes a switch input event process, and proceeds to step S205a. In the processing of step S204, among the switch signals input in the input processing of step S203, the winning detection signals from the gate switch 78, the first start winning opening switch 80, the second starting winning opening switch 82, and the variable starting winning opening switch 83. Based on the, the event that occurred during the game is determined, and further processing is executed according to the event that has occurred. The specific contents of the switch input event process will be described later with reference to another flowchart.

  In the present embodiment, the main control CPU72, when the winning detection signal (ON) is input from the first starting winning opening switch 80 or the variable starting winning opening switch 83, the trigger of the internal lottery corresponding to the special symbol A during the game. (One example of the first lottery trigger) It is determined that an event has occurred, and when the winning detection signal (ON) is input from the second starting winning opening switch 82, the internal lottery corresponding to the special symbol B is played during the game. It is determined that an event that triggers (an example of the second lottery trigger) has occurred. That is, the main control CPU72 is an example of a first lottery means for performing the first lottery when the first lottery trigger occurs during the game, and when the second lottery trigger different from the first lottery trigger occurs during the game. It is also an example of a second lottery means for performing the second lottery. Further, when a passage detection signal (ON) is input from the gate switch 78, the main control CPU 72 determines that an event that triggers a lottery corresponding to a normal symbol has occurred. When determining that any of the events has occurred, the main control CPU72 executes processing according to each event. The processing executed when the winning detection signal is input from the first start winning opening switch 80, the second starting winning opening switch 82 or the variable starting winning opening switch 83 will be described later with reference to another flowchart. .

Step S205a:
The main control CPU72 executes the special symbol B game process during the interrupt management process, and proceeds to step S205b.

Step S205b:
Next, the main control PU72 executes the special symbol A game process during the interrupt management process, and shifts to step S206.

Step S206:
Next, the main control CPU72 executes the normal symbol game process during the interrupt management process, the process proceeds to step S207.

  The processes of step S205a, step S205b, and step S206 are processes for specifically progressing the game in the pachinko machine 1. In the special symbol B game process (step S205a), the main control CPU72 controls the execution of the internal lottery corresponding to the special symbol B triggered by the game ball entering the second starting winning opening 27, or the special symbol B The variable display and the stop display by the display device 35 are controlled, and the operations of the first variable winning device 30 and the second variable winning device 31 are controlled according to the result of the stop display of the special figure B display device 35. Further, in the special symbol A game process (step S205b), the main control CPU72, the special symbol triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first start winning port 26 or the variable starting winning device 28 (ie variable starting winning port 28a) The execution of the internal lottery corresponding to A is controlled, the variable display and the stop display by the special figure A display device 34 are controlled, and the first variable winning device 30 is controlled according to the result of the stop display of the special figure A display device 34. Also, it controls the operation of the second variable winning device 31.

  The pachinko machine 1 holds either the special symbol A or the special symbol B when the first starting winning opening 26, the variable starting winning device 28, and the second starting winning opening 27 are won at the same time or after the jackpot game is over. If there is also a special symbol B so that the process can be started first, the special symbol B game process is configured to be executed before the special symbol A game process. The details of the special symbol B game process and the special symbol A game process will be described later using another flowchart.

  Moreover, in the normal symbol game process (step S206), the main control CPU72 controls the variable display and the stop display by the normal symbol display device 33, and the variable start winning device according to the result of the stop display of the normal symbol display device 33. 28 to control the operation. For example, the main control CPU72 is stored in the switch input event process (step S204) the random number (normal symbol per decision random number) acquired upon the passage of the starting gate 20 as a trigger, and stored in the normal symbol game process. The random number value is read and it is determined whether or not it falls within a predetermined hit range (operation lottery execution means). When the random number falls within the hit range, the normal symbol display device 33 variably displays the normal symbol and performs a stop display of the normal symbol in a predetermined hit mode, and then the main control CPU 72 turns on the normal electric accessory solenoid 88. The variable start winning device 28 is excited to operate (movable piece operating means). On the other hand, if the random number value is out of the hit range, the main control CPU72 performs the stop display of the normal symbol in a mode of being out after the variable display.

Step S207:
Next, the main control CPU72 executes prize ball payout processing, and proceeds to step S208. In the process of step S207, based on the winning detection signals input from the various switches 80, 82, 83, 84, 85, 86 in the input process (step S203), the prize control device 92 is instructed of the number of prize balls. Generates and outputs a ball instruction command.

Step S208:
Next, the main control CPU72 executes external information processing, and proceeds to step S209. In the process of step S208, the main control CPU 72 sends the above external information signal (for example, prize ball information, door opening information, symbol determination frequency information, big hit information, start information, etc.) to the hall computer in the game hall through the external terminal board 160. Is stored in the port output request buffer.

  In the present embodiment, among various external information signals, for example, “big hit 1” to “big hit 10” are output to the outside as big hit information, so that the external electronic device (data display) connected to the pachinko machine 1 is displayed. Equipment and hall computer) can provide various jackpot information (external information signal output means). That is, the jackpot information is divided into a plurality of “jackpots 1” to “jackpots 10” and output, and the combination (winning type) of jackpots is totaled and managed by a hall computer (not shown) from these combinations, or internally. Recognize changes in probability state (low probability state or high probability state) or shortened symbol fluctuation time, or generate a small hit (a condition device does not work) that is not classified as a "big hit" even if not winning It is possible to aggregate and manage. In addition, based on the jackpot information, for example, by using a data display device (not shown), the number of jackpot occurrences within the past few business days can be counted and displayed for each unit of the pachinko machine 1, and whether or not each unit is currently playing a jackpot. It is possible to recognize, or it is possible to recognize whether or not each symbol is currently in a shortened symbol variation time. In the external information processing in step S208, the main control CPU72 controls the output states (ON or OFF set) of "big hit 1" to "big hit 10" in detail.

Step S209:
The main control CPU72 executes the test signal processing, and proceeds to step S210. In the process of step S209, the main control CPU72 has its own internal state (for example, a normal symbol game management state, a special symbol game management state, a big jackpot game, a small jackpot game, a probability variation function operation, a time saving function operation). Various test signals to be expressed are generated, and the generated various test signals are stored in the port output request buffer. With this test signal, for example, the internal state of the main control CPU 72 can be tested outside the main control device 70.

Step S210:
The main control CPU72 executes the display output management process, and proceeds to step S211. In the process of step S210, the main control CPU72, the normal symbol display device 33, the normal symbol working memory lamp 33a, the special symbol A display device 34, the special symbol B display device 35, the special symbol A working memory lamp 34a, the special symbol B working memory. The lighting states of the lamp 35a, the game state display device 38, etc. are controlled. Specifically, the drive signal stored in the port output request buffer in the special symbol game process (step S205) or the normal symbol game process (step S206) is output to the port. The drive signal is stored in the port output request buffer as byte data applied to each LED. As a result, each LED is driven in a predetermined display mode (a mode in which variable display and stop display of symbols, operation memory number display, game state display, and the like are performed).

Step S211:
The main control CPU72 executes an output management process, and proceeds to step S212. In the process of step S211, the main control CPU72 outputs the external information signal (byte data) stored in the port output request buffer in the external information processing (step S208) to the port. Further, the main control CPU72, the drive signal for each of the normal electric auditors solenoid 88, the first big winning opening solenoid 90, the second big winning opening solenoid 97 and the probability variation area solenoid 99 stored in the port output request buffer, the test. Output signals to ports together.

Step S212:
The main control CPU72 executes effect control output processing, and proceeds to step S213. In the process of step S212, it is confirmed whether or not there is a command (command required for effect control) that the main control CPU 72 should transmit to the effect control device 124 in the command buffer. Output command to port.

Step S213:
The main control CPU72 clears the port output request buffer stored at this CTC interruption, and proceeds to step S214.

  The pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment is configured to execute the processing (game control program module) of steps S205 to S212 as a timer interrupt processing, but these processings are incorporated in the main loop of the CPU. May be programmed to run.

Step S214:
When the processing from step S200 to step S213 is completed, the main control CPU72 stores the value (01H) designating the end of interrupt in the interrupt program counter, ends the CTC interrupt, and proceeds to step S214.

Step S215:
The main control CPU72 restores the saved values of the registers (A to L), and proceeds to step S216.

Step S216:
Next, the main control CPU72 permits the next CTC interrupt and returns to the main loop (the program address designated by the stack pointer).

[Switch input event processing]
FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the switch input event process (step S204 in FIG. 9). Hereinafter, each procedure will be described.

Step S10:
The main control CPU72 confirms whether or not a first start winning opening detection signal is input from the first starting winning opening switch 80 corresponding to the special symbol A (a lottery trigger is generated). When the input of the first start winning opening detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU72 shifts to step S12. On the other hand, when the input of the first start winning opening detection signal is not confirmed (No), the main control CPU72 shifts to step S11.

Step S11:
The main control CPU72 confirms whether or not a variable start winning opening detection signal is input from the variable starting winning opening switch 83 corresponding to the special symbol A (a lottery trigger is generated). When the input of the variable start winning opening detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU72 shifts to step S12. On the other hand, when the input of the variable start winning opening detection signal is not confirmed (No), the main control CPU72 shifts to step S13 without executing step S12.

Step S12:
The main control CPU72 executes the special symbol A storage update process, and proceeds to step S13. The details of the specific process executed in the special symbol A storage update process will be described later with reference to another flowchart.

Step S13:
Next, the main control CPU72 confirms whether or not a second start winning opening detection signal is input from the second starting winning opening switch 82 corresponding to the special symbol B (a lottery trigger is generated). When the input of the second start winning opening detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU72 shifts to the next step S14. On the other hand, when the input of the second start winning opening detection signal is not confirmed (No), the main control CPU72 shifts to step S15 without executing step S14.

Step S15:
The main control CPU72 executes the special symbol B storage update process, and proceeds to step S15. The details of the specific process executed in the special symbol B storage update process will be described later with reference to another flowchart.

Step S15:
The main control CPU72 confirms whether or not the first count switch detection signal is input from the first count switch 84 corresponding to the first big winning opening 30b of the first variable winning device 30. When the input of the first count switch detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU72 shifts to step S16. On the other hand, when the input of the first count switch detection signal is not confirmed (No), the main control CPU72 proceeds to step S27 without executing step S16.

Step S16:
The main control CPU72 counts the number of winning balls to the first variable winning device 30 for each round during the big hit game in the first big winning hole counting process, and proceeds to step S17.

Step S17:
The main control CPU72 confirms whether or not the second count switch detection signal is input from the second count switch 85 corresponding to the second special winning opening 31b of the second variable winning device 31. When the input of the second count switch detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU72 shifts to step S18. On the other hand, when the input of the second count switch detection signal is not confirmed (No), the main control CPU72 proceeds to step S19 without executing step S18.

  The main control CPU72 counts the number of winning balls to the second variable winning device 31 for each round during the big hit game in the second big winning hole counting process, and proceeds to step S19.

Step S19:
The main control CPU72 confirms whether or not a gate switch detection signal which is a passage detection signal is input from the gate switch 78 corresponding to the normal pattern. When the input of the gate switch detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU72 shifts to step S20. On the other hand, when the input of the gate switch detection signal is not confirmed (No), the main control CPU72 proceeds to step S21 without executing step S20.

Step S20:
The main control CPU72 confirms whether or not the current normal symbol working memory number is less than the upper limit number (for example, four) in the normal symbol memory update process, and if it does not reach the upper limit number, normally acquires a random number per symbol. To do. Moreover, the main control CPU72 normally increments the symbol working memory number by one. Further, the main control CPU72 stores the obtained random number per normal symbol in the random number storage area of the RAM76. The main control CPU72 shifts to step S21 when these processes are completed.

Step S21:
The main control CPU72 confirms whether a probability variation area switch detection signal is input from the probability variation area switch 95 corresponding to the probability variation area 31d provided inside the second variable winning device 31. When the input of the probability variation area switch detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU72 shifts to step S22. On the other hand, when the input of the probability variation area switch detection signal is not confirmed (No), the main control CPU72 returns to the interrupt management processing (FIG. 9) without executing step S22.

Step S22:
The main control CPU72 sets the value (01H) of the probability fluctuation function operation flag as the game status flag in the flag area of the RAM 76 in the probability variation area passage processing of step S22 (high probability state transition means, probability fluctuation function operation means). The probability variation function operation flag is reset after the jackpot game is over and the special symbol is changed a predetermined number of times (for example, 80 times) without obtaining a winning result (see step S4650 in FIG. 28 described later). Further, as the probability variation area passage processing, the main control CPU 72 generates a probability variation area passage command. The probability variation area passage command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process (step S212 in FIG. 9). The main control CPU 72 may execute the probability variation area passage process only within a specific effective time (for example, the time during which the probability variation area solenoid 99 is activated during the big hit game). The main control CPU72 returns to the interrupt management process (FIG. 9) when these processes are completed.

[Special symbol A memory update process]
FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the special symbol A storage update process (step S12 (see FIG. 10) of the switch input event process). Hereinafter, the procedure of the special symbol A storage update process will be described step by step.

Step S30:
When starting the special symbol A storage update process, the main control CPU 72 first refers to the value of the special symbol A working memory number counter, and confirms whether the working memory number is less than the maximum value (for example, 4). . The working memory number counter is a counter that represents the number (set number) of the big hit determination random number, the big hit symbol random number, and the like stored in the random number storage area of the RAM 76. Here, the random number storage area of the RAM 76 is divided into four sections for special symbols A and four sections for special symbols B (for example, 2 bytes each), and each section has a jackpot determination random number and a jackpot symbol. It is possible to store one random number as a set. The four sections for the special symbol A are a combination of a jackpot determination random number and a jackpot symbol random number, which is acquired when a game ball enters the first starting winning opening 26, and a variable starting winning device 28, that is, a variable starting winning prize. Both a big hit determination random number and a set of big hit symbol random numbers, which are acquired when a game ball enters the mouth 28a, are stored. That is, the four sections for the special symbol A are sections that are commonly used for entering game balls into the first starting winning opening 26 and the variable starting winning device 28. At this time, if the value of the working memory number counter corresponding to the special symbol A, that is, the special symbol A working memory number has reached the maximum value (for example, 4) (No), the main control CPU72, from step S31 to step The process returns to the switch input event process (FIG. 10) without executing S39. On the other hand, if the value of the working memory number counter corresponding to the special symbol A is less than the maximum value (Yes), the main control CPU72 shifts to the next step S31.

Step S31:
The main control CPU72 adds one special symbol A working memory number, and shifts to step S32. The special symbol A working memory number counter is stored in, for example, the working memory number region of the RAM 76, and the main control CPU 72 increments the value of the special symbol A working memory number counter stored in the working memory number region (+1). . Based on the value of the counter added in step S31, the lighting state of the special symbol A working memory lamp 34a is controlled in the display output management process (step S210 (see FIG. 9) of the interrupt management process).

Step S32:
Next, the main control CPU72 acquires the jackpot determination random number value corresponding to the special symbol A from the random number generator 75 through the sampling circuit 77 (acquisition of the first lottery element, lottery element acquisition means), and proceeds to step S33. The random number value is obtained by designating the pin address of the random number generator 75. When the main control CPU 72 performs 8-bit processing, address designation is performed twice, one byte for each of the upper and lower bits. When the main control CPU 72 reads the jackpot determination random number value from the designated address, it saves the read jackpot determination random number value as the jackpot determination random number corresponding to the special symbol A in the transfer destination address.

Step S33:
Next, the main control CPU72 acquires the big hit symbol random number value corresponding to the special symbol A from the big hit symbol random number counter area of the RAM76, and proceeds to step S34. The jackpot symbol random value is also obtained by designating the address of the jackpot symbol random number counter area. When the main control CPU 72 reads the big hit symbol random number value from the designated address, it saves the read big hit symbol random number value as the big hit symbol random number corresponding to the special symbol A at the transfer destination address.

Step S34:
Next, the main control CPU72 sequentially obtains a reach mode determination random number and a variation pattern random number from the variation random number counter area of the RAM 76 as a random number value relating to the variation condition of the special symbol A (variation pattern determination element acquisition means). Similarly, the random number values of the reach mode determination random number and the variation pattern random number are obtained by designating the address of the variation random number counter area. Then, when the main control CPU 72 acquires the reach mode determination random number and the fluctuation pattern random number from the designated address, respectively, the main control CPU 72 saves the acquired reach mode determination random number and the fluctuation pattern random number in the transfer destination address.

Step S35:
The main control CPU72 transfers the saved big hit determination random number, big hit design random number, reach mode determination random number and variation pattern random number together to the random number storage area corresponding to the special symbol A, and the transferred random number is stored as the random number corresponding to the special symbol A. The empty sections in the area are stored as a set (storage means, lottery element storage means), and the process proceeds to step S36. The order (for example, first to fourth) is set in a plurality of (four in this example) sections of the random number storage area corresponding to the special symbol A. If all the first to fourth sections are empty at this stage, each random number is stored in order from the first section. If the first section is already filled and the remaining second to fourth sections are empty, each random number is stored in order from the second section. In this way, the transferred random numbers are stored in order from the smallest numbered section among the empty sections in the random number storage area corresponding to the special symbol A. The random number storage area is read in a FIFO (First In First Out) format.

Step S36:
Next, the main control CPU72 confirms whether or not the current special game management status (game state) is a big hit game. If it is not during the big hit game (No), the main control CPU72 shifts to the step S37. On the other hand, if the big hit game is in progress (Yes), the main control CPU72 shifts to step S38a without executing steps S37 and S38. In the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not the big hit game is in progress because the pre-reading effect is not performed for the ball entered during the big hit game.

Step S37:
In the case other than the big hit game (step S36: No), the main control CPU72 executes the effect production determination process for the special symbol A, the process proceeds to step S38. In the process of step S37, the result of the internal lottery is determined in advance (before the fluctuation starts) based on the jackpot determination random number and the jackpot symbol random number of the special symbol A acquired in the previous step S32 and step S33, respectively. This is a process for determining the effect contents (so-called “look ahead”) based on the result of the lottery. The details of the specific processing will be described later with reference to another flowchart.

Step S38:
After returning from the acquisition time effect determination process, the main control CPU72 next sets the upper byte portion (for example, "B8H") of the special symbol destination determination effect command for the special symbol A, and proceeds to step S38a. The upper byte data of the special figure destination determination effect command set in step S38 is data describing that the command type is “for special figure destination determination effect regarding special symbol A”. Since the lower byte portion of the special figure destination determination effect command is set in the previous acquisition effect determination processing (step S37), the upper byte is combined with the lower byte in step S38, so that, for example, one word length is obtained. The command will be generated.

Step S38a:
Next, the main control CPU72 sets the effect memory number increase effect command for the special symbol A, and shifts to step S39. Specifically, the main control CPU72 adds the increased working memory number (for example, "01H" to "04H") to the lower byte for the preceding value (for example, "BBH") of the upper byte that indicates the type of command. The produced command of 1 word length is generated. At this time, with respect to the lower byte, by setting the second digit to "0" by default, the value is "result (change information) due to an increase in the number of working memories". That is, if the lower byte is “01H”, it indicates that the number of working memories this time is “01H” as a result of incrementing the number of working memories “00H” up to the previous time by one. Similarly, if the lower byte is "02H" to "04H", it is incremented by one from the previous number of working memories "01H" to "03H", so that the number of working memories this time is "02H" to "03H". 04H ”is displayed. In addition, the preceding value “BBH” of the upper byte is a value indicating that the effect command of this time is the working memory number command for the special symbol A.

Step S39:
Next, the main control CPU72 executes the effect command output setting process for the special symbol A, and returns to the switch input event process (FIG. 10). As a result, regarding the special symbol A, the special figure destination determination effect command generated in step S38, the operation memory number increase effect effect command generated in step S38a, or the starting mouth winning sound control command is transmitted to the effect control device 124. Preparations are made (memory number notification means).

[Special symbol B memory update process]
Next, FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the special symbol B memory update process (step S16 (see FIG. 10) of the switch input event process). Hereinafter, the procedure of the special symbol A storage update process will be described step by step.

Step S40:
When starting the special symbol B memory update process, the main control CPU 72 first refers to the value of the special symbol B working memory number counter, and confirms whether the working memory number is less than the maximum value (for example, 4). . As for the special symbol B working memory number counter, like the special symbol A working memory number counter, it is a counter that represents the number (group number) of big hit determination random numbers, big hit symbol random numbers, etc. stored in the random number storage area of the RAM 76. If the value of the special symbol B working memory number counter, that is, the special symbol B working memory number has reached the maximum value (for example, 4) (No), the main control CPU72 does not execute steps S41 to S49. Return to the switch input event process (FIG. 10). On the other hand, if the value of the special symbol B working memory number counter is still less than the maximum value (Yes), the main control CPU72 shifts to step S41.

Step S41:
The main control CPU72 adds one special symbol B working memory number (increment the value of the second special symbol working memory number counter), and shifts to step S42. Similar to step S31 (see FIG. 11) of the special symbol A memory update process, based on the value of the counter added in step S41, special display output management process (step S210 of interrupt management process (see FIG. 9)) The lighting state of the symbol B working memory lamp 35a is controlled.

Step S42:
Next, the main control CPU72 acquires the jackpot determination random number value corresponding to the special symbol B from the random number generator 75 through the sampling circuit 77 (acquisition of the second lottery element, lottery element acquisition means), and proceeds to step S43. The method of obtaining the jackpot determination random number value is the same as that in step S32 (see FIG. 11) described above, and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

Step S43:
Next, the main control CPU72 acquires the big hit symbol random number value corresponding to the special symbol B from the big hit symbol random number counter area of the RAM76, and proceeds to step S44. The method of obtaining the jackpot symbol random number value is the same as step S33 (see FIG. 11) described above, and thus description thereof will be omitted.

Step S44:
Next, the main control CPU72 sequentially obtains the reach mode determination random number and the variation pattern random number regarding the variation condition of the special symbol B from the variation random number counter area of the RAM 76 (variation pattern determination element acquisition means). Acquisition of the random number values of the reach mode determination random number and the variation pattern random number and the saving of the acquired random number to the transfer destination address are also performed in the same manner as in step S34 (FIG. 11) described above, and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

Step S45:
The main control CPU72 transfers the saved big hit determination random number, big hit design random number, reach mode determination random number, and variation pattern random number to the random number storage area corresponding to the special symbol B, and the transferred random number is stored as the random number corresponding to the special symbol B. The empty section in the area is stored as a set (storage means), and the process proceeds to step S46. Since the method of storing the transferred random number in the empty section in the random number storage area corresponding to the special symbol B is the same as step S35 (FIG. 11) described above, the description thereof will be omitted.

Step S46:
Next, the main control CPU72 confirms whether or not the current game management status (game state) is a big hit game. If not during the big hit game (No), the main control CPU72 shifts to the subsequent step S47. On the other hand, if the big hit game is being played (Yes), the main control CPU72 shifts to step S48a without executing steps S47 and S47. In the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not the big hit game is in progress because the pre-reading effect is not performed for the ball entered during the big hit game as in the case of the special symbol A.

Step S47:
When it is not during the big hit game (step S46: No), the main control CPU72 executes the effect production determination process for the special symbol A, the process proceeds to step S48. In the process of step S47, the result of the internal lottery is determined in advance (before the fluctuation starts) based on the jackpot determination random number and the jackpot symbol random number of the special symbol B acquired in the previous step S42 and step S43, respectively, and the internal prior This is a process for determining the effect contents (so-called “prefetching”) based on the result of the lottery. The details of the specific processing will be described later with reference to another flowchart.

Step S48:
After returning from the acquisition effect determination process, the main control CPU72 next sets the upper byte portion (for example, "B9H") of the special symbol destination determination effect command for the special symbol B, and proceeds to step S48a. The upper byte data of the special figure destination determination effect command set in step S48 is data describing that the command type is "for special figure destination determination effect regarding special symbol B". In step S48, as in step S38, the lower byte of the special figure destination determination effect command has been set in the previous acquisition effect determination process (step S47). Therefore, in step S48, the lower byte is combined with the upper byte. As a result, for example, a command having a length of 1 word is generated.

Step S48a:
Next, the main control CPU72 sets the working memory number increase effect command for the special symbol B, and proceeds to step S49. Specifically, the main control CPU72 adds the increased working memory number (for example, "01H" to "04H") to the lower byte for the preceding value (for example, "BCH") of the upper byte that indicates the type of command. The produced command of 1 word length is generated. As for the special symbol B, like the special symbol A, by setting the second digit of the lower byte by default to "0", the value is "result (change information) due to increase in the number of working memories". Can be represented. The preceding value “BCH” of the upper byte is a value indicating that the effect command this time is the operation memory number command for the special symbol B.

Step S49:
Next, the main control CPU72 executes the effect command output setting process for the special symbol B, and returns to the switch input event process (FIG. 10). As a result, with respect to the special symbol B, preparation is made to transmit a special symbol destination determination effect command, an operation memory number increase effect effect command, a starting mouth winning sound control command, etc. to the effect control device 124 (memory number notification means). ).

[Production determination process during acquisition]
FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the acquisition effect determination process. The main control CPU72 executes the acquisition time effect determination process in the special symbol A memory update process and the special symbol B memory update process (step S37 in FIG. 11 and step S47 in FIG. 12) (previous determination execution means). The production effect determination process at the time of acquisition is a special symbol A (when the game ball enters the first start winning port 26 or the variable start winning device 28) and a special symbol B (enters the game ball into the second starting winning port 27). It is executed for each ball. Therefore, the following description may correspond to a process relating to the special symbol A or a process relating to the special symbol B. The contents of the process will be described below according to each procedure.

Step S50:
When starting the acquisition effect determination process, the main control CPU72 first sets the lower byte (for example, "00H") of the special figure destination determination effect command (destination determination information), and proceeds to step S52. The byte data set in step S50 is data that represents the standard value (when the command is out) of the command.

Step S52:
Next, the main control CPU72 loads the jackpot determination random number as the random number value for the determination, and proceeds to step S54. The random number loaded in step S52 is the random number stored in the RAM 76 in step S35 (see FIG. 11) in the special symbol A storage update process, and stored in the RAM 76 in step S45 (see FIG. 12) in the special symbol B storage update process. It is a random number.

Step S54:
Next, the main control CPU72 determines whether or not the loaded random number is outside the range of the hit value (herein below the lower limit value) (lottery result destination determination means). Specifically, the main control CPU72 sets the comparison value (lower limit value) in the A register, and subtracts the loaded random number value from the set comparison value. The comparison value (lower limit value) is defined in advance according to the winning probability of the internal lottery in the pachinko machine 1. Next, the main control CPU72 determines whether or not the operation result is 0 or a positive value, for example, from the value of the flag register. As a result, if the loaded random number is out of the hit value range (Yes), the main control CPU72 shifts the processing to step S80.

Step S80:
Next, the main control CPU72 executes the variation pattern information pre-determination process at the time of deviation (fluctuation pattern destination determination means), the special symbol A storage update process of the calling source (FIG. 11) or the special symbol B storage update process (FIG. 12). Return to. In the process of step S80, the main control CPU72 generates a variation pattern destination determination command for the variation time at the time of deviation. The variation pattern destination determination command generated in step S80 reflects advance determination information regarding the variation time (or variation mode number and variation pattern number) particularly when the "probability variation function" is activated. For example, when the current state is the operation of the “probability change function”, the main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the change time corresponds to the “fixed change time” based on the loaded reach mode determination random number. As a result, when the variation time corresponds to the “fixed variation time”, the main control CPU72 generates a variation pattern destination determination command corresponding to the “fixed variation time”. In the case of reach variation, the “reach group (reach type)” may be further determined from the variation pattern random number, and the variation pattern destination determination command may be generated from the result. On the other hand, when the variation time does not correspond to the “fixed variation time”, the main control CPU 72 generates a variation pattern destination determination command corresponding to the “variable variation time”. Alternatively, when the current state is the non-operating state (low probability state) of the “probability variation function”, the main control CPU 72 responds to the “normally outreach variation” based on the loaded reach mode determination random number. Determine whether or not. As a result, when the variation time corresponds to “normally outreach variation”, the main control CPU 72 generates a variation pattern destination determination command corresponding to “normally outreach variation time”. On the other hand, when the variation time does not correspond to the "normal deviation reach variation", the main control CPU72 generates a fluctuation pattern destination determination command corresponding to the "normal deviation variation time". Further, the fluctuation pattern destination determination command generated in step S80 is set in the transmission buffer in the effect command output setting process in step S39 in the special symbol A memory update process, and the effect command output in step S49 in the special symbol B memory update process. It is set in the send buffer in the setting process. In the process of step S80, the main control CPU72 may generate a variation pattern destination determination command for the variation pattern at the time of a small hit, similar to the process at the time of the above-described deviation.

  On the other hand, in the determination of step S54, if the loaded random number is not outside the hit value range but within the hit value range (step S54: No), the main control CPU72 shifts the processing to step S56.

Step S56:
The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the probability state schedule flag based on the previous determination result is set. The probability state schedule flag based on the previous determination result is set when the fluctuation has not yet started, but there is a winning value among the big hit determination random numbers stored so far. Specifically, if there is a winning value in the big hit determination random number stored at the present time, the big hit design random number that is paired with the big hit determination random number of the winning value is "probable transition pattern (14 round big hit design 1, 8 If it corresponds to the round big hit symbol 2 or the two round big hit symbol 1) ", for example," A0H "is set in the probability state schedule flag. The value of “A0H” in the probability state schedule flag is a flag value for setting the high probability state as a schedule in advance determination (prefetch determination) of the jackpot determination random number acquired after this jackpot determination random number. Represent On the other hand, if there is a winning value in the big hit determination random number stored at the present time, if the big hit design random number paired with the big hit determination random number of the winning value corresponds to the "non-probability variation (normal) design", the probability For example, "01H" is set in the state schedule flag. The value of “01H” in the probability state schedule flag is set to be a normal (low) probability state at the time of pre-determination (look-ahead determination) of the jackpot determination random number acquired after this jackpot determination random number. Represents a flag value. If there is no winning value in the big hit determination random number stored at this time, the flag value is reset (00H). The value of the probability state schedule flag is stored in the flag area of the RAM 76, for example. Note that the pachinko machine 1 is configured to strictly perform the prior hit determination using the “probability state schedule flag”, but if the prior hit determination is simply performed based on the current probability state, step S56. The subsequent steps S58, S60, S62, S76, etc. may not be set.

  If the probability state schedule flag is not set at the present time (step S56: No), the main control CPU72 shifts the processing to step S66.

Step S66:
The main control CPU72 sets the comparison value for low probability (normal time) in the A register, and proceeds to step S68. The low-probability time comparison value is also defined in advance in accordance with the low-probability winning probability of the pachinko machine 1.

Step S68:
Next, the main control CPU72 loads the "current probability state flag", and proceeds to step S70. The probability state flag is a flag indicating whether the current internal state has a high probability (during probability change), and is stored in the flag area of the RAM 76. If the current probability state is high probability (during probability change), the value "01H" is set as the state flag, and if the current probability state is low (normal), the value of the state flag is reset ("00H )).

Step S70:
Next, the main control CPU72 confirms whether or not the loaded current special symbol probability state flag is not a value indicating high probability (≠ 01H), and if it is a value indicating high probability (No), moves to step S64. To do.

Step S64:
The main control CPU72 sets the high-probability time comparison value, and proceeds to step S72. As a result, the low probability comparison value set in step S66 is rewritten. The high-probability time comparison value is defined in advance according to the high-probability winning probability in the pachinko machine 1.

  In this way, when the probability state schedule flag based on the previous determination result is not set yet and the current internal state is high probability, the comparison value is rewritten for high probability time and the next step S72. Will be executed. On the other hand, if it is confirmed in the previous step S70 that the current probability state flag does not indicate a high probability (Yes), the main control CPU72 shifts to step S72 without executing step S64.

Step S72:
The main control CPU72 determines whether the random number loaded in step S52 is out of the range of the winning value (lottery result destination determining means). That is, the main control CPU 72 subtracts the jackpot determination random number value from the comparison value set for each state. Similarly, the main control CPU72 determines from the value of the flag register whether or not the operation result is a negative value (<0), and as a result, if the loaded random number is outside the hit value range (Yes), The main control CPU72 shifts to the variation pattern information preliminary determination process (step S80) at the time of deviation. On the other hand, if the loaded random number is within the range of the hit value but not within the range (No), the main control CPU72 shifts the processing to step S74.

Step S74:
The main control CPU72 executes the big hit symbol type determination process, the process proceeds to step S76. The process of step S74 is a process for determining the big hit type (winning type) based on the big hit symbol random number paired with the big hit determination random number. For example, in the special symbol A storage update process, the main control CPU72 loads the big hit symbol random number for each symbol stored in step S35 (see FIG. 11) and executes the calculation using the comparison value as in step S54. From the result, it is determined which of the "probability variation non-transition symbol" or the "probability variation transition symbol" is applied as the jackpot type. Further, for example, the main control CPU72, in the special symbol B storage update process, loads the big jackpot random number for each symbol stored in step S45 (see FIG. 12), and executes the same process as step S74 in the special symbol A storage update process. To do. The main control CPU72 stores the determination result in step S74 as a special symbol destination determination value, and shifts the processing to step S76.

Step S76:
The main control CPU72 sets the value of the probability state schedule flag based on the previous determination result, and proceeds to step S78. Specifically, when the special symbol destination determination value stored in step S74 represents a "probability variation non-transition symbol", the main control CPU72 sets the probability state schedule flag to the value "01H". On the other hand, when the special symbol destination determination value represents the "probability change transition symbol", the main control CPU72 sets the value "A0H" to the probability state schedule flag. As a result, in the subsequent processing, it is determined that the flag has been set in step S56.

Step S78:
Next, the main control CPU72 sets the special symbol destination determination value stored in step S74 as the lower byte of the special symbol destination determination effect command, and proceeds to step S79. The special symbol destination determination value is set to, for example, "01H" when it corresponds to "probability variation non-transition symbol", and "A0H" when it corresponds to "probability variation transition symbol". In any case, by setting the lower byte data in step S78, the standard lower byte data "00H" set in step S50 is rewritten.

Step S79:
Next, the main control CPU72 executes a big hitting variation pattern information pre-determination process (variation pattern destination determination means), and returns to the special symbol A storage update process in the case of acquisition effect determination process in the special symbol A storage update process. Then, in the case of the production effect determination process in the special symbol B memory update process, the process returns to the special symbol B memory update process. In the process of step S79, the main control CPU72 generates a variation pattern destination determination command for the variation time at the time of a big hit. The variation pattern destination determination command generated in step S79 reflects, for example, advance determination information regarding the reach variation time (or variation mode number and variation pattern number) at the time of a big hit. Further, the variation pattern destination determination command generated in step S79 is set in the transmission buffer in the effect command output setting process in step S39 in the special symbol A memory update process, and the effect command output in step S49 in the special symbol B memory update process. It is set in the send buffer in the setting process.

  The above is the procedure before the probability state schedule flag is set according to the previous determination result (before the internal initial hit). On the other hand, if the probability state schedule flag is set through step S76, the following procedure is executed. However, when performing the prior hit determination only with the current probability state, it is not necessary to execute step S56, step S58, step S60, step S62 and step S76.

Step S56:
When the main control CPU72 confirms that the value is already set in the probability state schedule flag (Yes), the process proceeds to step S58.

Step S58:
The main control CPU72 sets the low probability (normal time) comparison value in the A register, and proceeds to step S60.

Step S60:
Next, the main control CPU72 loads the "probability state schedule flag" and moves to step S62. The probability state schedule flag is a flag for setting a probability state on a scheduled basis in the subsequent prior determination based on the immediately preceding previous determination result, and is stored in the flag area of the RAM 76. If the probability state based on the immediately preceding prior determination result is scheduled to shift to a high probability (probability change), "A0H" is set as the value of the probability state schedule flag, and conversely the probability state based on the immediately preceding prior determination result. Is scheduled to return to a low probability (normal), "01H" is set as the value of the probability state schedule flag.

Step S62:
Next, the main control CPU72 confirms whether or not the loaded probability state schedule flag does not indicate a high probability schedule (≠ 01H), and if it indicates a high probability schedule (No), the process is performed. The process moves to S64.

Step S64:
Next, the main control CPU72 sets the high probability time comparison value, and proceeds to step S72.

  In this way, if the probability state schedule flag based on the previous determination result has already been set and the value of the probability state schedule flag that is set is for high probability, rewrite the comparison value for high probability time. Then, the next step S72 and the subsequent steps are executed. On the other hand, when it is confirmed in step S62 that the value of the probability state schedule flag is not the value indicating the high probability schedule but the value indicating the normal (low) probability schedule (Yes), the main control CPU 72 causes the step to proceed. The process proceeds to step S72 without executing S64. As a result, in the present embodiment, the jackpot determination in advance can be performed in consideration of subsequent changes in the internal state based on the previous determination result (low probability state → high probability state, high probability state → low probability state). .

[Parallel movement of special symbol A and special symbol B]
Next, details of the special symbol A game process and the special symbol B game process executed in the interrupt management process (FIG. 9) will be described. The pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment separately performs the internal lottery corresponding to each of the special symbol A and the special symbol B, so that the special symbol A display device 34 displays the variation of the special symbol A and the special symbol B display. It is possible to perform the variable display of the special symbol B by the device 35 in parallel (symbol parallel variation means). Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment separately performs the special symbol A game process and the special symbol B game process on the control by the main control CPU 72 for each of the special symbol A and the special symbol B (once in one interrupt cycle). Each)).

[Special symbol B game processing]
FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of special symbol B game processing. The special symbol B game process has a procedure (step S1000a) for confirming whether or not the internal state flag of the special symbol A is “starting a big win (during big hit game)”.

Step S1000a:
The main control CPU72 first confirms whether or not the game state (internal state) corresponding to the special symbol A is "large win start (during big hit game)" or "small hit start (during small hit game)". The confirmation of whether or not the "large part start (during big hit game)" or "start of small hit (during small hit game)" is the progress status of the process performed so far with respect to the special symbol A (special symbol A game management). It can be done based on the status value). If the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment is in the big hit game or the small hit with respect to the other special symbol A, in order not to advance the game with respect to the special symbol B, "big win start (big hit game)" or "small hit" It is designed to confirm whether or not it is "start (during small hitting game)".

  At the present time, particularly with respect to the special symbol A, the main control CPU 72 executes the processing of step S1000b and subsequent steps, unless it is during the big hit game (the value of the special symbol A game management status during the big hit game) or the small hit game (No). Steps S1000b to S6000 are program modules that are the basis of the special symbol B game process. The main control CPU72 can concretely control the progress status of the game corresponding to the special symbol B through the processes of these basic steps S1000b to S6000.

  Special symbol B is the core of the game process, execution selection process (step S1000b), special symbol change preprocessing (step S2000), special symbol changing process (step S3000), special symbol stop displaying process (step S4000), It includes a subroutine (program module) group of a big winning variable winning device management process (step S5000) and a small winning variable winning device management process (step S6000). Here, first, a basic flow will be described with respect to the basic part of the special symbol B game process along with each process.

Step S1000b:
In the execution selection process, the main control CPU72 selects the jump destination of the process to be executed next (one of steps S2000 to S6000) from the "jump table". For example, the main control CPU72 sets the program address of the process to be executed next as the jump destination address, and sets the end of the special symbol B game process as the return destination address in the stack pointer.

  Which process is selected as the next jump destination differs depending on the progress status of the process performed so far (special symbol B game management status). For example, if the special symbol B has not started the variable display yet (special symbol B game management status: 00H), the main control CPU72 selects the special symbol variation preprocessing (step S2000) as the next jump destination. . Moreover, if the special symbol variation pre-processing has already been completed (special symbol B game management status: 01H), the main control CPU72 selects the special symbol variation process (step S3000) as the next jump destination, and the special symbol variation. If the middle processing is completed (special symbol B game management status: 02H), the special symbol stop display processing (step S4000) is selected as the next jump destination. In the special symbol B game process and the special symbol A game process to be described later in this embodiment, the process is selected by designating the jump destination address in the "jump table", but separately from such a selection method. There is also a programming example in which the CPU selects a process to be executed next by using a "process flag", a "process selection flag", or the like. In such a programming example, the CPU CALLs all the processes and performs a conditional branch (continuation / return) by referring to the flags one by one in the first step, but in the selection method of this embodiment, the main control is performed. There is no need for the CPU 72 to call each process one by one.

Step S2000:
In the special symbol fluctuation preprocessing, the main control CPU72 performs a work to prepare the conditions for starting the variable display of the special symbol B. Specifically, the big hit determination (internal lottery process execution means) and the variation pattern are determined here, and in the case of a big hit, the winning type is also determined. In addition, the main control CPU72 sets the frequency cut counter for the "high probability state" and the "time saving state" along with the determination of the winning type. Note that the more specific content of the processing will be described later using another flowchart.

Step S3000:
In the special symbol changing process, the main control CPU72 controls the drive of the special symbol B display device 35 while counting the change timer. Specifically, an ON or OFF drive signal (1 byte data) is output to each segment and dot (0th to 7th) of the 7-segment LED. The pattern of the drive signal changes with the passage of time, whereby the variable display of the special symbol B is performed.

  Further, in the special symbol changing process, as described later, the main control CPU72 loads the value of the changing timer from the register into the timer counter, and thereafter, with the passage of time (the count number of the clock pulse or the value of the interrupt counter). The value of the timer counter is decremented accordingly. While referring to the value of the timer counter, the main control CPU72 controls the variable display of the special symbol (special symbol A or special symbol B) to be controlled until the value becomes 0. When the value of the timer counter becomes 0, the main control CPU72 sets the special symbol stop display process (step S4000) to the next jump destination.

  In the special symbol changing process, the process of interrupting the measurement of the change time of the special symbol A is executed based on the end of the variable display of the special symbol to be controlled. The specific content of the process will be described later with reference to another flowchart.

Step S4000:
In the special symbol stop display process, the main control CPU72 controls the drive of the special symbol B display device 35. Similarly, in the special symbol stop display processing, an ON or OFF drive signal is output for each segment and dot of the 7-segment LED, but the drive signal pattern is constant. Thereby, the stop display of the special symbol B is performed.

  Further, in the special symbol stop display process, the main control CPU72 controls the stop display of the special symbol based on the stop symbol determined in the stop symbol determination process (step S2402, step S2405, step S2408 in FIG. 17 described later) . Further, the main control CPU72 generates a symbol stop command to be transmitted to the effect control device 124. The symbol stop command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process described later. When the stop symbol is displayed for a predetermined time in the special symbol stop displaying process, the main control CPU72 erases the symbol changing flag.

  Further, in the special symbol stop display processing, when the big hit is notified by the special symbol B, which is the target of the symbol variation, based on the special stop designation command, the variation of the special symbol A corresponding to the other is displayed. The special symbol A display device 34 that is present is forcibly terminated in a display mode unrelated to the internal lottery result of the special symbol A. The specific content of the process will be described later with reference to another flowchart.

Step S5000:
The jackpot variable winning device management process is selected when the special symbol B is stopped and displayed in the manner of a big hit in the special symbol stop displaying process of step S4000. For example, when the special symbol B is stopped and displayed in a mode of eight rounds of big hits, the opportunity for the gaming state of the pachinko machine 1 to shift from the normal state until then to the big hit gaming state (special gaming state advantageous to the player) occurs. To do. During the big hit game with respect to the special symbol B, the jump destination is set to the big winning time variable winning device management process in the execution selection process (step S1000b), and the variable display of the special symbol B is not performed. In the jackpot variable winning device management process, the first big winning opening solenoid 90 or the second big winning opening solenoid 97 is preset for a certain time (for example, 0.1 seconds or until 9 winnings are counted). It is excited for the number of times of operation (for example, 4 times) and for a certain period of time (for example, for 29 seconds or until 9 prizes are counted) for a preset number of times of continuous operation (for example, 4 times). As a result, the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 opens and closes in a fixed pattern (continuous operation of the special electric auditors' prize). By causing the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 to concentrate on the game balls while the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 is being opened and closed, Are given the opportunity to collect a large number of prize balls (special game execution means). The opening / closing operation of the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 at the time of a big hit is called “round”, and if the number of continuous operations is 8 in total, these are called “8 rounds”. Collectively. In the present embodiment, not only the 8 round jackpot but also the 14 round jackpot and the 2 round jackpot are provided as jackpot types. The 14 round jackpot, the 8 round jackpot and the 2 round jackpot are each provided with a plurality of winning types (winning symbols).

  Further, when the main control CPU 72 sets a special winning opening opening pattern (the number of rounds, the number of opening / closing operations per round, the opening time, etc.) in the jackpot variable winning device management processing, the first variable winning device 30 for one round. Alternatively, each time the opening / closing operation of the second variable winning device 31 is completed, the value of the round number counter is incremented by 1. The value of the round counter is stored in the count area of the RAM 76 with the initial value set to 0, for example. The main control CPU 72 also generates a round number command indicating the value of the round number counter. The round number command is transmitted to the performance control device 124 in the performance control output process (step S212 (see FIG. 9) of the interrupt management process). When the value of the round number counter reaches the set number of continuous operations, the main control CPU 72 ends the big hit game (large role) for the special symbol B only for that round.

When the big hit game is finished with respect to the special symbol B, the main control CPU 72 changes the state after the big hit game is finished based on the game state flag (probability change function operation flag or time saving function operation flag).
When the "low probability state" is changed to the "high probability state", the probability varying function is activated, and the winning probability in the internal lottery becomes about 10 times higher than usual (high probability state transition means). Further, when shifting to the "time saving state", the opening / closing member 28b provided in the variable start winning device 28 is more likely to be in an open state than in the normal state, and a game state in which the game ball is easily inserted into the variable starting winning port 28a. Becomes Regardless of whether the "low probability state" or the "high probability state", the winning probability of the normal symbol is set higher in the "high probability state" than in the "low probability state". The winning probability of the ordinary symbol in the "high probability state" is approximately one-half. The variation time of the normal symbol is about 1 second, and the opening time of the variable start winning device 28 is about 2.5 seconds, so the special symbol A or the special symbol B is changed regardless of the low probability state or the high probability state. Can be made (lottery trigger generation means). However, in the "low probability state", the variation time of the special symbol B is set to be considerably long (for example, a variation time of about 10 minutes) when the second start winning opening 27 is won. Therefore, unless the gaming state of the pachinko machine 1 is shifted to the "high probability state", the special symbol B cannot be changed except for the first change of 1.

Step S6000:
The variable winning a prize device management process at the time of small hit is selected when the special symbol B is stopped and displayed in the mode of small hit in the special symbol stop displaying process of step S3000. For example, when the special symbol B is stopped and displayed in the mode of small hit, the opportunity for the gaming state of the pachinko machine 1 to shift from the normal state until then to the small hit gaming state occurs. During the small hit game, the jump destination is set to the small hitting variable winning device management process in the execution selection process of step S1000b, and the variable display of the special symbol is not performed.

[Special symbol A game processing]
FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of a special symbol A game process. The special symbol A game process also has a procedure (step S1900a) of first confirming whether or not the special symbol B is in the big hit game.

Step S1900a:
Similar to step S1000a of the special symbol B game process in step S1900a, the main control CPU72, the gaming state corresponding to the special symbol B is "big hit game during" or "small hit start (during small hit game)" Check whether or not. The confirmation of the game state corresponding to the special symbol B can also be performed based on the value of the special symbol B game management status.

  At the present time, particularly for the special symbol B, the main control CPU72 executes the process after step S1900b when the big hit game is being performed (the special symbol B game management status is the big hit game value) or the small hit game is not being performed (No). Steps S1900b to S6900 are program modules that are the basis of the special symbol A game processing. The main control CPU72 can concretely control the progress status of the game corresponding to the special symbol A through the processes of these basic steps S1900b to S6900.

  Similar to the special symbol B game process, as for the root of the special symbol A game process, execution selection process (step S1900b), special symbol variation pre-process (step S2900), special symbol variation process (step S3900), special symbol The subroutine (program module) group of the process during stop display (step S4900), the variable winning a prize device management process at the time of big hit (step S5900), the variable winning device management process at the time of small hit (step S6900) is included. The content of each process is the same as that described in the special symbol B game process except that the control target is the special symbol A, but here, in order to ensure the understanding of the control process, along with each process The basic flow of the basic part of the special symbol A game process will be described.

Step S1900b:
In the execution selection process, the main control CPU72 selects the jump destination of the process to be executed next (one of steps S2900 to S6900) from the "jump table". For example, the main control CPU72 sets the program address of the process to be executed next as the jump destination address, and sets the end of the special symbol A game process as the return destination address in the stack pointer.

  Here, similarly, which process is selected as the next jump destination depends on the progress status of the process performed so far (special symbol A game management status). For example, if the special symbol A has not yet started the variable display (special symbol A game management status: 00H), the main control CPU72 selects the special symbol variation preprocessing (step S2900) as the next jump destination. . Further, if the special symbol variation pre-processing has already been completed (special symbol A game management status: 01H), the main control CPU72 selects the special symbol variation process (step S3900) as the next jump destination, and the special symbol variation If the middle processing is completed (special symbol A game management status: 02H), the special symbol stop display during processing (step S4900) is selected as the next jump destination.

Step S2900:
In the special symbol variation pre-processing in the special symbol A game process, the main control CPU72 performs a work to prepare the conditions for starting the variable display of the special symbol A.

Step S3900:
In the special symbol changing process, the main control CPU72 controls the driving of the special figure A display device 34 while counting the change timer. The method of drive control of the special figure A display device 34 is the same as the drive control of the special figure B display device 35, and therefore description thereof is omitted.

Step S4900:
In the special symbol stop display process in the special symbol A game process, the main control CPU72 controls the drive of the special symbol A display device 34. The special figure A display device 34, similarly to the special figure B display device 35, outputs an ON or OFF drive signal to each segment and dot of the 7-segment LED, thereby performing a stop display of the special symbol A. .

  Further, in the special symbol stop display process, when the big hit is notified by the special symbol A, which is the target of the symbol variation, based on the special stop designation command, the variation of the special symbol B corresponding to the other is displayed. The special symbol B display device 35 that is present is forcibly terminated in a display mode unrelated to the internal lottery result of the special symbol B. The specific content of the process will be described later with reference to another flowchart.

Step S5900:
The jackpot variable winning device management process is selected when the special symbol A is stopped and displayed in the manner of a big hit in the special symbol stop displaying process of step S4900. Here, similarly, the stop display mode of the special symbol A is determined in a mode according to the winning type. In addition, when the main control CPU72 sets the special winning opening opening pattern (the number of rounds, the number of opening / closing operations per round, the opening time, etc.) in the jackpot variable winning device management processing, the first variable winning device 30 for one round. Alternatively, each time the opening / closing operation of the second variable winning device 31 is completed, the value of the round number counter is incremented by 1. When the value of the round number counter reaches the set number of continuous operations, the main control CPU 72 ends the big hit game (big win) for the special symbol A only for that round.

  When the big hit game is finished with respect to the special symbol A, the main control CPU 72 changes the state after the big hit game is finished based on the game state flag (probability variation function operation flag or time saving function operation flag).

Step S6900:
The variable winning device management process at the time of small hit is selected when the special symbol A is stopped and displayed in the mode of small hit in the process during the special symbol stop display. For example, when the special symbol A is stopped and displayed in a small hit mode, a trigger for shifting from the normal state until then to the small hit game state occurs. During the small hit game, the jump destination is set to the small hitting variable winning device management process in the execution selection process of step S1900b, and the variable display of the special symbol is not performed.

[Multiple winning types]
In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, “14 round jackpot 1”, “14 round jackpot 2” and “14 round jackpot 3” are provided, for example, as a plurality of winning types for the “14 round jackpot”. In the pachinko machine 1, for example, "8 round jackpot 1", "8 round jackpot 2", "8 round jackpot 3" and "8 round jackpot 4" are provided for "8 round jackpot" as a plurality of winning types. Has been. Further, the pachinko machine 1 is provided with, for example, a plurality of winning types for “2 round jackpot”, “2 round jackpot 1”, “2 round jackpot 2” and “2 round jackpot 3”. However, in this embodiment, a big hit other than 14 rounds, 8 rounds, and 2 rounds may be provided.

  The winning type corresponds to the type of the special symbol A stopped and displayed on the special symbol A display device 34 at the time of winning or the special symbol B stopped and displayed on the special symbol B display device 35 at the time of winning. For example, "14 round jackpot 1" corresponds to the "14 round jackpot pattern 1" jackpot, "14 round jackpot 2" corresponds to the "14 round jackpot pattern 2" jackpot, and "14 round jackpot 3" is " It corresponds to the 14 round jackpot pattern 3 "jackpot. Further, for example, "8 round jackpot 1" corresponds to the jackpot of "8 round jackpot pattern 1", "8 round jackpot 2" corresponds to the jackpot of "8 round jackpot pattern 2", "8 round jackpot 3" "8 round jackpot pattern 3" corresponds to the jackpot, "8 round jackpot pattern 4" corresponds to the "8 round jackpot pattern 4" jackpot. Further, for example, "2 round jackpot 1" corresponds to the jackpot of "2 round jackpot pattern 1", "2 round jackpot 2" corresponds to the jackpot of "2 round jackpot pattern 2", "2 round jackpot 3" It corresponds to the big hit of "2 round big hit pattern 3". Therefore, hereinafter, the “winning type” may be appropriately referred to as the “winning symbol”.

[Opening pattern of variable winning device]
FIG. 16 is a diagram showing an opening operation pattern of the variable winning device. The contents of opening the special winning opening and the probability variation area corresponding to each winning symbol will be described. The "winning symbol" shown in the upper part of FIG. 16 indicates a symbol that is stopped and displayed on the special symbol A display device 34 or the special symbol B display device 35 when a big hit or a small hit is won. "The second big winning a prize opening 0.1 second probability change area opening" shown in the upper part of FIG. It also indicates that the probability variation region 31d is opened. "The second big winning opening opening 0.1 seconds" shown in the upper part of FIG. 16 indicates that the second variable winning device 31 is opened for 0.1 seconds at the maximum, and the probability variation area 31d is not opened. The “first big winning opening opening 29 seconds” shown in the upper part of FIG. 16 indicates that the first variable winning a prize device 30 is opened for a maximum of 29 seconds. "The second big winning opening opening 0.8 seconds" shown in the upper part of FIG. 16 indicates that the second variable winning a prize device 31 is opened for a maximum of 0.8 seconds.

  In the present embodiment, the opening operation pattern of the variable winning a prize device in the 14 round big hit symbol 1 to the 14 round big hit symbol 3 is the same. Further, in the present embodiment, the opening operation pattern of the variable winning device in the 8-round big hit symbol 1 to the 8-round big hit symbol 4 is the same. Further, in the present embodiment, the opening operation pattern of the variable winning device in the two-round big hit symbol 1 to the two-round big hit symbol 3 is the same. Therefore, in FIG. 16, 14 round jackpot symbols 1 to 14 round jackpot symbols 3 are collectively referred to as “14 round jackpot”, 8 round jackpot symbols 1 to 8 round jackpot symbols 4 are collectively referred to as “8 round jackpot”, and 2 Round jackpot design 1 to 2 Round jackpot design 3 is collectively referred to as "2 round jackpot". That is, the "winning symbol" in FIG. 16 is set to "small hit" representing "14 round big hit", "8 round big hit", "2 round big hit" and "small hit jackpot".

  In FIG. 16, the number of times set in each of the fields of “second big winning opening opening 0.1 seconds probability variation area opening”, “second big winning opening opening 0.1 seconds” and first big winning opening opening 29 seconds ” Represents the number of rounds, and "-" represents that the small hit game is not set. This indicates that the number of rounds is not set. In addition, in FIG. 16, the number of times set in the column of "second big winning opening opening 0.8 seconds" represents the number of times the second variable winning device 31 is opened during the small hit game, and "- "Represents that the big hit game is not set.

[14 round jackpot]
In each of the special symbol stop display processing (step S4000 and step S4900) of the special symbol B game process and the special symbol A game process shown in FIGS. 14 and 15, the special symbol is “14 round jackpot symbol 1” or “14 round”. When it is stopped and displayed on the special figure B display device 35 or the special figure A display device 34 in the form of "big hit symbol 2", a trigger occurs to shift the gaming state of the pachinko machine 1 from one state to another state (special Game execution means). In the case of a 14-round big hit, in the first round and the second round, the second special winning opening 31b of the second variable winning device 31 is opened once in a short time (for example, 0.1 seconds). The probability variation area 31d is opened in the first round, but the probability variation area 31d is not opened in the second round. In addition, from the third round to the 14th round, it takes a sufficiently long time (for example, a maximum opening time of 29.0 seconds) to open the first big winning opening 30b of the first variable winning device 30 once. Done. Therefore, in the big hit game of "14 round big hit", a payout (prize ball) for about 12 rounds is given to the player (actually 12R (round)). In addition, the first big winning opening 30b of the first variable winning device 30 is closed without waiting for the elapse of the longest opening time when a predetermined number of winnings (for example, 10 times = 10 game balls) occur in one round. To be done. Similarly, the second big winning opening 31b of the second variable winning device 31 does not wait for the longest opening time when a predetermined number of winnings (for example, 10 times = 10 game balls) occur in one round. To be closed.

[8 round jackpot]
In each of the special symbol stop display processing (step S4000 and step S4900) of the special symbol B game process and the special symbol A game process shown in FIGS. 14 and 15, the special symbol is “8 round jackpot symbol 1” to “8 round”. When it is stopped and displayed on the special figure B display device 35 or the special figure A display device 34 in any mode of the "big hit symbol 4", an opportunity occurs for the gaming state of the pachinko machine 1 to shift from one state to another state. Do (special game execution means). In the case of an eight-round big hit, in the first round to the fourth round, the second big winning opening 31b of the second variable winning device 31 is opened once in a short time (for example, 0.1 seconds). Further, the probability variation area 31d is opened in the first round, but the probability variation area 31d is not opened in the second round to the fourth round. In addition, from the fifth round to the eighth round, it takes a sufficiently long time (for example, a maximum opening time of 29.0 seconds) to open the first big winning opening 30b of the first variable winning device 30 once. Done. Therefore, in the big hit game of "14 round big hit", the payout (prize ball) for about 4 rounds is given to the player (substantially 4R (round)). In addition, the first big winning opening 30b of the first variable winning device 30 is closed without waiting for the elapse of the longest opening time when a predetermined number of winnings (for example, 10 times = 10 game balls) occur in one round. To be done. Similarly, the second big winning opening 31b of the second variable winning device 31 does not wait for the longest opening time when a predetermined number of winnings (for example, 10 times = 10 game balls) occur in one round. To be closed.

[2 round jackpot]
In each of the special symbol stop displaying process (step S4000 and step S4900) of the special symbol B game process and the special symbol A game process shown in FIGS. 14 and 15, the special symbol is “2 round jackpot symbol 1” to “2 round” When it is stopped and displayed in one of the modes of the "big hit symbol 3", the opportunity for the game state of the pachinko machine 1 to shift from one state to another state occurs (special game execution means). In this case, in the first round, the second special winning opening 31b of the second variable winning device 31 is opened once in a short time (for example, 0.1 seconds). In the first round, the probability variation area 31d is opened. In the second round, the first big winning opening 30b of the first variable winning device 30 is opened once for a sufficiently long time (for example, a maximum opening time of 29.0 seconds). For this reason, the big hit game of "two round big hit" is to give a payout (prize ball) for about one round to the player (actually 1R (round)).

  In the case of "14 round jackpot", "8 round jackpot" and "2 round jackpot", the game ball has passed through the probability variation area 31d arranged inside the second variable winning device 31 in the first round. In this case, after the jackpot game is over, the "probability variation function" is activated, and the player is given a privilege of shifting to the "high probability state". The gaming state of the pachinko machine 1 that is transferred after each jackpot game will be described later.

[Small hits]
Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, a small hit is provided as a winning type other than non-winning (missing). When the small hit is won, the small hit game is performed separately from the big hit game, and the second variable winning device 31 is opened / closed (special game executing means). That is, in the special symbol stop displaying process of the special symbol B game process shown in FIG. 14, the special symbol B is stopped and displayed in the form of a small hit, or the special symbol stop displaying process of the special symbol A game process shown in FIG. When the special symbol A is stopped and displayed in the mode of the small hit, the small hit game (the game in which the second variable winning device 31 operates) is executed in the low-probability state or the high-probability state. As shown in FIG. 16, in the small hit game, the second variable winning device 31 opens and closes a predetermined number of times (for example, once) in a predetermined opening time (for example, 0.8 seconds), so the player is in the small hit game. In addition, it is possible to obtain a certain amount of balls. Further, during the small hit game, the probability variation area 31d does not open, so that the "probability variation function" does not operate even when the small hit game ends. Even if the small hit is won in the "high probability state", the "high probability state" does not end after the small hit game is finished (except when the upper limit number of times is reached).

[Special symbol fluctuation pretreatment]
FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the special symbol variation preprocessing of each of the special symbol B game process and the special symbol A game process shown in FIGS. 14 and 15. The contents of the special symbol variation preprocessing listed below can be common to the special symbol B game process (FIG. 14) and the special symbol A game process (FIG. 15). However, when the following procedure is applied to the special symbol B game processing, the control target is the special symbol B, and the other is the special symbol A. In addition, when the following procedure is applied to the special symbol A game process, the control target is the special symbol A, and the other is the special symbol B. Hereinafter, each procedure will be described.

Step S2100:
The main control CPU72, when starting the special symbol fluctuation preprocessing, first, the special symbol working memory number of the control target (special symbol A working memory number or special symbol B working memory number) is remaining (is it greater than 0? ) Confirm whether or not. The special symbol working memory number of the controlled object can be confirmed by referring to the value of the working memory number counter of the controlled object stored in the RAM 76. When the special symbol working memory number of the control target is 0 (No), the main control CPU72 shifts the processing to step S2110. On the other hand, if the special symbol working memory number to be controlled is not 0 (Yes), the main control CPU72 shifts the processing to step S2120.

Step S2110:
The main control CPU72 confirms whether the other special symbol working memory number is 0 or not. That is, if the control target is the special symbol A, it is checked whether the special symbol B working memory number is 0, and if the control target is the special symbol B, the special symbol A working memory number is 0. Check if there is. The confirmation of the other special symbol working memory number can also be performed by referring to the value of the special symbol working memory number counter. If the other special symbol working memory number is 0 (Yes), the main control CPU72 shifts to the demo setting process of step S2500. On the other hand, if the other special symbol working memory number is not 0 (No), the main control CPU72, this process is a special symbol variation pre-processing in the special symbol B game process special symbol B game process (see FIG. 14) ), And the process returns to the special symbol A game process (see FIG. 15) as a special symbol variation pre-process in the special symbol A game process. In addition, at the time of return, it returns to the end address of each special symbol game process (the same applies hereafter).

Step S2500:
In the process of step S2500, the main control CPU72 confirms whether or not any of the starting winning openings has won a prize for a predetermined time, and if there is no result of the confirmation, generates a demonstration effect command. The demonstration effect command is output to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process (step S212) of the interrupt management process shown in FIG. When the main control CPU72 executes the demo setting process, this process returns to the special symbol B game process (FIG. 14) as the special symbol variation pre-process in the special symbol B game process, and this process is the special symbol A game process. If it is the special symbol change pre-processing in, it returns to the special symbol A game process (FIG. 15). On the other hand, if the other special symbol working memory number is not 0 (step S2150: No), the main control CPU72 does not execute the demo setting process, this process is a special symbol variation pre-process in the special symbol B game process That is, the special symbol B game process (see FIG. 14) is returned, and the special symbol A game process (see FIG. 15) is returned if this process is a special symbol variation pre-process in the special symbol A game process.

Step S2120:
The main control CPU72 confirms whether or not the value (01H) is set in the symbol stop display flag for the other special symbol. The symbol stop display flag will be specifically described in a later special symbol variation end process, but it is a flag that is set while the special symbol stop display is being executed, and when the stop display is finished. Will be reset. Therefore, the confirmation in the process of step S2120 is a confirmation as to whether the other special symbol is stopped and displayed in a mode representing a big hit or a small hit.

  In the process of step S2120, if the value (01H) is set in the symbol stop display flag for the other special symbol (Yes), the main control CPU72, this process is a special symbol variation pre-process in the special symbol B game process Then, the special symbol B game process (see FIG. 14) is returned to, and the special symbol A game process (see FIG. 15) is returned if this process is a special symbol variation pre-process in the special symbol A game process. Thus returning to the special symbol game process without executing the subsequent process, the other special symbol is currently being stopped and displayed in a mode showing a big hit or a small hit as a result of the internal lottery. The big hit game or the small hit game is scheduled to start immediately. That is, with respect to the special symbol to be controlled, after the big hit game or the small hit game scheduled to start, the subsequent processing (processing for starting variable display) is executed. Therefore, the internal lottery related to the special symbol to be controlled is not executed until the big hit game or the small hit game relating to the other special symbol is completed.

  Regarding the other special symbol, if the value (01H) is not set in the symbol stop displaying flag, and the value is 00H (step S2170: No), the main control CPU72 shifts the processing to step S2200.

Step S2200:
Next, the main control CPU72 executes a special symbol storage area shift process. In the process of step S2200, the main control CPU72 reads the random number for lottery stored in the random number storage area of the RAM76 (big hit determination random number, big hit symbol random number), which corresponds to the special symbol to be controlled. At this time, if the random numbers are stored in two or more sections, the main control CPU 72 reads the random numbers from the first section and erases (consumes) them, and then moves (shifts) the remaining random numbers one by one to the previous section. Let The read random number is stored in another temporary storage area, for example. Each random number stored in the temporary storage area is used for internal lottery in the next big hit determination process. In the process of step S2200, the main control CPU72 subtracts one from the value of the working memory number counter (the special symbol A and the special symbol B to be controlled) stored in the RAM76, and the value after the subtraction is performed. Set to "Number of working memory at start of fluctuation". Thereby, in the display output management process (step S210) of the interrupt management process shown in FIG. 9, of the special symbol A working memory lamp 34a or the special symbol B working memory lamp 35a, the number of memories is stored for the one to be controlled. The display mode changes (decrease by 1). When the procedure up to this point is completed, the main control CPU72 shifts the processing to step S2300.

Step S2300:
The main control CPU72 executes a big hit determination process (internal lottery), and proceeds to step S2400. In the process of step S2300, the main control CPU72 first sets a range of the big hit value, and determines whether or not the read random number value (the big hit determination random number value) is included in this range. If this process is a special symbol variation pre-process in the special symbol B game process, the big hit determination process corresponds to an example of the second lottery means. If this process is a special symbol variation pre-process in the special symbol A game process, the big hit determination process corresponds to an example of the first lottery means. The range of the big hit value set at the time of big hit determination processing differs between the low probability state and the high probability state (when the probability variation function is activated) of the gaming state of the pachinko machine 1, and in the high probability state the big hit value is higher than in the low probability state. The range is expanded about 10 times. If the jackpot determination random number value read in step S2300 is included in the jackpot value range, the main control CPU72 sets the jackpot flag (01H).

  When the big hit flag is not set, the main control CPU 72 sets the range of the small hit value next in the same big hit determination process, and determines whether or not the read big hit determination random number value is included in the set range (internal. Lottery process execution means). The "small hit" here is a win other than the non-win (miss), but has a different nature from the "big hit". That is, the "big hit" causes an opportunity to shift the game state to a "high probability state", a "time saving state" or the like (a turning point of the game), but the "small hit" does not cause an opportunity to shift the game state. However, the “small hit” is positioned as a condition that satisfies the condition for operating the second variable winning device 31, like the “big hit”.

  If the big hit determination random number value read in step S2300 is included in the range of the small hit value, the main control CPU72 sets the small hit flag (01H).

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the range of the big hit value and the small hit value is preliminarily defined on the program as the hit range corresponding to the case other than the non-winning (prescription means other than the non-winning). The big hit determination table and the small hit determination table for each state may be written in the ROM 74, and these tables may be read to perform the big hit determination while comparing with the big hit determination random number value.

Step S2400:
Next, the main control CPU72 determines whether or not the value (01H) is set to the big hit flag in the big hit determination process of step S2300. If the value (01H) is not set in the big hit flag (No), the main control CPU72 shifts the processing to step S2401, and if the value (01H) is set in the big hit flag (Yes), the main control CPU72 determines The process moves to step S2402.

Step S2401:
The main control CPU72 determines whether or not the value (01H) is set to the small hit flag in the large hit determination process of step S2400. If the value (01H) is not set in the small hit flag (No), the main control CPU72 shifts the processing to step S2408. On the other hand, if the value (01H) is set in the small hit flag (Yes), the main control CPU72 shifts the processing to step S2405. It should be noted that the main control CPU 72 may determine a big hit (for example, 01H is set) or a small hit (for example, 0AH is set) based on the value of the common hit flag, without separately preparing the big hit flag and the small hit flag. .

Step S2402:
When the main control CPU72 determines that the value (01H) is set in the target big hit flag in step S2400, in step S2402, the big hit stop symbol determination process is executed (winning type determination means), and the process proceeds to step S2403. To do. In the process of step S2402, the main control CPU72 determines the type of the winning symbol of this time (special symbol stop symbol number) for each special symbol (special symbol A or special symbol B) based on the jackpot symbol random number. The relation between the jackpot random number value and the type of winning symbol is defined in advance in the special symbol determination data table (winning type defining means). Therefore, the main control CPU72 can refer to the special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table in the big hit stop symbol determination process, and determine the type of winning symbol based on the big hit symbol random number from the stored content. The special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table will be described later.

  The main control CPU72, when selecting the winning symbol from the special symbol big hit stop symbol selecting table, generates a stopping symbol command including information of the selected winning symbol. The generated stop symbol command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process (step S212) of the interrupt management process shown in FIG. 9, for example. Further, the main control CPU72 determines the big hit stop symbol number for the special symbol A or the special symbol B based on the selected winning symbol.

Step S2403:
Next, the main control CPU72 executes the big hitting time variation pattern determination processing, and proceeds to step S2404. If this process is a special symbol variation pre-process in the special symbol B game process, in the process of step S2403, the variation mode number of the special symbol B is determined based on the reach mode determination random number, and based on the variation pattern random number. The variation pattern number of the special symbol B is determined. If this process is a special symbol variation pre-process in the special symbol A game process, in the process of step S2403, the variation mode number of the special symbol A is determined based on the reach mode determination random number, and based on the variation pattern random number. The variation pattern number of the special symbol A is determined. As will be described later in detail, in the pachinko machine 1, the variation time of the special symbol is divided into the first half and the second half, the variation time of the first half is determined by the variation mode number, and the variation time of the second half is determined by the variation pattern number. The fluctuation time and the stop display time are associated with the fluctuation pattern numbers. Further, the main control CPU72 sets the value of the determined fluctuation time in the fluctuation timer and also sets the value of the stop display time in the stop symbol display timer. In general, in the case of a big hit reach fluctuation, a fluctuation time longer than that at the time of the outfall is determined.

  In the present embodiment, when the internal lottery results in a 14-round big hit, an 8-round big hit, or a 2-round big hit, for example, a "reach effect" is generated in the effect to perform a big hit control. In the “big hit variation pattern selection table”, variation patterns corresponding to a plurality of types of “reach effects” are defined. When the 14 round big hit or the 8 round big hit is hit, one of the variation patterns is selected. Will be selected. The reach effect includes various reach effects such as a normal reach effect, a long reach effect, a super reach effect, and the like. Further, in the case of the high probability state, a fluctuation pattern having a short fluctuation time (a fluctuation pattern in which reach production is not performed) may be selected without selecting a fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time.

Step S2404:
Next, the main control CPU72 executes other setting processing at the time of big hit, and moves to step S2411. In the process of step S2404, the main control CPU72 determines the display mode of the stop symbol (big hit symbol) by the special symbol A display device 34 or the special symbol B display device 35 based on the big hit stop symbol number. More specifically, if this process is a special symbol variation pre-process in the special symbol B game process, the main control CPU72, the stop symbol by the special symbol B display device 35 based on the big hit stop symbol number (big hit symbol) ) Display mode is determined. On the other hand, if this process is a special symbol variation pre-process in the special symbol A game process, the main control CPU72, the stop symbol (big hit symbol) is displayed by the special symbol A display device 34 based on the big hit stop symbol number. Determine the mode. In addition, the main control CPU72 generates a lottery result command (at the time of big hit) together with a stop symbol command (at the time of big hit). These stop symbol commands and lottery result commands are also transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output processing.

Step S2405:
When the main control CPU72 determines in step S2401 that the value (01H) is set in the target small hit flag, in step S2405, it executes a small hit stop symbol determination process. In the process of step S2405, the main control CPU72 determines the type of the winning symbol at the time of small hit (small hitting stop symbol number) based on the big hit symbol random number. Just as the relation between the big hit symbol random number value and the type of winning symbol at the time of big hit is prescribed by the table in advance, the relation between the big hit symbol random number value and the type of winning symbol at the time of small hit is special in advance at the time of small hit. It is defined in the symbol selection table (winning type defining means). In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the winning symbol at the time of the small hit is determined by using the big hit symbol random number in order to reduce the load on the main control CPU 72, but a dedicated random number may be separately used.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the winning symbol at the time of a small hit is only one type of "one-time open small hit symbol". However, other than this, for example, another type such as a "twice open small hit pattern" or a "three open small hit pattern" may be prepared. The "small hit" as a result of the internal lottery does not trigger the change of the state after the small hit game to the "high probability state", so "2 rounds (2 times)" used in the same kind of pachinko machine as the pachinko machine 1 It is possible to provide a "single opening small hit pattern" without being bound by the regulations of "opening or above".

Step S2406:
Next, the main control CPU72 executes small hitting variation pattern determination processing, and proceeds to step S2407. If this process is a special symbol variation pre-process in the special symbol B game process, in the process of step S2406, the variation mode number of the special symbol B is determined based on the reach mode determination random number, and based on the variation pattern random number. The variation pattern number of the special symbol B is determined (variation pattern determining means). If this process is a special symbol variation pre-process in the special symbol A game process, in the process of step S2406, the variation mode number of the special symbol A is determined based on the reach mode determination random number, and based on the variation pattern random number. The variation pattern number of the special symbol A is determined (variation pattern determining means). As will be described later in detail, in the pachinko machine 1, the variation time of the special symbol is divided into the first half and the second half, the variation time of the first half is determined by the variation mode number, and the variation time of the second half is determined by the variation pattern number. The fluctuation time and the stop display time are associated with the fluctuation pattern numbers. The main control CPU72 sets the value of the determined fluctuation time in the fluctuation timer and also sets the value of the stop display time in the stop symbol display timer.

Step S2407:
Next, the main control CPU72 executes a small hit other setting process, and shifts to step S2411. In the process of step S2407, the main control CPU72 determines the display mode of the stop symbol (small hit symbol) by the special symbol A display device 34 or the special symbol B display device 35 based on the small hit stop symbol number. More specifically, if this process is a special symbol variation pre-process in the special symbol B game process, the main control CPU72, the stop symbol by the special symbol B display device 35 based on the small hit stop symbol number (small The display mode of the winning pattern) is determined. On the other hand, if this process is a special symbol change pre-process in the special symbol A game process, the main control CPU72, the stop symbol by the special symbol A display device 34 (small hit symbol) based on the small hit stop symbol number The display mode of is determined. In addition, the main control CPU72 generates a stop symbol command and a lottery result command (during small hit) to be transmitted to the effect control device 124. These stop symbol command and lottery result command are also transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process (step S212) of the interrupt management process shown in FIG.

Step S2408:
When the main control CPU72 determines in step S2401 that the value (01H) is not set in the target small hit flag, in step S2408, it executes a stop symbol determination process during disconnection, and proceeds to step S2409. In the process of step S2408, the main control CPU72 sets the stop symbol number data when the special figure A display device 34 or the special figure B display device 35 comes off. More specifically, if this process is a special symbol change pre-process in the special symbol B game process, the main control CPU72, the stop symbol number data of the stop symbol (deleting symbol) displayed on the special symbol B display device 35 Set. On the other hand, if this process is a special symbol change pre-process in the special symbol A game process, the main control CPU72 sets the stop symbol number data of the stop symbol (small hit symbol) to be displayed on the special symbol A display device 34. To do. Further, the main control CPU72 generates a stop symbol command and a lottery result command (at the time of losing) to be transmitted to the effect control device 124. These commands are transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process (step S212) of the interrupt management process shown in FIG.

  In this embodiment, since the 7-segment LED is used for the special figure A display device 34 and the special figure B display device 35, for example, the display mode of the stop symbol at the time of detachment is always one segment (the central bar "- It is possible to fix the stop symbol number data to one value (for example, 64H) by keeping only the lit display of “”). In this case, the storage capacity used on the program can be reduced, the processing load on the main control CPU 72 can be reduced, and the processing speed can be improved.

Step S2409:
Next, the main control CPU72 executes the off-time variation pattern determination processing, and proceeds to step S2410. If this process is a special symbol variation pre-process in the special symbol B game process, in the process of step S2409, the variation mode number of the special symbol B is determined based on the reach mode determination random number, and based on the variation pattern random number. The variation pattern number of the special symbol B is determined (variation pattern determining means). If this process is a special symbol variation pre-process in the special symbol A game process, in the process of step S2409, the variation mode number of the special symbol A is determined based on the reach mode determination random number, and based on the variation pattern random number. The variation pattern number of the special symbol A is determined (variation pattern determining means). As will be described later in detail, in the pachinko machine 1, the variation time of the special symbol is divided into the first half and the second half, the variation time of the first half is determined by the variation mode number, and the variation time of the second half is determined by the variation pattern number. The fluctuation time and the stop display time are associated with the fluctuation pattern numbers. The variation mode number and the variation pattern number distinguish the type (pattern) of the variation display of the special symbol to be controlled or correspond to the variation time required for the variation display. Since the variation time at the time of departure differs depending on whether or not the gaming state of the pachinko machine 1 is the "high probability state", the main control CPU72 loads the gaming state flag in the processing of step S2409, and the current gaming state. Check if the state is a "high probability state". In the “high probability state”, the fluctuation time at the time of deviation is set to a shortened time (for example, about 0.3 to 1.5 seconds). In this case, the fluctuation mode number corresponding to the fluctuation time of 0 seconds is set, and the fluctuation pattern number corresponding to the shortened time (for example, about 0.3 to 1.5 seconds) is set.

  In addition, even if it is not the “high probability state”, the variation time at the time of deviation is shortened based on, for example, the “variation display start operation memory number (0 to 3)” set in step S2200, except when the reach variation is performed. May be done. The stop display time of the symbol at the time of deviation is constant (for example, about 0.5 seconds) regardless of the variation pattern. The main control CPU72 sets the value of the determined fluctuation time (at the time of deviation) to the fluctuation timer, and sets the value of the stop display time at the time of deviation to the stop symbol display timer.

  In the present embodiment, when the result of the internal lottery based on the special symbol A corresponds to non-winning, for example, "reach effect" is generated on the performance and is lost, or "reach effect" is not generated and is off. It is supposed to control. And, in the "out-of-shift variation pattern selection table", variation patterns corresponding to a plurality of types of effects, for example, "non-reach effect" and "reach effect" are defined in advance. One of the fluctuation patterns will be selected. The reach effect includes various reach effects such as a normal reach effect, a long reach effect, a super reach effect, and the like.

Step S2410:
The main control CPU72 executes the stop timing determination process of the symbol variation at the time of deviation, and proceeds to step S2411. In the process of step S2410, the main control CPU72 compares the stop timing of the variation of the target special symbol with the stop timing of the variation of the other special symbol, and executes a predetermined process based on the comparison result. Detailed processing of step S2410 will be described later using another flowchart.

Step S2411:
Next, the main control CPU72 executes a special symbol variation start process. In the process of step S2411, the main control CPU72 sets the variation start flag of the special symbol, the symbol variation flag in the flag area of the RAM76. Further, the main control CPU72 generates a fluctuation start command to be transmitted to the effect control device 124. This variation start command is also transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process (step S212) of the interrupt management process shown in FIG. After finishing the above procedure, the main control CPU72 sets the special symbol changing process (step S3000) to the next jump destination, and returns to the special symbol game process.

[Special symbol storage area shift processing]
FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the special symbol storage area shift process (step S2200) in the special symbol variation effect. The content of the special symbol storage area shift process can be common to the process of the special symbol A and the process of the special symbol B. However, when the following procedure is applied to the special symbol A, the control target is the special symbol A, and the other is the special symbol B. When the following procedure is applied to the special symbol B, the control target is the special symbol B, and the other is the special symbol A. Hereinafter, each procedure will be described.

Step S2210:
First, the main control CPU72 shifts the random number storage area of the RAM76 corresponding to the special symbol to be controlled, and proceeds to step S2212. The specific contents of the processing are as already described in the special symbol variation preprocessing shown in FIG.

Step S2212:
Further, the main control CPU72 subtracts the value of the working memory counter for the special symbol to be controlled, and proceeds to step S2214. For example, if the special symbol to be controlled is the special symbol A, the main control CPU 72 subtracts the value of the working memory counter corresponding to the special symbol A (-1), and if the special symbol to be controlled is the special symbol B. , The main control CPU72 subtracts the value of the working memory counter corresponding to the special symbol B (-1).

Step S2214:
Next, the main control CPU72 sets the "variation start time operation memory number" for the special symbol to be controlled from the value of the operation memory counter after subtraction, and proceeds to step S2216.

Step S2216:
Further, the main control CPU72 sets a working memory number reduction effect command for the special symbol to be controlled, and proceeds to step S2218. The effect command set in step S2216 is also generated as a command having a length of one word, but the configuration of the effect command when the number of operating memories decreases is in contrast to the above-mentioned "effect command when the number of operating memories increases". That is, the effect command when the number of operating memories decreases is the value of the lower byte (for example, "00H" to "03H") that indicates the number of operating memories after the decrease, with respect to the preceding value of the upper byte that indicates the command type (for example, "BBH"). )) Is added, and the value of the lower byte is further added (logical sum) with an added value (for example, “10H”) meaning “reduction in the number of working memory due to consumption”. Therefore, as for the lower byte, the second place of the addition value "10H" is logically ORed to become "1", and this value represents "the result (change information) due to the decrease in the number of working memories". become. That is, if the lower byte of the command is “13H”, the number of working memories up to the previous time “4” (command notation is “14H”) is decreased by 1, so that the number of working memories this time is “3” (command notation). Indicates "13H"). Similarly, if the lower byte is “12H” to “10H”, the number of working memories “3” to “1” (command notation “13H” to “11H”) up to the previous time is decreased by 1, respectively, This indicates that the number of working memories this time is "2" to "0" (command notation is "12H" to "10H"). The preceding value "BBH" is a value indicating that the effect command this time is the working memory number command for the special symbol A. If the control target is the special symbol B, the preceding value is a value (for example, "BCH") indicating that it is a working memory number command for the special symbol B.

Step S2218:
Next, the main control CPU72 executes the effect command output setting processing, and returns to the special symbol variation preprocessing (FIG. 17). The process of step S2218 is a process for transmitting to the effect control device 124 the operation memory number reduction effect command for the special symbol to be controlled set in step S2216 (memory number notification means).

  FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the stop timing process (step S2406) of the symbol variation at the time of deviation in the special symbol variation preprocessing. In the stop timing process of the symbol variation at the time of deviation, the target special symbol is the special symbol A, and the liquid crystal display 42 and the movable liquid crystal display 43 when the other symbol variation stops before the target symbol variation, This is processing relating to control of 44.

Step S2406a:
When the main control CPU72 starts the stop timing process of the symbol variation at the time of departure, first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol to be controlled is the special symbol A. If the current process is the special symbol variation preprocess (step S2000) in the special symbol B game process shown in FIG. 14, the main control CPU72 determines that the target special symbol is not the special symbol A (No), Without executing the processing from step S2406b to step S2406f described later, the process returns to the special symbol variation preprocessing shown in FIG. On the other hand, if the current process is the special symbol variation preprocessing (step S2900) in the special symbol A game process shown in FIG. 15, the main control CPU72 determines that the target special symbol is the special symbol A ( Yes), and proceeds to step S2406b.

Step S2406b:
Next, the main control CPU72 determines whether the symbol variation of the special symbol B stops before the symbol variation of the special symbol A. That is, the main control PU72 determines whether or not the symbol variation of the other special symbol stops before the symbol variation of the target special symbol. In step S2406b, the main control CPU72 sets the variation time of the symbol variation of the special symbol A determined in the out-of-shift variation pattern determination process (step S2409) shown in FIG. 17 and set in the variation timer, and the variation timer of the special symbol B. Compared with the fluctuation time that has been. When the main control CPU72 determines that the variation time of the special symbol B is shorter than the variation time of the special symbol A, it determines that the special symbol B stops before the special symbol A (Yes), and the process. The process moves to step S2406c. On the other hand, when the main control CPU72 determines that the variation time of the special symbol B is longer than the variation time of the special symbol A, it determines that the special symbol B stops after the special symbol A (No), It returns to the special symbol variation preprocessing shown in FIG. 17 without executing the processing from step S2406c to step S2406f described later.

Step S2406c:
Next, the main control CPU72 sets an initial position standby command for the movable liquid crystal display (hereinafter sometimes abbreviated as "initial position standby command"), and proceeds to step S2406d. The initial position standby command for the movable liquid crystal display set in step S2406c is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process (step S212) of the interrupt management process shown in FIG. Although details will be described later, the effect control device 124 drives the movable body solenoids 58 and 59 to move the movable liquid crystal displays 43 and 44 to the initial positions. As a result, the movable liquid crystal displays 43 and 44 are retracted to the left and right sides of the liquid crystal display 42 and temporarily stopped. Therefore, the visibility of the liquid crystal display 42 and the movable liquid crystal displays 43 and 44 is secured. Further, the movable liquid crystal displays 43 and 44 can display predetermined images and moving images in a stopped state.

Step S2406d:
Next, the main control CPU72 confirms whether or not the value (01H) of the big hit flag of the special symbol B is set. That is, when the main control CPU72 confirms that the value of the big hit flag of the special symbol B set in the RAM 76 is "01H" (Yes), the process proceeds to step S2406e. On the other hand, when the main control CPU 72 confirms that the value of the big hit flag of the special symbol B set in the RAM 76 is not "01H" (No), the process proceeds to step S2406f.

Step S2406e:
The main control CPU72 sets the special effect variation pattern command in step S2406e, and returns to the special symbol variation preprocessing (FIG. 17). The special effect variation pattern command set in step S2406e is transmitted to the effect display control device 144 in the effect control output process (step S212) of the interrupt management process shown in FIG. As will be described in detail later, the effect display control device 144 that has received the special effect variation pattern command notifies the movable liquid crystal displays 43 and 44 (in the example of this embodiment, the movable liquid crystal display 43) that the variation effect being executed is a big hit. The liquid crystal display 42 is controlled so as to execute the big hit suggesting effect (an example of the special effect related to the result of the second lottery) that suggests to do. Thereby, the liquid crystal display 42, in addition to the change effect of the special symbol A (an example of the first change effect), the lottery result (the result of the second lottery result) relating to the special symbol B notified by the movable liquid crystal displays 43 and 44. The example of executing a jackpot suggestion effect.

Step S2406f:
In step S2406f, the main control CPU72 sets the value of the symbol fluctuation measurement suspension schedule flag of the special symbol to be controlled to "01H", and returns to the special symbol fluctuation preprocessing (FIG. 17). The symbol variation measurement suspension schedule flag is a flag indicating whether or not the suspension of the measurement of the variation time of the special symbol is scheduled. If "01H" is set in the RAM 76 as the value of the symbol variation measurement suspension schedule flag, it indicates that the measurement of the variation time of the special symbol is scheduled to be suspended. On the other hand, if "01H" is not set in the RAM 76 as the value of the symbol variation measurement interruption flag (for example, "00H" is set), it indicates that the interruption of measurement of the variation time of the special symbol is not scheduled. . More specifically, in step S2406f, the main control CPU72 sets the value of the symbol fluctuation measurement suspension schedule flag of the special symbol A which is the special symbol to be controlled to "01H". The value "01H" is continuously set in the symbol variation measurement interruption schedule flag until the symbol variation measurement interruption flag (details described later) is set.

[Special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table]
Here, the special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table referred to in the big hit stop symbol determination process (step S2402) in the special symbol variation preproduction shown in FIG. 17 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 20 (a) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table for special symbol A for selecting a big hit symbol stopped and displayed on the special symbol A display device 34. 20 (b) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table for special symbols B for selecting a big hit symbol stopped and displayed on the special symbol B display device 35. When the result of the big hit this time corresponds to the special symbol A, the main control CPU 72 determines the kind of the winning symbol by referring to the special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table for special symbol A. Further, when the result of the big hit this time corresponds to the special symbol B, the main control CPU 72 refers to the special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table for special symbol B to determine the type of the winning symbol.

  As shown in FIG. 20 (a), the special symbol for special symbol A big hit stop symbol selection table, "game state at the time of lottery", "comparison value", "winning symbol" and "game state after big hit game" It consists of four items. "Game state at the time of lottery" indicates the game state of the pachinko machine 1 when determining the stop symbol of the special symbol A. The “comparison value” is a numerical value to be compared with the jackpot symbol random number when determining the stop symbol of the special symbol A. The “winning symbol” indicates a big hit symbol that is stopped and displayed on the special symbol A display device 34 after the variation of the special symbol related to the big hit is completed. "Game state after the big hit game" indicates the internal state (game state) of the pachinko machine 1 after the big hit game is finished.

  In the "game state at the time of lottery", six game states, "normal state", "time saving state", "rush state", "special high probability state", "penalty 1 state" and "penalty 2 state" are set. Has been done. The "normal state" indicates that the winning probability of the special symbol is low and the winning probability of the ordinary symbol is also low. The pachinko machine 1 is in the "normal state" in the initial game state when the power is turned on.

  The "time saving state" indicates a state in which the winning probability of the special symbol is low and the winning probability of the ordinary symbol is high. When the gaming state of the pachinko machine 1 is in a time shortening state, the pair of opening / closing members 28b provided in the variable start winning device 28 are frequently opened, and the opening time of the pair of opening / closing members 28b becomes long. However, even if the game ball enters the second starting winning opening 27, the variation time of the special symbol B is not shortened and becomes 10 minutes. Therefore, when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 1 is in a time saving state, the special symbol A easily changes, so that the number of times the special symbol A changes increases. On the other hand, the variation of the special symbol B which is started upon the entry of the game ball into the second starting winning opening 27 continues for 10 minutes, during which the variation of the special symbol B does not occur again. Therefore, in the time-saving state, the frequency at which the variation of the special symbol B is started becomes low, and the number of times the special symbol B varies is reduced. As a result, when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 1 is in the time saving state, the number of coins paid out does not increase even if the player strikes to the right.

  The "rush state" indicates that the winning probability of the special symbol has a high probability, and the winning probability of the ordinary symbol has a low probability. When the gaming state of the pachinko machine 1 is in the rush state, the special symbol B becomes a high-probability state and the variation time of the special symbol B is shortened. The “rush state” is a state in which the number of coins in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment is most likely to be increased.

  The "special high probability state" indicates that the winning probability of the special symbol has a high probability, and the winning probability of the ordinary symbol also has a high probability. When the game state of the pachinko machine 1 is in the special high probability state, the pair of opening / closing members 28b provided in the variable start winning device 28 are frequently opened, and the opening time of the pair of opening / closing members 28b becomes long. . However, even if the game ball enters the second starting winning opening 27, the variation time of the special symbol B is not shortened and becomes 10 minutes. Therefore, when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 1 is in the special high probability state, similarly to the time saving state, the special symbol A is likely to change, and the special symbol B is unlikely to change. In this way, when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 1 is in the special high probability state, it is similar to the time saving state in terms of the ease of changing the special symbol, but the lottery related to the special symbol is won compared to the time saving state. Easier to do.

  "Penalty 1 state" indicates that the winning probability of the special symbol is high and the winning probability of the ordinary symbol is medium probability. The state of "medium probability" is a state in which the winning probability of a normal symbol is lower than the high probability and higher than the low probability. “Penalty 2 state” indicates that the winning probability of the special symbol is low and the winning probability of the ordinary symbol is medium probability. Also, in the "penalty 1 state" and the "penalty 2 state", the variation time of the special symbol B after entering the second starting winning opening 27 is not only shortened but also 10 minutes.

  For the “comparison value”, for example, the values “0”, “49”, “50” and “99” which are different stepwise are set. In the “winning symbol”, a jackpot symbol is set in association with the numerical value set in the “comparison value”. In the "winning symbol", "8 round jackpot symbol 1" is set in association with the comparison value "0", "8 round jackpot symbol 2" is set in association with the comparison value "49", and the comparison value " "8 round jackpot symbol 3" is set in association with "50", and "8 round jackpot symbol 4" is set in association with comparison value "99".

  In the "game state after the big hit game", the game state is set in association with the big hit symbol set in the "winning symbol". In the "game state after the jackpot game", the "normal state" is set in association with the winning symbol "8 round jackpot symbol 1", and the "rush state (ST" in association with the winning symbol "8 round jackpot symbol 2" : 80 times) "is set, and the" special high probability state (ST: 80 times) "is set in association with the winning symbol" 8 round jackpot symbol 3 ", and is associated with the winning symbol" 8 round jackpot symbol 4 " “Time saving state (ST: 80 times)” is set. Here, "ST: 80 times" means that the special time (ST) continues until the variable game of the special symbol is executed up to 80 times. In other words, in the "rush state (ST: 80 times)", the gaming state of the pachinko machine 1 becomes the rush state until the variation game of the special symbol is executed up to 80 times, and the "special high probability state (ST: 80 times) ) ”, The gaming state of the pachinko machine 1 becomes a special high probability state until the variation game of the special symbol is executed up to 80 times, and in the“ time saving state (ST: 80 times) ”, the maximum of 80 times is special. It shows that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 1 becomes a time saving state until the variable game of the symbol is executed. However, if the jackpot is won before the variable game of 80 special symbols is executed in the rush state, the special high probability state or the time saving state, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 1 after the jackpot game accompanying the winning of this jackpot is It will be in a state corresponding to the type of this big hit.

  In step S2402 (see FIG. 17) of the special symbol variation preprocessing in the special symbol A game process, the main control CPU72, "comparative value" in the special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table for the special jackpot random number and special symbol A obtained And are sequentially compared, and if the random number value of the big hit symbol random number is less than or equal to the comparison value, the winning symbol corresponding to the comparison value is determined as the big hit symbol. For example, it is assumed that the random number of the jackpot symbol random number is "40". The main control CPU72 compares the random number value "40" of the big hit symbol random number with the first comparison value "0", and the random number value exceeds the comparison value, so the next comparison value "49" and the big hit random number Compare with the numerical value "40". In this case, since the random number value is less than or equal to the comparison value, the main control CPU72 determines the "8 round jackpot symbol 2" associated with the comparison value "49" as the winning symbol.

  In the pachinko machine 1, for example, the numerical range of “comparison value” is set to 0 to 99. Therefore, the probability that "8 round big hit symbol 1" is selected as the big hit symbol in the special symbol A is 1% (= 1/100), and the probability that "8 round big hit symbol 2" is selected is 49% (= 49/100), the probability of selecting "8 round jackpot design 3" is 1% (= 1/100), and the probability of selecting "8 round jackpot design 4" is 49% (= 49/100).

  In this way, in the winning lottery executed when the game ball enters the first starting winning opening 26 or the variable starting winning device 28, "8 round jackpot pattern 2" regardless of the gaming state at the time of the drawing. Alternatively, the probability of selecting “8 round jackpot pattern 4” is relatively high. For this reason, if the big game is won in the variation game of the special symbol A, then the gaming state of the pachinko machine 1 is likely to shift to a state advantageous to the player (rush state or time saving state).

  As shown in FIG. 20 (b), the special symbol B special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table, "game state at the time of lottery", "comparison value", "winning symbol" and "game state after big jackpot game" It consists of four items. Special symbol B for special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table "game state at the time of lottery", "comparison value", "winning symbol" and "gaming state after big hit game", special symbol for special symbol big hit stop Since these items are the same as those in the symbol selection table, description thereof will be omitted.

  "Game state at the time of lottery" has two groups, "rush state", "normal state", "time saving state", "special high probability state", "penalty 1 state" and "penalty 2 state". Broadly classified, a total of six game states are set. Hereinafter, a set of "normal state", "time saving state", "special high probability state", "penalty 1 state" and "penalty 2 state" may be referred to as "remaining game state". Special symbol B for special symbols big hit stop symbol selection table "normal state", "time saving state", "rush state", "special high probability state", "penalty 1 state" and "penalty 2 state" are special symbols Since it is similar to these items in the special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table for A, the description thereof will be omitted.

  The "comparison value" is set to, for example, stepwise different values "48", "49", "98" and "99" in association with the "rush state" set in the "game state at the time of lottery". Has been done. Further, in the "comparative value", the values "4" and "99" which are different stepwise are set in association with the "remaining game state" set in the "game state at the time of lottery".

  In the "winning symbol", "14 round jackpot symbol 1" is set in association with the gaming state "rush state" and the comparison value "48" at the time of the lottery, and the gaming state "rush state" and the comparison value "at the time of the lottery" "14 round jackpot pattern 2" is set in association with "49", and "2 round jackpot pattern 1" is set in association with the game state "rush state" and the comparison value "98" at the time of lottery "2 round jackpot pattern 2" is set in association with the game state "rush state" and the comparison value "99".

  "Winning symbol" is set to "14 round jackpot symbol 3" in association with the gaming state "remaining gaming state" and the comparison value "4" at the time of lottery, and the gaming state "remaining gaming state" at the time of lottery And "2 round big hit symbol 3" is set in association with the comparison value "99".

  "Game state after jackpot game", "rush state (ST: 80 times)" is set in association with the winning symbol "14 round jackpot symbol 1", and is associated with the winning symbol "14 round jackpot symbol 2" "Normal state" is set, "Rush state (ST: 80 times)" is set in association with the winning symbol "2 round jackpot symbol 1", and the winning symbol "2 round jackpot symbol 2" is associated "Normal state" is set. "ST: 80 times" in the special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table for special figure B is the same as "ST: 80 times" in the special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table for special figure A, so the description is omitted. .

  In step S2402 (see FIG. 17) of the special symbol variation preprocessing in the special symbol B game process, the main control CPU72, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 1, the obtained jackpot symbol random number, and the special symbol B special symbol jackpot stop The "comparison value" in the symbol selection table is sequentially compared, and if the random number of the big hit symbol random number is less than or equal to the comparison value, the winning symbol corresponding to the comparison value is determined as the big hit symbol. For example, it is assumed that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 1 is a rush state, and the random number value of the jackpot symbol random number is "60". The main control CPU72 compares the random number value "60" of the jackpot symbol random number with the first comparison value "48" associated with the gaming state "rush state" at the time of winning, and the random number value exceeds the comparison value. There is. For this reason, the main control CPU72 compares the random number value "60" of the jackpot symbol random number with the next comparison value "49" associated with the gaming state "rush state" at the time of winning, and the random number value is the comparison value. Is over. Therefore, the main control CPU 72 further compares the random number value “60” of the jackpot symbol random number with the next comparison value “98” associated with the gaming state “rush state” at the time of winning. In this case, since the random number value is less than or equal to the comparison value, the main control CPU72 determines "2 round big hit symbol 1" associated with the comparison value "98" as the winning symbol.

  In the pachinko machine 1, for example, the numerical range of “comparison value” is set to 0 to 99. Therefore, when the "game state at the time of lottery" is "rush state", the probability that "14 round big hit symbol 1" is selected as the big hit symbol in the special symbol B is 49% (= 49/100). , The probability of selecting “14 round jackpot symbol 2” is 1% (= 1/100), and the probability of selecting “2 round jackpot symbol 1” is 49% (= 49/100) , The probability of selecting “2 round jackpot pattern 2” is 1% (= 1/100).

  In this way, in the winning lottery executed when the game ball enters the second starting winning opening 27, if the game state at the time of the lottery is “rush state”, “14 round jackpot symbol 1” or The probability of selecting "2 round jackpot pattern 1" is relatively high. For this reason, in the pachinko machine 1, if the big hit is won when the gaming state at the time of the lottery is the "rush state", the gaming state in the rush state is likely to continue thereafter.

  On the other hand, when the "game state at the time of lottery" is "remaining state", the probability that "14 round big hit symbol 3" is selected as the big hit symbol in the special symbol B is 5% (= 5/100). , The probability of selecting “2 round big hit symbol 3” is 95% (= 95/100).

  In this way, in the winning lottery executed when the game ball enters the second starting winning opening 27, the gaming state at the time of the lottery is “normal state”, “time saving state”, “special high probability state”. , “Penalty 1 state” and “Penalty 2 state”, either “14 round jackpot symbol 3” or “2 round jackpot symbol 3” is selected. Therefore, even if the pachinko machine 1 enters the second starting winning opening 27 and wins the jackpot when the gaming state at the time of the lottery is other than the "rush state", the gaming state thereafter is the penalty 1 state or the penalty. It becomes one of the two states and it is difficult to win the big hit.

  When the result of the big hit this time corresponds to the special symbol A, the main control CPU72 performs a selection lottery based on the big hit symbol random number, and selectively selects the winning symbol at the selection ratio shown in the special symbol A big hit stop symbol selection table. decide. Although illustration is omitted, for example, 2-byte command data is defined as a stop symbol command at the time of winning. The stop symbol command is described, for example, by a combination of MODE value-EVENT value, and of these, the MODE value “B1H” of the upper byte is that the winning symbol of this time is the command selected when the special symbol A is hit big. The MODE value “B2H” indicates that the winning symbol of this time is the command selected when the special symbol B is hit big. In addition, the EVENT values “01H”, “02H”, “03H”, and “04H” of the lower byte represent the types of corresponding winning symbols in the selection table. Therefore, for example, when the result of the big hit this time corresponds to the special symbol A and "8 round big hit symbol 1" is selected as the winning symbol, the stop symbol command at the time of winning is described as "B1H01H". .

  Here, the opening patterns of the pair of opening / closing members 28b of the variable start winning device 28 in the penalty state (penalty 1 state and penalty 2 state) and the non-time saving state will be described with reference to FIGS. 21 and 22. The open state of the pair of opening / closing members 28b of the variable start winning device 28 differs between the penalty state and the non-time saving state (operation pattern setting means, operation pattern setting instruction means). 21 and 22 are diagrams illustrating an example of an opening pattern of the pair of opening / closing members 28b of the variable start winning device 28 and an opening pattern of the pair of opening / closing members 28b of the variable starting winning device 28 in the penalty state.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 21, the total opening time of the pair of opening / closing members 28b of the variable start winning device 28 is 5 seconds in the non-time saving state, while it is extended to 5.82 seconds in the penalty state. However, the opening time per one time is 5 seconds in the non-time saving state, while it is shortened to 0.06 seconds in the penalty state. Further, the closing time of each of the pair of opening / closing members 28b is 0.5 seconds in the non-time saving state, while it is 10.0 seconds in the time saving state, which is a very long time. The opening and closing operations of the pair of opening / closing members 28b are repeated once in the non-time saving state, but 98 times in the penalty state. Therefore, the total operation time of the variable start winning device 28 is 5.5 seconds in the non-time saving state, while it is about 16 minutes in the penalty state. That is, the pachinko machine 1 has a configuration in which the open pattern of the pair of opening / closing members 28b of the variable start winning device 28 in the penalty state is repeated short open and long interval. As a result, the pachinko machine 1 can penalize a player who makes a right hit to the second start winning hole 27 when the right hit should not be made in the course of the game.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 22, when the normal design operation lottery is won, the variable start winning device 28 (Den Chu) operates, but the Den Chu is opened for 0.06 seconds. On the other hand, the closing is performed for 10 seconds, and the operation is performed multiple times (for example, 98 times). Then, the operation time of the variable start winning device 28, which is performed for one winning in the operation lottery of the normal symbol, is performed over a total of about 16 minutes.

  Therefore, even if the game is played by an illegal game method (right-handed) different from the original game method (left-handed), and even if the internal lottery of the special symbol B is a big hit, it is transferred to the penalty state, and the normal symbol By changing the opening pattern of the variable start winning device 28 (Den Chu) at the time of winning to short opening and repeating a long interval, it is possible to prevent the special symbol B from further changing (to prevent an illegal game from being executed). . In addition, if you win the big hit with the special symbol A, if you do not shift to the penalty state, if you have a big hit with the special symbol A even during the penalty, it will be treated in the same way as a normal game, and you can apply the penalty only to the special symbol B.

  Here, it is referred to in the big hit time variation pattern determination process (step S2403), the small hit time variation pattern determination process (step S2406), and the out-of-range variation pattern determination process (step S2409) in the special symbol variation pre-production shown in FIG. Various tables will be described with reference to FIGS. 23 to 26.

  FIG. 23 is a diagram illustrating a reach group determination random number determination table. A plurality of reach group determination random number determination tables are provided, and one table is selected according to a hold type, the number of holds, and a variation state described later that is associated with a game state. Here, the "holding type" indicates holding of the special symbol A and holding of the special symbol B. "Holding number" indicates the special symbol working memory number. When a game ball enters the first start winning opening 26, the second starting winning opening 27, or the variable starting winning opening 28a, one reach group determination random number is acquired from the range of 0 to 10006. When the winning lottery result is derived, a process of determining a variation effect pattern for notifying the winning lottery result is performed. In the present embodiment, when the winning lottery result is “out”, the group type is first determined by the reach group determination random number and the reach group determination random number determination table when determining the variation effect pattern.

  For example, when the gaming state is set to the non-time saving gaming state, and the variation state is set to the normal state, when the winning lottery result of “out” is derived based on the suspension of the special symbol A, When the special figure A holding number (hereinafter simply referred to as “holding number”) at the time of winning lottery is 0, as shown in FIG. 23A, the reach group determination random number determination table 1 is selected. . Similarly, if the number of reservations is 1 or 2, the reach group determination random number determination table 2 is selected as shown in FIG. 23 (b), and if the number of reservations is 3, FIG. 23 (c). As shown in, the reach group determination random number determination table 3 is selected. Note that, in FIG. 23, the group x described in the group type column indicates an arbitrary group number. Therefore, various group numbers are determined as the group type according to the acquired reach group determination random number and the type of the reach group determination random number determination table to be referred to.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the table for determining the variation effect pattern is determined based on the variation state in addition to the set game state. That is, the variation state defines which table is used to determine the variation effect pattern, and is a concept set separately from the gaming state.

  When the winning lottery result is "big hit" or "small hit", the group type is not decided when the variation effect pattern is decided. That is, the reach group determination random number determination table is referred to only when the winning lottery result is “out”, and is not referred to when the winning lottery result is “big hit” or “small hit”.

  FIG. 24 is a diagram illustrating a reach mode determination random number determination table. This reach mode determination random number determination table is selected when the winning lottery result is “out”, and the reach mode determination random number determination table when out-of-range and the big hit selected when the winning lottery result is “big hit” The time reach mode determination random number determination table and the small hit time reach mode determination random number determination table selected when the winning lottery result is "small hit" are roughly classified. The out-of-range reach mode determination random number determination table is provided for each determined group type, and the big hit reach mode determination random number determination table and the small hit reach mode determination random number determination table are provided for each pending type. ing. Further, each reach mode determination random number determination table is also provided for each game state and each type of symbol. Here, FIG. 24A shows an example of the reach time determination random number determination table for the group x lost time referred to in the predetermined game state and the symbol type, and an example of the reach mode determination random number determination table for the special figure A jackpot. 24 (b), an example of the special mode B large hitting time reach mode determination random number determination table is shown in FIG. 24 (c), and an example of the special figure small hit state reach mode determination random number determination table is shown in FIG. FIG. 24E shows an example of the reach mode determination random number determination table for small hit for special figure B shown in FIG.

  When the game ball enters the first start winning opening 26, the second starting winning opening 27 or the variable starting winning device 28, one reach mode determination random number is acquired from the range of 0-250. Then, when the result of the winning lottery is “out”, as shown in FIG. 24A, the out-reach-time reach mode determination random number determination table corresponding to the group type determined by the group type lottery is selected. The variation mode number is determined based on the selected out-of-miss reach mode determination random number determination table and the reach mode determination random number. If the result of the winning lottery is "big hit", as shown in FIGS. 24 (b) and 24 (c), the big hit time reach mode determination random number determination table corresponding to the read hold type. Is selected, and the variation mode number is determined based on the selected jackpot reach mode determination random number determination table and the reach mode determination random number. Further, when the result of the winning lottery is “small hit”, as shown in FIG. 24D and FIG. 24E, the small hitting reach mode determination random number corresponding to the read hold type is read. The determination table is selected, and the variation mode number is determined based on the selected random hit reach mode determination random number determination table and the reach mode determination random number.

  Further, in each reach mode determination random number determination table, the reach mode determination random number is associated with the variation pattern number and the variation pattern random number determination table, and at the same time when the variation mode number is determined, the variation pattern random number determination is performed. The table is determined. In addition, in FIG. 24, the table x described in the column of the fluctuation pattern random number determination table indicates an arbitrary table number. Therefore, the variation mode number and the table number of the variation pattern random number determination table are determined according to the obtained reach mode determination random number and the type of the reach mode determination random number determination table to be referred to.

  As described above, when the winning lottery result is “out”, the group type is first determined by the reach group determination random number determination table and the reach group determination random number shown in FIG. Next, the variation mode number and variation pattern random number determination table are determined by the out-of-miss reach mode determination random number determination table and the reach mode determination random number shown in FIG. 24 according to the determined group type and game state.

  On the other hand, when the winning lottery result is "big hit" or "small hit", the determined big hit design or small hit design (type of special design), big hit, or in the gaming state at the time of small hit winning, etc. 24, the variation mode number and variation pattern random number determination table are determined by using the reach mode determination random number with reference to the corresponding jackpot reach mode determination random number determination table shown in FIG.

  FIG. 25 is a diagram illustrating a variation pattern random number determination table. Here, the fluctuation pattern random number judgment table x of a predetermined table number x is shown, but in addition to this, a large number of fluctuation pattern random number judgment tables are provided for each table number.

  When the game ball enters the first starting winning opening 26, the second starting winning opening 27 or the variable starting winning device 28, one variation pattern random number is acquired from the range of 0 to 238. The fluctuation pattern number is determined as shown based on the fluctuation pattern random number determination table determined at the same time as the fluctuation mode number and the acquired fluctuation pattern random number.

  In this way, when the winning lottery is performed, the variation mode number and the variation pattern number are determined according to the winning lottery result, the determined symbol type, the game state, the number of holdings, the holding type, and the like. The variation mode number and the variation pattern number are numbers that identify the variation effect pattern, and are associated with the aspect of the variation effect and the variation time.

  FIG. 26 is a diagram illustrating the variable time determination table. When the variation mode number is determined, the variation time 1 is determined according to the variation time 1 determination table shown in FIG. According to this variation time 1 determination table, variation time 1 is associated with each variation mode number, and corresponding variation time 1 is determined according to the determined variation mode number.

  When the variation pattern number is determined, the variation time 2 is determined according to the variation time 2 determination table shown in FIG. According to the variation time 2 determination table, the variation time 2 is associated with each variation pattern number, and the corresponding variation time 2 is determined according to the determined variation pattern number. The total time of the fluctuation time 1 and the fluctuation time 2 determined in this way is the time of the fluctuation effect for notifying the winning lottery result, that is, the fluctuation time and the stop display time at which the stop symbol is stopped and displayed.

  When the variation mode number is determined as described above, the variation mode command corresponding to the determined variation mode number is transmitted to the effect control device 124, and when the variation pattern number is determined, the determined variation pattern number The variation pattern command corresponding to is transmitted to the effect control device 124. In the effect control device 124, the first half aspect of the variation effect is mainly determined based on the received variation mode command, and the second half aspect of the variation effect is mainly determined based on the received variation pattern command. Becomes Hereinafter, the variation mode command and the variation pattern command may be collectively referred to as a variation command.

  FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the special symbol changing process. Hereinafter, each procedure will be described. The contents of the special symbol changing process listed below can be common to the special symbol B game process (FIG. 14) and the special symbol A game process (FIG. 15). That is, when the following procedure is applied to the special symbol B game process, the control target is the special symbol B, and when the special symbol A game process is applied, the control target is the special symbol B.

Step S3100:
When the main control CPU72 starts the special symbol variation process, first, it is confirmed whether or not the value (01H) is set in the symbol variation measurement interruption flag of the special symbol to be controlled. When the value (01H) is set in the symbol variation measurement interruption flag of the special symbol to be controlled (Yes), the main control CPU72 shifts the processing to step S3200. On the other hand, when the value (01H) is not set in the symbol variation measurement interruption flag (No), the main control CPU 72 determines that this process is a special symbol variation preprocess in the special symbol B game process. Returning to FIG. 14), if this process is a special symbol variation pre-process in the special symbol A game process, it returns to the special symbol A game process (FIG. 15). In this way, the pachinko machine 1 is a special symbol variation process step S3200 to step S3700 when the value (01H) is set in the symbol variation measurement interruption flag of the special symbol to be controlled (details will be described later). By not performing the process of, it is possible to interrupt the measurement of the variation time of the special symbol of the controlled object.

Step S3200:
The main control CPU72 subtracts the value of the variation timer for the special symbol to be controlled (decrements only for the interrupt period), and proceeds to step S3300.

Step S3300:
Next, the main control CPU72, based on the value of the fluctuation timer subtracted this time, determines whether or not the fluctuation display time of the special symbol to be controlled has ended. Specifically, if the value of the fluctuation timer is not 0 or less, the main control CPU72 determines that the fluctuation display time has not ended (No). In this case, the main control CPU72 returns to the special symbol game process, and also jumps from the execution selection process (step S1000b in FIG. 14 or step S1900b in FIG. 15) in the next interrupt cycle to perform the special symbol changing process. Execute repeatedly.

  In this way, by the special symbol variation process including step S3300 and step S3300, the variation time of the special symbol A and the special symbol B is measured. Therefore, the special symbol variation process including step S3300 and step S3300 corresponds to an example of variation time measuring means for measuring the execution time of the variation display of the special symbol A and the variation display of the special symbol B. Further, the main control CPU 72 that executes the special symbol changing process and the main control device 70 including the main control CPU 72 also correspond to an example of the changing time measuring means.

  On the other hand, if the value of the fluctuation timer is 0 or less, the main control CPU72 determines that the fluctuation display time has ended (Yes). In this case, the main control CPU72 shifts the processing to step S3400.

Step S3400:
Next, the main control CPU72 confirms whether or not the value (01H) of the symbol variation measurement suspending flag of the other special symbol is set. In the case of the special symbol stop displaying process in the special symbol B game process, this process, the main control CPU72, the value of the symbol fluctuation measurement interruption schedule flag of the special symbol A which is the other special symbol is set to "01H". Check whether or not On the other hand, if this process is a special symbol stop display process in the special symbol A game process, the main control CPU72, the value of the symbol fluctuation measurement suspension plan flag of the special symbol B which is the other special symbol is "01H". Check if it is set. When the value (01H) of the symbol variation measurement suspension schedule flag of the other special symbol is set (Yes), the main control CPU72 shifts the processing to step S3500. On the other hand, when the value (01H) of the symbol variation measurement suspension schedule flag of the other special symbol is not set (No), the main control CPU72 shifts to step S3700 without executing step S3500 and step S3600 described later. .

Step S3500:
Next, the main control CPU72 resets the symbol fluctuation measurement suspension schedule flag of the other special symbol, and proceeds to step S3600. The main control CPU72 resets the symbol variation measurement interruption schedule flag of the other special symbol by setting "00H" to the value of the symbol variation measurement interruption schedule flag of the other special symbol.

Step S3600:
Next, the main control CPU72 sets the value of the symbol variation measurement interruption flag of the other special symbol to "01H", and proceeds to step S3700. The symbol variation measurement suspension flag is a flag indicating whether or not to suspend the measurement of the variation time of the special symbol. When "01H" is set in the RAM 76 as the value of the symbol variation measurement interruption flag relating to the special symbol A, the measurement of the variation time of the special symbol A is interrupted. On the other hand, if "01H" is not set in the RAM 76 as the value of the symbol variation measurement interruption flag related to the special symbol A (for example, "00H" is set), the measurement of the variation time of the special symbol A is not interrupted. Further, when "01H" is set in the RAM 76 as the value of the symbol variation measurement interruption flag relating to the special symbol B, the measurement of the variation time of the special symbol B is interrupted. On the other hand, if "01H" is not set in the RAM 76 as the value of the symbol variation measurement interruption flag related to the special symbol B (for example, "00H" is set), the measurement of the variation time of the special symbol B is not interrupted. In the present embodiment, the symbol variation measurement suspension schedule flag is set for the special symbol A and is not set for the special symbol B (see FIG. 19), so the variation time of the special symbol B is interrupted. There is no such thing. By setting the value of the symbol variation measurement interruption flag of the other special symbol to "01H" by the main control CPU72, the interruption of the variation time of the other special symbol is started. The interruption of the variation time of the other special symbol is continued until the set of the symbol variation measurement interruption flag "01H" of the other special symbol is released.

Step S3700:
Next, the main control CPU72 executes a special variation end process. In the process of step S3700, as the variable display of the special symbol of the control target ends, the flag area of the RAM 76 displays the symbol stop displaying flag of the special symbol of the control target (hereinafter, the symbol stop displaying flag of the special symbol. A value (01H) is set in the "abbreviated as" symbol stop display flag "". Further, the main control CPU72 generates a symbol stop displaying command of the special symbol to be controlled (hereinafter, the symbol stop displaying command of the special symbol may be abbreviated as "symbol stop displaying command"). The symbol stop displaying command includes information on the stop symbol of the special symbol to be controlled.

  For example, if this process is a special symbol change pre-process in the special symbol B game process, the value (01H) is set to the symbol stop displaying flag relating to the special symbol B, and the symbol stop displaying command relating to the special symbol B is set. To generate. Further, for example, if this process is a special symbol variation pre-process in the special symbol A game process, a value (01H) is set to the symbol stop displaying flag relating to the special symbol A, and the symbol stop display relating to the special symbol A. Generate a medium command. The generated symbol stop displaying command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process (step S212) of the interrupt management process shown in FIG.

  Further, the main control CPU72 sets the special symbol stop displaying process (step S4000) to the next jump destination. After finishing the above procedure, if this process is a special symbol variation pre-process in the special symbol B game process, the main control CPU72 returns to the special symbol B game process (FIG. 14). On the other hand, if this process is a special symbol variation pre-process in the special symbol A game process, the main control CPU72 returns to the special symbol A game process (FIG. 15).

[Processing during special symbol stop display]
FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of a special symbol stop displaying process executed in the special symbol B game process (FIG. 14) and the special symbol A game process (FIG. 15). Hereinafter, each procedure will be described.

Step S4100:
When the main control CPU72 starts the special symbol stop display process, first, the value of the stop symbol display timer is subtracted (decremented by the interrupt period), and the process proceeds to step S4200.

Step S4200:
Next, the main control CPU72 determines whether or not the stop display time has ended based on the value of the stop symbol display timer subtracted this time. Specifically, if the value of the stop symbol display timer is not 0 or less, the main control CPU72 determines that the stop display time has not ended yet (No). In this case, the main control CPU72 returns to the special symbol game process. For example, if this process is a special symbol stop displaying process in the special symbol B game process, the main control CPU72 returns to the special symbol B game process (FIG. 14), and execution selection process also in the next interrupt cycle. (Step S1000a in FIG. 14) is jumped to and the special symbol stop displaying process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if this process is a special symbol stop displaying process in the special symbol A game process, the main control CPU72 returns to the special symbol A game process (FIG. 15), and also selects execution in the next interrupt cycle. The process (step S1900a in FIG. 15) is jumped to and the special symbol stop displaying process is repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the value of the stop symbol display timer is 0 or less, the main control CPU72 determines that the stop display time has ended (Yes). In this case, the main control CPU72 shifts the processing to step S4250.

Step S4250:
Next, the main control CPU72 generates a symbol stop command and a stop display time end command. The symbol stop command and the stop display time end command are transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process described above. Further, the main control CPU72 erases the symbol changing flag in step S4210. The "stop display time end command" is a command indicating that the stop display time of the special symbol has ended (elapsed). The stop display time end command includes information on special symbols to be stopped. For example, if this process is a special symbol variation stop display process in the special symbol B game process, the stop display time end command includes information of the special symbol B as the special symbol to be stopped. On the other hand, if this process is a special symbol variation stop display process in the special symbol A game process, the stop display time end command includes information of the special symbol A as the special symbol to be stopped. When the process of step S4210 ends, the main control CPU72 shifts to step S4300.

Step S4300:
Here, the main control CPU72 confirms whether or not the value (01H) of the big hit flag is set. When the value of the big hit flag (01H) is set (Yes), the main control CPU72 shifts the processing to step S4310. On the other hand, when the value of the big hit flag (01H) is not set (No), the main control CPU72 shifts the processing to step S4600.

Step S4310:
Next, the main control CPU72 generates a special symbol special stop designation command (hereinafter sometimes abbreviated as "special stop designation command"), and proceeds to step S4330. The special stop designation command is a special symbol A display device (an example of a first symbol display means) 34 that is displaying a variation of a special symbol A (an example of a first special symbol) and a special symbol B (an example of a second special symbol). When the special symbols are stopped and displayed in a display mode showing the result of the lottery on one of the special symbol B display devices (an example of the second symbol display means) 35 that are variably displayed, the special symbol A display device 34 and the special symbols It is a command for stopping and displaying the special symbol in a display mode unrelated to the result of the lottery on the other side of the FIG. B display device 35. In other words, the special stop designation command, when the change of the special symbol of the control target ends and notifies the lottery result (for example, a big hit), the change of the other special symbol has nothing to do with the internal lottery result of the other special symbol. Is a command for stopping the display in a different display mode (for example, a display mode corresponding to a deviation). It should be noted that the display mode corresponding to the off is the same display mode as the off. The special stop designation command includes information on special symbols to be stopped.

  The main control CPU72, when the variable display of the special symbol of the control object notifies the big hit (step S4300: Yes), based on the special stop designation command is generated, the special symbol for performing the variable display of the other special symbol. The display device (either the special figure A display device 34 or the special figure B display device 35) is controlled so as to be forcibly stopped in a display mode unrelated to the internal lottery (for example, a display mode corresponding to a loss). Moreover, the special stop designation command generated in step S4310 is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process (step S212) of the interrupt management process shown in FIG. Thereby, the effect control device 124 controls the effect display device (one of the liquid crystal display device 42 and the movable liquid crystal display devices 43 and 44) that executes the variable effect corresponding to the variable display of the other special symbol, The variation effect displayed on the effect display unit is forcibly stopped in a display mode unrelated to the internal lottery (for example, a display mode corresponding to the loss).

[At the time of winning]
Step S4330:
The main control CPU72 sets the jump destination of the jump table to "variable winning device management processing at the time of big hit", and proceeds to step S4400. The main control CPU 72 executes processing for setting various functions to non-operation in this processing. Specifically, the probability variation function is deactivated. As a result, before the special game (big hit game (major role)) is started, the state is shifted to the low probability state.

Step S4400:
Next, the main control CPU72 sets "start big winning (big hit game)" as an internal state flag on control, and shifts to step S4500. Further, the main control CPU72 sets the value of the continuous operation number status according to the type of big hit symbol. For example, when the type of big hit symbol is "14 round big hit", a value corresponding to "14 round" is set in the continuous operation number status. When the type of big hit symbol is "8 round big hit", a value corresponding to "8 round" is set in the continuous operation number status. When the type of the big hit symbol is "2 round big hit", a value representing "2 round" is set in the continuous operation number status. In addition, the main control CPU72 generates a state command indicating that the big hit game is in progress. The state command indicating that the big hit game is being performed is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process (step S212) of the interrupt management process shown in FIG.

Step S4500:
Next, the main control CPU72 generates a continuous operation number command, the main control CPU72 returns to the special symbol game process. The continuous operation number command can be generated based on the type (stop symbol number) of the jackpot symbol determined in the jackpot stop symbol determination process (step S2410) shown in FIG. For example, when the types of big hit symbols are “14 round big hit symbol 1” to “14 round big hit symbol 3”, the continuous operation number command is generated as a value representing “14 round”. When the types of big hit symbols are "8 round big hit symbol 1" to "8 round big hit symbol 4", the continuous operation number command is generated as a value representing "8 round". Further, when the types of big hit symbols are “2 round big hit symbol 1” to “2 round big hit symbol 3”, the continuous operation number command is generated as a value representing “2 round”. The generated continuous operation number command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process (step S212) of the interrupt management process shown in FIG.

[When not elected]
On the other hand, in the case other than the big hit time, the following procedure is executed.
That is, when the main control CPU72 determines in step S4300 that the value of the big hit flag (01H) is not set (No), it executes step S4600 next.

Step S4600:
Next, the main control CPU72 confirms whether or not the value (01H) of the small hit flag is set. If the value of the small hit flag (01H) has not been set and is simply a deviation (No), the main control CPU72 shifts the processing to step S4602. On the other hand, if the value of the small hit flag (01H) is also set (Yes), the main control CPU72 shifts the processing to step S4605.

Step S4602:
The main control CPU72 sets the address of the special symbol variation preprocessing as the jump destination address of the jump table, and proceeds to step S4610.

Step S4605:
When the value of the small hit flag (01H) has been set (step S4600: Yes), the main control CPU72 sets the address of the variable winning device management processing at the time of small hit as the jump destination address of the jump table, and proceeds to step S4606. To do.

Step S4606:
Next, the main control CPU72 sets "small hit start (small hit game)" as an internal state flag on control. Further, the main control CPU72 generates a state command indicating that the small hit game is in progress. The state command indicating that the small hit game is being executed is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process (step S212) of the interrupt management process shown in FIG.

Step S4610:
After step S4606, the main control CPU72 loads the value of the number of times cut counter, and proceeds to step S4620. In the "high probability state", each counter value of the "counting counter" is set in the probability variation count area of the RAM 76. In the present embodiment, a so-called number-of-times cut probability change function is employed, and therefore, when shifting to the “high probability state”, the number-of-times cut counter related to the high probability state is set to a predetermined numerical value (for example, 80 times). Further, in the present embodiment, the so-called time cut-off time saving function is adopted, and therefore, when shifting to the "time saving state", the time cut-out counter related to the time saving state is set to a predetermined numerical value (for example, 80 times).

Step S4620:
Next, the main control CPU72 confirms whether or not the loaded counter value is zero. At this time, if the number cut counter value is already 0 (Yes), the main control CPU72 returns to the special symbol game process. On the other hand, when the number of times cut counter value is not 0 (No), after generating the number of times cut counter value command, the main control CPU72 shifts the processing to step S4630.

Step S4630:
The main control CPU72 decrements (decreases by 1) the count-down counter value, and proceeds to step S4630.

Step S4640:
Next, the main control CPU72 determines whether or not the subtraction result of the number of times cut counter value is not zero. As a result of the subtraction, when the value of the number-of-times cutting counter is not 0 (Yes), the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol game process. On the other hand, when the value of the frequency cut counter becomes 0 (No), the main control CPU72 shifts the processing to step S4650.

Step S4650:
Here, the main control CPU72 resets the flag when the number of times cutting function is activated, and returns to the special symbol game process. In the present embodiment, when shifting to the “high probability state”, the frequency cut counter for the high probability state is set to a predetermined numerical value (for example, 80 times), so that the probability variation function operation flag is reset. is there. As a result, the high-probability state ends after the stop display of the special symbol. Further, in the present embodiment, when shifting to the "time saving state", the time cutout counter relating to the time saving state is set to a predetermined numerical value (for example, 80 times), and therefore, it is the time saving function operation flag that is reset. . As a result, the time saving state ends after the stop display of the special symbol.

[Display output management process]
FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing a configuration example of the display output management process (step S210 in FIG. 9) executed in the interrupt management process. The display output management process includes a special symbol display setting process (step S1200), a normal symbol display setting process (step S1210), a state display setting process (step S1220), an operation memory display setting process (step S1230), and a continuous operation number display setting. This is a configuration including a subroutine group of processing (step S1240).

  As for the special symbol display setting process (step S1200), the normal symbol display setting process (step S1210), and the working memory display setting process (step S1230), the special symbol A display device 34 and the special symbol B display device 35 are already described. , A normal symbol display device 33, a normal symbol working memory lamp 33a, a special figure A working memory lamp 34a and a special figure B working memory lamp 35 is a process of generating and outputting a drive signal to be applied to each LED.

  The state display setting process (step S1220) and the continuous operation number display setting process (step S1240) are processes for generating and outputting a drive signal to be applied to each LED of the game state display device 38. First, in the state display setting process, the main control CPU72 controls the lighting of the probability variation state display lamp 38d according to the value of the probability variation function operation flag. For example, when the probability variation function operation flag is set to the value (01H) when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the main control CPU 72 outputs a lighting signal to the LED corresponding to the probability variation state display lamp 38d. The probability variation state display lamp 38d continues to be lit until the big hit game regarding the special symbol is started, or until the probability variation function is turned off after the variation display of the special symbol has been performed a prescribed number of times, and then non- The display can be switched (turned off). Next, the main control CPU72 controls the lighting of the time saving state display lamp 38e according to the value of the time saving function operation flag. For example, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on and the value (01H) is set in the time saving function operation flag, the main control CPU72 outputs a lighting signal to the LED corresponding to the time saving state display lamp 38e. In addition, the time saving state display lamp 38e continues to be lit until the big hit game regarding the special symbol is started, or until the time saving function is turned off after the variable display of the special symbol is performed for a predetermined number of times, and then is hidden. (Lights off) Can be switched. Further, the main control CPU72 controls the lighting of the firing position designation lamp 38f according to the special game management status. For example, when the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 is activated by the big hit game or the small hit game, the main control CPU 72 outputs a lighting signal to the LED corresponding to the firing position designation lamp 38f. . If the value (01H) is set in the probability variation function operation flag, the main control CPU 72 outputs a lighting signal to the LED corresponding to the firing position designation lamp 38f. In addition, when shifting to the "rush state" after the big hit game, the firing position designation lamp 38f lights up from the start of the big hit game until the "rush state" ends, and is turned off (OFF) when the "rush state" ends. Become.

  Further, the main control CPU72 controls the lighting of the hit type display lamps 38a, 38b, 38c in the continuous operation number display setting process. Specifically, the main control CPU72 outputs a lighting signal for any one of the hit type display lamps 38a, 38b, 38c based on the value of the continuous operation number status. At this time, the target for outputting the lighting signal is any of the hit type display lamps 38a, 38b, 38c corresponding to the big hit symbol designated by the value of the continuous operation number status. For example, if the value of the continuous operation number status specifies "14 rounds", the main control CPU 72 outputs a lighting signal to the lamps 38a, 38b representing "14 rounds (14R)". If the value of the continuous operation number status specifies "8 rounds", the main control CPU 72 outputs a lighting signal to the lamps 38a, 38c representing "8 rounds (8R)". If the value of the continuous operation count status specifies "2 rounds", the main control CPU 72 outputs a lighting signal to the lamps 38b, 38c representing "2 rounds (2R)". Further, in the case of a small hit, the main control CPU 72 outputs a lighting signal to the lamp 38c representing "small hit".

[Variable winning device management processing during big hits]
Next, the details of the variable winning device management processing at the time of big hit will be described. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing a configuration example of the variable winning device management processing at the time of big hit. Big winning variable winning device management processing, big winning game process selection processing (step S5100), big winning big winning opening pattern setting processing (step S5200), big winning big winning opening and closing processing (step S5300), big winning big This is a configuration including a subroutine group of a winning opening closing process (step S5400) and a big hit end process (step S5500).

Step S5100:
In the big hit game process selection process, the main control CPU72 selects the jump destination of the process to be executed next (one of steps S5200 to S5500). That is, the main control CPU72 selects the program address of the process to be executed next from the jump table as the jump destination address, and sets the end of the jackpot variable winning device management process as the return address in the stack pointer. Which process is selected as the next jump destination depends on the progress status of the process performed so far. For example, when the operation (opening / closing operation) of the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 is not yet started, the main control CPU 72 sets the big winning opening opening pattern setting process as the next jump destination. (Step S5200) is selected. On the other hand, if the big winning opening special winning opening opening pattern setting process has already been completed, the main control CPU72 selects the big winning opening special opening / closing operation process (step S5300) as the next jump destination, and opens the big winning opening. If the operation processing is completed, the big winning opening special winning opening closing processing (step S5400) is selected as the next jump destination. Further, when the big hit big winning opening opening / closing processing and the big winning big winning opening closing processing are repeatedly executed over the set number of consecutive operations (round number), the main control CPU 72 determines the big hit ending processing as the next jump destination ( Step S5500) is selected. Hereinafter, each processing will be described in more detail.

[Prize winning opening pattern setting process when jackpot]
FIG. 31 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the big winning opening opening pattern setting processing at the time of big hit. The process of the big winning opening opening pattern setting process at the time of a big hit is a process for setting conditions such as the number of times the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 is opened / closed and the time of each opening at the time of a big hit. Hereinafter, each procedure will be described.

Step S5204:
The main control CPU72 first executes the opening pattern selection process for each symbol, and proceeds to step S5206. In the process of step S5204, the main control CPU72 determines the opening pattern of the special winning opening (the number of times of opening in each round and the time of each opening), the interval time between rounds, and the number of counts in one round, according to the winning symbol of this time (Maximum number of winnings) and the operation pattern of the probability variation area solenoid 99 are selected. The open pattern for each winning symbol is as described in the item [plurality of winning types] in the special symbol game process (FIG. 14). In addition, the interval time between the rounds is, for example, "14 round jackpot design 1" to "14 round jackpot design 3", "8 round jackpot design 1" to "8 round jackpot symbol 4" or "2 round jackpot symbol 1" and For any of the "2 round jackpot pattern 2", for example, it is set to about 1 to 2.5 seconds. The number of counts (maximum number of winnings) in one round is, for example, 9 for all winning symbols, but winnings rarely occur during opening for an extremely short time (about 0.1 seconds) ( Not impossible, but extremely difficult).

Step S5206:
The main control CPU72 sets the number of execution rounds in the big hit game of this time based on the winning symbol at the time of big hit selected in the previous big hit stop symbol determination process (step S2410 in FIG. 17), and proceeds to step S5208. Specifically, if the large classification "14 round jackpot" is selected as the winning symbol, the main control CPU 72 sets the number of execution rounds to 14. If "8 round symbol" is selected as the winning symbol, the main control CPU72 sets the number of execution rounds to 8. Further, if the "two-round symbol" is selected as the winning symbol, the main control CPU72 sets the number of execution rounds to two. The number of execution rounds set here is stored in the buffer area of the RAM 76, for example, as a corresponding value on the program (“1” for 2 times, “7” for 8 times, “13” for 14 times).

Step S5208:
Next, the main control CPU72 sets a big hit opening timer and a probability variation area timer (a timer that counts the opening time of the probability variation area) based on the special winning opening opening pattern and the operation pattern of the probability variation area solenoid 99 set in step S5204. Then, the process proceeds to step S5210. The value of the timer set in step S5208 is the opening time of the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31, or the opening time of the probability variation area 31d. In addition, if the time of about 20.0 to 29.0 seconds is set as the value of the big hit open timer and the probability variation area timer, the opening time will be the change into the big winning opening or the probability change during one opening. It is a sufficient time for the passage of the area 31d to easily occur (for example, the time for which 10 or more game balls are shot by the launch control board set 174, preferably 6 seconds or more). On the other hand, if 0.1 seconds is set as the values of the big hit open timer and the probability variation area timer, the opening time is not such that it is impossible to enter the special winning opening or pass the probability variation area 31d during one opening. Even if it does not occur, it becomes a short time (which becomes difficult) that hardly occurs (for example, a time shorter than 1 second, preferably a time shorter than the interval between the game balls shot by the launch control board set 174).

Step S5210:
Next, the main control CPU72, based on the special winning opening opening pattern and the operation pattern of the probability variation region solenoid 99 set in step S5204, the big hit time interval timer and the probability variation region interval timer (wait for temporarily closing the probability variation region. (Timer for counting time) is set, and the process proceeds to step S5212. The value of the timer set in step S5210 becomes the waiting time between the rounds during the big hit game or the temporary closing time of the probability variation area.

Step S5212:
When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU72 sets the next jump destination to the big winning opening big winning opening opening / closing operation process, and returns to the big winning variable winning device management processing (FIG. 30).

[Large winning opening opening / closing operation processing]
FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of a special winning opening opening / closing operation process at the time of big hit. The processing of the big winning opening opening / closing operation processing at the time of big hit is processing for controlling the opening / closing operation of the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 at the time of big hit. The procedure will be described below.

Step S5301:
The main control CPU72 confirms whether or not the special winning opening interval timer is counting down. Specifically, it is possible to check whether or not the special winning opening interval timer is counting down by checking whether or not the special winning opening interval timer set in step S5314 described later is already in operation. it can.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the special winning opening interval timer is counting down (Yes), the main control CPU72 executes step S5314. On the other hand, when it cannot be confirmed that the special winning opening interval timer is counting down (No), the main control CPU72 executes step S5302.

Step S5302:
The main control CPU72 opens the first special winning opening 34b or the second special winning opening 35b, and proceeds to step S5303. Specifically, based on the operation pattern of the variable winning a prize device during the big hit game shown in FIG. 16, the drive signal to be input to the first special winning a prize solenoid 90 or the second special winning a prize solenoid 97 is output. As a result, the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 operates to shift from the closed state to the open state.

Step S5303:
Next, the main control CPU72 executes open timer countdown processing, and moves to step S5303a. In the process of step S5303, a countdown of the opening timer set in the big winning opening special winning opening opening pattern setting process (step S5208 in FIG. 31) is executed.

Step S5303a:
The main control CPU72 confirms whether or not the probability variation area interval timer is counting down. Specifically, it is possible to confirm whether or not the probability variation region interval timer is counting down by confirming whether or not the probability variation region interval timer set in step S5314 described later is already in operation.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the probability variation area interval timer is counting down (Yes), the main control CPU72 executes step S5314. On the other hand, when it cannot be confirmed that the probability variation area interval timer is counting down (No), the main control CPU72 executes step S5304.

Step S5304:
The main control CPU72 executes the probability variation area opening processing, and shifts to step S5303. Specifically, based on the operation pattern of the variable winning device during the big hit game shown in FIG. 16, it outputs a drive signal to be input to the probability variation area solenoid 99. As a result, the probability variation area opening / closing member 31c is opened, and the game ball can be guided to the probability variation area 31d arranged inside the second variable winning device 31.

Step S5305:
Next, the main control CPU72 executes the probability variation area timer countdown processing, and moves to step S5306. In the processing of step S5305, the probability variation area timer countdown set in the previous jackpot opening special winning opening opening pattern setting processing (step S5208 in FIG. 31) is executed.

Step S5306:
Subsequently, the main control CPU72 confirms whether or not the special winning opening opening time is over. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the open timer after the countdown process is 0 or less. If the value of the open timer is not 0 or less (No), the main control CPU72 then proceeds to step S5307a. To execute. On the other hand, if the value of the open timer is 0 or less (Yes), the main control CPU72 shifts to step S5307a without executing step S5307a to step S5310 described later.

Step S5307a:
Subsequently, the main control CPU72 confirms whether or not the probability variation area opening time has ended. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the probability variation area timer after the countdown process is 0 or less, and if the value of the open timer is not 0 or less (No), the main control CPU 72 will be described later. The process moves to step S5308 without executing step S5307b.

  On the other hand, when the value of the probability variation region timer is 0 or less (Yes), the main control CPU72 executes step S5307b.

Step S5307b:
Next, the main control CPU72 executes a probability variation region closing process, and shifts to step S5308. Specifically, the main control CPU72 executes a process of stopping the output of the drive signal to the probability variation region solenoid 99. As a result, the probability variation area opening / closing member 31c is closed, and the game ball cannot be guided to the probability variation area 31d arranged inside the second variable winning device 31.

Step S5308:
The main control CPU72 executes the winning ball number counting process, and shifts to step S5310. In the process of step S5310, the number of game balls that have won the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 (the first big winning opening 30b or the second big winning opening 31b being opened) within the opening time is counted. To do. Specifically, the main control CPU72 increments the value of the count number based on the winning detection signal input from the first count switch 84 or the second count switch 85 within the opening time.

Step S5310:
Next, the main control CPU72 confirms whether or not the current count number is less than a predetermined number (10). This predetermined number defines the upper limit of the number of prize balls (upper limit of the number of prize balls) allowed per opening (one round during the big hit game) as described above. If the counted number has not reached the predetermined number (Yes), the main control CPU72 returns to the jackpot variable winning device management process without executing the processes of steps S5312 to S5322 described later. As a result, when the jackpot variable winning device management processing is executed next time, since the jump destination is set to the jackpot opening / closing operation processing at the present stage, the main control CPU 72 causes the jackpot opening / closing operation during jackpot processing. And the procedure from step S5301 to step S5310 is repeated.

  When it is determined in step S5306 that the special winning opening time has ended (Yes), or when it is confirmed in step S5310 that the count number has reached the predetermined number (No), the main control CPU72 proceeds to step S5312. Run.

Step S5312:
The main control CPU72 closes the first special winning opening 30b or the second special winning opening 31b, and proceeds to step S5313. Specifically, the output of the drive signal to the first special winning opening solenoid 90 or the second special winning opening solenoid 97 is stopped. As a result, the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 shifts from the open state to the closed state.

Step S5313:
The main control CPU72 executes the probability variation region closing process, and shifts to step S5314. Specifically, the main control CPU72 executes a process of stopping the output of the drive signal to the probability variation region solenoid 99. As a result, the probability variation area opening / closing member 31c is closed, and the game ball cannot be guided to the probability variation area 31d arranged inside the second variable winning device 31.

Step S5314:
Next, the main control CPU72 executes an interval timer countdown process, and proceeds to step S5315. In the processing of step S5314, the main control CPU72 executes the countdown of the special winning opening interval timer and the probability variation area interval timer set in the above-described big winning opening special opening opening pattern setting processing (step S5210 in FIG. 31).

Step S5315:
The main control CPU72 confirms whether or not the special winning opening interval time has expired. Specifically, it is confirmed whether the value of the special winning opening interval timer after the countdown processing is 0 or less, and if the value of the special winning opening interval timer is not 0 or less (No), the main control The CPU 72 returns to the end address of the jackpot variable winning device management process (FIG. 30) without executing the processes of steps S5318 to S5322 described later. When the big hit big winning opening opening / closing operation process is executed at the next call, the process jumps from the first step S5301 and directly executes step S5314. On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the value of the special winning opening interval timer after the countdown processing has become 0 or less (Yes), the main control CPU72 executes step S5318.

Step S5318:
The main control CPU72 increments the value of the opening number counter, and proceeds to step S5310. The value of the opening counter is stored in the count area of the RAM 76 with the initial value set to 0, for example.

Step S5320:
The main control CPU72 confirms whether or not the value of the release number counter after increment has reached the number set in the current round. Here, the reason why the "number of times set in the current round" is determined is because, for example, it corresponds to an opening pattern of "opening the second variable winning device 31 a plurality of times in one round during a big hit". Is. When the main control CPU72 determines that the value of the incremented release number counter has reached the number set in the current round (Yes), the process proceeds to step S5322. On the other hand, when the main control CPU72 determines that the value of the number-of-releases counter after increment has not reached the number set in the current round (No), it does not execute step S5322 described later, and the jackpot variable winning device management process is executed. It returns to the end address of (FIG. 30). Then, when the special winning opening opening / closing operation process at the time of big hit is executed at the next call, the process jumps from the beginning step S5301 and repeats the procedure from step S5314 to step S5320.

Step S5322:
The main control CPU72 sets the next jump destination to the big winning opening big winning opening closing processing, and returns to the big winning variable winning apparatus management processing. Then, when the jackpot variable winning device management processing is executed next, the main control CPU72 next executes the jackpot winning opening closing processing.

[Large winning prize closing process at the time of big hit]
FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of a big winning opening closing process at the time of a big hit. The big winning opening closing process is a process for continuing the operation of the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31, or ending the operation thereof. The procedure will be described below.

Step S5402:
The main control CPU72 increments the round number counter, and proceeds to step S5404. As a result, for example, the value of the round number counter becomes "1" at the stage of finishing the first round and proceeding to the second round.

Step S5404:
The main control CPU72 confirms whether or not the value of the incremented round number counter has reached the set number of execution rounds. Specifically, the main control CPU72 refers to the incremented round number counter value (1 to 13), and if the value is less than the set execution round number (1 to 13 after subtraction) (No). Then, step S5405 is executed.

Step S5405:
The main control CPU72 generates a round number command from the current value of the round number counter, and proceeds to step S5406. The round number command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process (step S212) of the interrupt management process shown in FIG. The production control device 124 can confirm the current round number based on the received round number command.

Step S5406:
The main control CPU72 sets the next jump destination to the big winning opening big winning opening opening / closing operation process, and proceeds to step S5408.

Step S5408:
In step S5408 following step S5406, the main control CPU72 resets the winning ball number counter, and returns to the jackpot variable winning device management processing.

  When the main control CPU72 next executes the big hit time variable winning device management processing, the main control CPU72 in the big hit game process selection processing (step S5100 in FIG. 30), the big hit time big winning opening opening / closing processing which is the next jump destination. To execute. After the big hit big prize opening / closing operation process is executed, the main control CPU72 again executes the big hit big prize opening closing process, and the above-described steps S5402 to S5408 are executed. Execute repeatedly. As a result, the opening / closing operation of the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 is continuously executed until the actual number of rounds reaches the set number of execution rounds (2 times, 8 times or 14 times). To be done.

  In step S5404, if the value (1 to 13) of the incremented round number counter is equal to or greater than the set number of execution rounds (1 to 13 after subtraction of 1) (Yes), the main control CPU72 executes step S5410. .

Step S5410:
The main control CPU72 resets the round number counter (= 0), and proceeds to step S5412.

Step S5412:
Next, the main control CPU72 sets the next jump destination to the big hit end processing, and proceeds to step S5408.

Step S5408:
In step S5408 following step S5412, the main control CPU72 resets the winning ball number counter and returns to the jackpot variable winning device management process. As a result, when the main control CPU72 next executes the big winning time variable winning device management processing, the big hitting time ending processing is selected this time.

[End processing at the time of a big hit]
FIG. 34 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the big hit end processing. The big hit end process is a process for adjusting the conditions for ending the operation of the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 during the big hit. Hereinafter, description will be given along with a procedure example.

Step S5501:
The main control CPU72 executes the big hit end time timer countdown processing, and proceeds to step S5502. In the process of step S5501, the main control CPU72 sets an initial value in the jackpot end time timer, and then counts down the timer (every time this module is called) with the lapse of time.

Step S5502:
Next, the main control CPU72 confirms whether or not the end time at the time of the big hit has passed. Specifically, if the value of the big hit end time timer is not yet 0, the main control CPU 72 determines that the big hit end time has not elapsed (No). In this case, the main control CPU72 terminates this module without executing steps S5503 to S5518, which will be described later, and returns to the jackpot variable winning device management process (FIG. 33).

  After this, when the value of the jackpot end time timer becomes 0 with the passage of time, the main control CPU72 determines that the jackpot end time has passed (Yes), and executes step S5503.

Step S5503:
The main control CPU72 resets the big hit flag (00H), and proceeds to step S5504.

Step S5504:
Next, the main control CPU72 finishes the big hit game state (ends a major role) on the control processing of the main control CPU72. Further, the main control CPU72 erases the "big hit game" from the internal state flag here, and declares the end of the major role as the internal state in the control process. The main control CPU 72 resets the value of the continuous operation number status. Further, the main control CPU72 generates a big hit time end time end command indicating that the end time of the big hit game has ended. The big hit end time end command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process (step S212) of the interrupt management process shown in FIG.

Step S5506:
Next, the main control CPU72 confirms whether or not the value (01H) of the probability variation function operation flag is set. The flag of the probability variation function operation flag is a flag set in the previous switch input event process (step S28 in FIG. 10). When the main control CPU72 confirms that the value (01H) of the probability variation function operation flag is set (Yes), it moves to step S5508 and confirms that the value (01H) of the probability variation function operation flag is not set. Then (No), the process proceeds to step S5510 without executing step S5508 described later.

Step S5508:
When the value of the probability variation function operation flag is set (step S5506: Yes), the main control CPU72 sets the probability variation number (for example, 80 times). The set value of the number of times of probability variation is stored in, for example, the probability variation counter area of the RAM 76 and becomes the number-of-times-cutting counter value. The number of times of probability change set here is the upper limit of the number of times a special symbol is changed (internal lottery) in a high probability state in subsequent games. In the present embodiment, since a substantial upper limit is set for the high-probability state, the high-probability state may return to the low-probability state without obtaining a winning result (so-called number-of-times probability change).

Step S5510:
Next, the main control CPU72 confirms whether or not the value (01H) of the time saving function operation flag is set. The time saving function operation flag is a flag set in the big hit time other setting process (step S2014 in FIG. 17) during the previous special symbol variation preprocessing. When the main control CPU72 confirms that the value (01H) of the time saving function operation flag is set (Yes), the main control CPU72 shifts to step S5512, and confirms that the value (01H) of the time saving function operation flag is not set ( No), the process proceeds to step S5514 without executing step S5512 described later.

Step S5512:
When the value of the time saving function operation flag is set (step S5510: Yes), the main control CPU72 sets the time saving number (for example, 80 times). The value of the set time saving count is stored in the time saving count area of the RAM 76. The time saving number set in step S5512 becomes the upper limit number for shortening the variation time of the special symbol in the subsequent games.

Step S5514:
The main control CPU72 generates a state designation command based on various flags, and proceeds to step S5516. Specifically, with the reset of the big hit flag or the end of the big role, a state designation command representing "normal" is generated as the game state. If the probability variation function operation flag is set, a state designation command indicating "high probability medium" is generated as the internal state. These state designation commands are transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process (step S212) of the interrupt management process shown in FIG.

Step S5516:
After going through the above procedure, the main control CPU72 sets the next jump destination to the big winning opening special opening opening pattern setting process, and proceeds to step S5518.

Step S5518:
The main control CPU72 sets the jump destination in the execution selection process (step S1000 in FIG. 14) in the special symbol game process to the special symbol variation preprocess. After completing the above procedure, the main control CPU72 returns to the jackpot variable winning device management process.

[Variable winning device management processing during small hits]
Next, details of the variable winning device management processing at the time of small hit will be described. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing a configuration example of the variable winning device management processing at the time of a small hit. The variable winning a prize device management process at the time of a small hit is a game process selection process at the time of a small hit (step S6100), a large winning a prize opening pattern setting process at a small hit (step S6200), a large winning a prize opening / closing process at a small hit (step S6300). , A subroutine group of a small winning big winning opening closing process (step S6400) and a small winning end process (step S6500).

Step S6100:
In the small hit game process selection process, the main control CPU72 selects the jump destination of the process to be executed next (one of steps S6200 to S6500). That is, the main control CPU72 selects the program address of the process to be executed next from the jump table as the address of the jump destination, and sets the end of the variable winning a prize winning device management process at the time of small hit in the stack pointer as the address of the return destination. . Which process is selected as the next jump destination depends on the progress status of the process performed so far. For example, when the operation (opening / closing operation) of the second variable winning a prize device 31 is not yet started, the main control CPU72 selects the small winning big winning a prize opening pattern setting process (step S6200) as the next jump destination. To do. On the other hand, if the small winning big winning opening opening pattern setting process has already been completed, the main control CPU72 selects the small winning big winning opening opening / closing operation process (step S6300) as the next jump destination. If the winning opening / closing operation processing has been completed, the small winning big winning opening closing processing (step S6400) is selected as the next jump destination. When the small winning big winning opening opening / closing processing and the small winning large winning opening closing processing are repeatedly executed over the set number of continuous operations, the main control CPU 72 determines the small hitting end processing (step) as the next jump destination. S6500) is selected. Hereinafter, each processing will be described in more detail.

[Prize winning opening opening pattern setting process for small hits]
FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of a big winning opening opening pattern setting process at the time of a small hit. The small winning big winning opening opening pattern setting process is a process for setting conditions such as the number of times the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 is opened and closed, and each opening time during a small hit. Hereinafter, each procedure will be described.

Step S6212:
The main control CPU72 sets the "small hitting opening pattern", and proceeds to step S6214. In the case of the present embodiment, for the "small hitting opening pattern", for example, an opening pattern in which "0.8 second opening" is executed once is set. Since there is no concept of "round" for "small hit", the expression "open once" is also used for "open pattern".

Step S6214:
The main control CPU72 sets the number of times of opening the second special winning opening 31b to, for example, 1 based on the special winning opening opening pattern set in step S6212, and proceeds to step S6216. The number of times of release set in step S6214 is stored in, for example, the buffer area of the RAM 76.

Step S6216:
Next, the main control CPU72 sets a small hit opening timer, and proceeds to step S6218. The value of the timer set in step S6216 is the opening time per operation when activating the second variable winning device 31. In this embodiment, 0.8 seconds is set as the value of the small hit opening timer, and during this opening time, one or two game balls enter the second big winning opening 31b. .

Step S6218:
The main control CPU72 sets the small hitting interval timer, and proceeds to step S6220. The value of the timer set in step S6218 is the waiting time for each opening / closing operation of the second variable winning device 31 during the small hit game, and this timer value is set to about 2 seconds, for example.

Step S6220:
When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU72 sets the next jump destination to the small winning big winning opening opening / closing operation process, and returns to the small winning variable winning device managing process (FIG. 35). Then, the main control CPU72 executes a small winning big winning opening opening / closing operation process (step S6300).

[Large winning opening opening / closing operation processing for small hits]
FIG. 37 is a flow chart showing a procedure example of a big winning opening opening / closing operation process at the time of a small hit. The small winning big winning opening opening / closing operation processing is processing for controlling the opening / closing operation of the second variable winning device 31 during a small winning game. The procedure will be described below.

Step S6301:
The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the interval timer is counting down. Specifically, by checking whether or not the interval timer set in step S6314 below is already operating, it is possible to check whether or not the interval timer is counting down.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the interval timer is counting down (Yes), the main control CPU72 executes step S6314 without executing the processing of steps S6302 to S6312 described later. On the other hand, when it is not possible to confirm that the interval timer is counting down (No), the main control CPU72 executes step S6302.

Step S6302:
The main control CPU72 opens the second special winning opening, and proceeds to step S6304. Specifically, based on the operation pattern of the variable winning device during the small hit game shown in FIG. 16, the main control CPU 72 outputs a drive signal to the second special winning opening solenoid 97. As a result, the second variable winning a prize device 31 operates and shifts from the closed state to the open state.

Step S6304:
Next, the main control CPU72 executes a release timer countdown process, and shifts to step S6306. In the processing of step S6304, the opening timer countdown set in the small winning big winning opening opening pattern setting processing (step S6216 in FIG. 39) is executed.

Step S6306:
Then, the main control CPU72 confirms whether or not the opening time has expired. Specifically, it is confirmed whether the value of the open timer after the countdown process is 0 or less, and if the value of the open timer is not 0 or less (No), the main control CPU72 then proceeds to step S6308. To execute. On the other hand, if the value of the open timer is 0 or less (Yes), the main control CPU72 shifts to step S6312 without executing step S6308 and step S6310 described later.

Step S6308:
The main control CPU72 executes the winning ball number counting process, and shifts to step S6310. In the process of step S6310, the number of game balls that have won the second variable winning device 31 (the second big winning opening 31b being opened) within the opening time is counted. Specifically, the main control CPU72 increments the value of the count number based on the winning detection signal input from the second count switch 85 within the opening time.

Step S6310:
Next, the main control CPU72 confirms whether or not the current count number is less than a predetermined number (9). This predetermined number defines the upper limit of the number of winning balls (upper limit of the number of prize balls) allowed per one opening (one opening at the time of a small hit) as described above. If the counted number has not reached the predetermined number (Yes), the main control CPU72 returns to the small hitting variable winning device management process (FIG. 35) without executing steps S6312 to S6316 described later. Then, when the small hitting variable winning device management processing is executed next, the jump destination is set to the small winning opening special winning opening / closing operation processing at this stage, so the main control CPU72 executes the procedure from step S6301 to step S6310. Execute repeatedly.

  When determining in step S6306 that the opening time has ended (Yes) or confirming that the count number has reached the predetermined number in step S6310 (No), the main control CPU72 next executes step S6312. Here, since the value of the open timer is set to a short time for the opening at the time of the small hit, the main control CPU72 normally performs the step before confirming that the count number has reached the predetermined number in step S6310. In most cases, it is determined in S6306 that the opening time has expired.

Step S6312:
The main control CPU72 closes the second special winning opening, and proceeds to step S6314. Specifically, the main control CPU72 stops the output of the drive signal to the second special winning opening solenoid 97. As a result, the second variable winning device 31 returns from the open state to the closed state.

Step S6314:
Next, the main control CPU72 executes an interval timer countdown process, and proceeds to step S6315. In the processing of step S6315, the main control CPU72 executes the countdown of the interval timer set in the small winning big winning opening opening pattern setting processing (step S6218 in FIG. 36).

Step S6315:
The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the interval time has expired. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the interval timer after the countdown process is 0 or less, and if the value of the interval timer is not 0 or less (No), the main control CPU 72 causes the steps described below. It returns to the end address of the variable winning a prize winning device management process (FIG. 35) at the time of a small hit without executing S6316. When the small winning big winning opening opening / closing operation process is executed in the next call, the process jumps from step S6301 at the beginning and directly executes step S6314. On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the value of the interval timer after the countdown process has become 0 or less (Yes), the main control CPU72 executes step S6316.

Step S6316:
The main control CPU72 sets the next jump destination to the small winning big winning opening closing process, and returns to the small winning variable winning device management process. Then, when the small winning combination variable winning device management processing is executed next, the main control CPU72 next executes the small winning combination winning opening closing processing.

[Large winning opening closing process when small hit]
FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of a big winning opening closing process at the time of a small hit. The small winning big winning opening closing process is a process for continuing the operation of the second variable winning device 31 or ending the operation thereof. The procedure will be described below.

Step S6412:
When starting the small winning big winning opening closing process, the main control CPU72 first increments the value of the opening number counter, and proceeds to step S6414.

Step S6414:
Next, the main control CPU72 confirms whether or not the value of the incremented release counter reaches the set release number. The number of times of opening is set in the special winning opening opening pattern setting process (step S6214 in FIG. 36). If the value of the opening counter does not reach the set opening number (No), the main control CPU72 executes step S6416. On the other hand, if the value of the open count counter has reached the set open count (Yes), the main control CPU72 executes step S6418.

Step S6416:
The main control CPU72 sets the next jump destination to the big winning opening opening / closing operation process at the time of small hit, and proceeds to step S6430.
Step S6430:
In step S6430 following step S6416, the main control CPU72 resets the winning ball number counter, and returns to the small winning variable winning device management process (FIG. 35).

  When the main control CPU72 next executes the variable winning device management process, the main control CPU72 in the small hit game process selection process (step S6100 in FIG. 35), the main jump CPU opening and closing operation process at the time of the next jump destination. To execute. Then, after executing the small winning big winning opening opening / closing operation process, the main control CPU72 executes again the small winning large winning opening closing process, and the second variable until the actual opening number reaches the set opening number. The opening / closing operation of the winning device 31 is repeatedly executed. In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the number of times the second variable winning device 31 is opened / closed is one in the small hit game, so the process following step S6414 is always step S6418.

  When the actual number of times of opening at the time of the small hit reaches the set number of times of opening (step S6414: Yes), the main control CPU72 next executes step S6418.

Step S6418:
The main control CPU72 resets the opening counter (= 0) and proceeds to step S6420.

Step S6420:
The main control CPU72 sets the next jump destination to the small hitting end processing, and proceeds to step S6430.

Step S6430:
In step S6430 following step S6420, the main control CPU72 resets the winning ball number counter, and returns to the variable winning device management processing at the time of small hit (FIG. 35). As a result, when the main control CPU72 next executes the variable winning device management processing, this time the small hitting end processing is selected.

[End processing when small hit]
FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the end processing at the time of small hit. The small hitting end process is a process for adjusting the conditions for ending the operation of the second variable winning device 31 during the small hit. Hereinafter, description will be given along with a procedure example.

Step S6502:
When the small hitting end processing is started, the main control CPU72 first executes small hitting end time timer countdown processing, and proceeds to step S6504. In the process of step S6502, the main control CPU72 sets an initial value to the small hitting end time timer, and then counts down the timer (every time this module is called) with the lapse of time.

Step S6504:
Next, the main control CPU72 confirms whether or not the small hitting end time has elapsed. Specifically, if the value of the small hitting end time timer is not yet 0, the main control CPU72 determines that the small hitting end time has not elapsed (No). In this case, the main control CPU72 ends this module without executing the processing from step S6506 to step S6516, which will be described later, and returns to the small hitting variable winning device management processing (FIG. 38).

  After that, when the value of the small hitting end time timer becomes 0 as time elapses, the main control CPU72 determines that the small hitting end time has elapsed (Yes), and executes step S6506.

Step S6506:
Next, the main control CPU72 resets the special symbol fluctuation measurement interruption flag of the control target (00H), and proceeds to step S6508. The main control CPU72 resets the special symbol variation measurement interruption flag of the control target, and restarts the measurement of the variation time of the other special symbol suspended in step S3600 of the special symbol variation process shown in FIG.

Step S6508:
Next, the main control CPU72 resets the value of the small hit flag (00H), and proceeds to step S6510.

Step S6510:
Next, the main control CPU72 erases "in small hit" from the internal state flag to end the small hit game. In the case of a small hit, since the internal condition device does not operate in particular, the process of step S6512 is merely a process for erasing the flag. Further, the main control CPU72 generates a small hit time end time end command indicating that the end time of the small hit game has ended. The small hit end time end command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process (step S212) of the interrupt management process shown in FIG.

Step S6512:
Next, the main control CPU72 sets the next jump destination to the big winning opening opening pattern setting process at the time of small hit, and proceeds to step S6514.

Step S6514:
Next, the main control CPU72 sets the jump destination in the execution selection process (step S1000 in FIG. 14) in the special symbol game process to the special symbol variation preprocess. After finishing the above procedure, the main control CPU72 returns to the small winning variable winning device management process.

  Next, an effect executed by using the liquid crystal display 42 or the movable liquid crystal displays 43, 44, etc. (for example, a variable display effect associated with a variable display of a special symbol, a reach effect executed in the variable display effect, and before the reach occurrence. The control process of the notice effect and the effect during the big hit game) will be described with reference to FIGS. 40 to 47.

[Production control processing]
FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the effect control process executed by the effect control CPU 126. The effect control process is executed in a timer interrupt process (interrupt management process) separately from, for example, a reset start (main) process (not shown). The production control CPU 126 generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined interrupt cycle (for example, several tens μs to several ms cycle) during execution of the reset start process, and executes the timer interrupt process.

  Production control processing, command reception processing (step S400), operation memory production management processing (step S401), production design management processing (step S402), display output processing (step S404), lamp drive processing (step S406), acoustic drive. The subroutine group of the process (step S408), the effect random number update process (step S410), and the other process (step S412) is included. The basic flow of the production control process will be described below along with each process.

Step S400:
When the effect control process is started, the effect control CPU 126 first receives and analyzes the effect command transmitted from the main control CPU 72 in the command reception process, and proceeds to step S401. The production control CPU 126 analyzes the received command and stores the received command in the command buffer area of the RAM 130 for each type. The commands for effects transmitted from the main control CPU 72 include, for example, special drawing destination determination effect commands, (special symbols) effect memory number increasing effect commands, (special symbols) operation memory number decreasing effect commands, starting mouth winning sound. Control command, demonstration production command, lottery result command, variation mode command, variation pattern command, variation start command, special production variation execution command, stop design command, design stop command, state designation command, round number command, error notification command, There are a big hit end effect command, a number cut counter value command, a variation pattern destination determination command, a stop display time end command, a probability variation area passing command, a big hit end time end command, a small hit end time end command, and the like.

Step S401:
In the next operation memory effect management process, the effect control CPU 126 controls the execution of the memory number display effect and the pre-reading notice effect, and proceeds to step S402. The contents of the operation memory effect management process will be described later with reference to another drawing.

Step S402:
In the next effect symbol management process, the effect control CPU 126 controls the content of the variable display effect and the stop display effect using the effect symbol, and at the time of the opening / closing operation of the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31. Controls the contents of production. Further, in the process of step S402, the effect control CPU 126 selects an effect pattern of various notice effects (pre-reach notice effect, post-reach notice effect, etc.). When the process of step S402 ends, the effect control CPU 126 shifts the process to step S404. The contents of the effect symbol management process will be described later with reference to another drawing.

Step S404:
In the next display output process, the effect control CPU 126 causes the effect display control device 144 (display control CPU 146) to perform basic control information on the effect contents (for example, the number of operation memories and the operation memory of each of the special symbol A and the special symbol B). Effect pattern number, pre-reading notice effect pattern number, variation effect pattern number, change notice effect number, background pattern number, etc.). Thereby, the effect display control device 144 (display control CPU 146 and VDP 152) controls the display operation by the liquid crystal display 42 and the movable liquid crystal displays 43, 44 based on the instructed effect contents (effect execution means). When the process of step S404 ends, the effect control CPU 126 shifts the process to step S406.

Step S406:
In the lamp driving process, the effect control CPU 126 outputs a control signal to the lamp driving circuit 132, and proceeds to step S408. The lamp drive circuit 132 drives (turns on or off, blinks, changes in luminance gradation, etc.) the various lamps 46 to 52, the panel lamp 53, and the like based on the control signal input from the effect control CPU 126.

Step S408:
In the next sound drive process, the effect control CPU 126 instructs the sound drive circuit 134 about the effect contents (for example, during the variable display effect, during the reach effect, during the mode transition effect, during the big hit effect, voice data, etc.). Then, the process proceeds to step S410. As a result, the speaker 54, 55, 56 outputs a sound according to the effect contents.

Step S410:
In the next effect random number updating process, the effect control CPU 126 updates various effect random numbers in the counter area of the RAM 130, and proceeds to step S412. The effect random numbers include, for example, a random number used for advance notice selection and a random number used for a normal background change lottery (effect lottery).

Step S412:
In the movable body control process, for example, the effect control CPU 126 outputs control signals to the driving IC of the movable liquid crystal display 43 and the driving IC of the movable liquid crystal display 44, respectively. Further, the effect control CPU 126 outputs a control signal to the driving IC of the movable body 40f. The movable liquid crystal display 43 operates with the movable body solenoid 58 as a drive source, the movable liquid crystal display 44 operates with the movable body solenoid 59 as a drive source, and the movable body 40f operates with the movable body solenoid 57 as a drive source. The movable liquid crystal displays 43 and 44 and the movable body 40f perform an effect in synchronization with the display of an image on the liquid crystal display 42 or independently. When the effect control CPU 126 determines in the command reception process (step S400) that the received command includes the initial position standby command for the movable liquid crystal display, the movable control liquid crystal display 43 is driven. Control IC outputs a control signal for making the movable liquid crystal display 43 stand by at the initial position, and controls the driving IC of the movable liquid crystal display 44 to make the movable liquid crystal display 44 stand by at the initial position. Output a signal. As a result, the movable liquid crystal display 43 and the movable liquid crystal display 44 are forcibly retracted to the initial position.

  Through the above-described production control processing, the production control CPU 126 can comprehensively control the production contents in the pachinko machine 1. Next, the contents of the working memory effect management process executed in the effect control process will be described.

[Working memory performance management process]
FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the operation memory effect management process. The contents will be described below according to the procedure example.

Step S700:
When the effect memory effect management process is started, the effect control CPU 126 first confirms whether or not the effect command for increasing the operation memory number is received from the main control CPU 72. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not the effect command for increasing the number of working memories is stored. When it is confirmed that the effect command for increasing the number of operating memories is stored (step S700: Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S702. When it is not possible to confirm that the effect command for increasing the number of working memories is stored (step S700: No), the effect control CPU 126 shifts the processing to step S704 without executing step S702.

Step S702:
The effect control CPU126 executes the effect memory number increase effect effect selection processing, the process proceeds to step S702. In the process of step S <b> 702, the effect control CPU 126 selects an effect for displaying the hold display image corresponding to the special symbol A and the special symbol B on the liquid crystal display 42. Although illustration is omitted, the pending display image is the working memory number of the special symbol A (the display number of the special symbol A working memory lamp 34a) and the working memory number of the special symbol B (the number of displaying the special symbol B working memory lamp 35a). It is an image showing. The number of the hold display images increases or decreases in association with the change in the number of working memories during the game. The hold display image is configured such that an image corresponding to the working memory number of the special symbol A and an image corresponding to the working memory number of the special symbol B are displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display 42, respectively. Good. In addition, as for the hold display image, an image corresponding to the working memory number of the special symbol A is displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display 42 in the case of left-handed striking, and the working memory number of the special symbol B in the case of right-handed striking. The corresponding image may be displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display 42.

Step S704:
The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not an effect command for decreasing the number of working memories has been received from the main control CPU 72. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not the effect command for reducing the number of working memories is stored. When it is confirmed that the effect command for decreasing the number of working memories is stored (step S704: Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S706. On the other hand, if it is not possible to confirm that the effect command for decreasing the number of operating memories is stored (step S704: No), the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect control process (FIG. 54) without executing step S706.

Step S706:
The production control CPU 126 executes the production selection processing when the number of operating memories is reduced, and returns to the production control processing (FIG. 54). In the process of step S706, the effect control CPU 126 selects the effect of sliding the hold display image corresponding to the special symbol A and the special symbol B, and the effect of erasing the variable image corresponding to the lottery element consumed by the internal lottery. The variation image is an image corresponding to a random number related to the variation display being executed on the special figure A display device 34 or the variation display being executed on the special figure B display device 35. In other words, the variation image is an image corresponding to a random number related to the variation effect corresponding to the variation display executed on the liquid crystal display 42 and being executed on the special figure A display device 34. Further, the variation image is an image corresponding to a random number related to a variation effect corresponding to the variation display which is executed by the movable liquid crystal display 43 and is being executed by the special figure B display device 35, for example.

[Production symbol management processing]
FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the effect symbol management process. Hereinafter, description will be given along with a procedure example.

Step S480:
When the effect control CPU 126 starts the effect symbol management process, it first confirms whether or not the internal state is the low probability state. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 can confirm the internal state by accessing the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirming the state designation command. The internal state can also be confirmed by a change command (hereinafter the same).

  As a result, if the internal state is the low-probability state (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S482, and if the internal state is not the low-probability state (No), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S484.

Step S482:
The effect control CPU 126 executes the low-probability state effect symbol management process, and returns to the effect control process (FIG. 54). To do. In the process of step S482, the effect control CPU 126 controls the contents of the variable display effect during the normal mode and the effect during the major role. The details of the specific processing will be described later.

Step S484:
The effect control CPU 126 executes the high-probability state effect symbol management process, and returns to the effect control process (FIG. 54). In the process of step S484, the effect control CPU 126 controls the content of the basic effect in the rush state and the added effect. The details of the specific processing will be described later.

[Low probability state production symbol management process]
FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the low probability state effect symbol management process. The low probability state production symbol management process, execution selection process (step S500), production symbol variation pre-processing (step S502), production symbol variation process (step S504), production symbol stop display process (step S506) and variable winning. It includes a sub-routine group of the device operation process (step S508). Hereinafter, the basic flow of the low-probability state effect symbol management process will be described along with each process.

Step S500:
In the execution selection process, the effect control CPU 126 selects the jump destination of the process to be executed next (one of steps S502 to S508). For example, the production control CPU 126 sets the program address of the process to be executed next as the jump destination address, and sets the end of the low-probability state production design management processing as the return destination address in the “jump table”. Which process is selected as the next jump destination depends on the progress status of the process performed so far. For example, in the situation where the variable display effect has not been started yet, the effect control CPU 126 selects the effect symbol change preprocessing (step S502) as the next jump destination. On the other hand, if the effect symbol variation pre-process has already been completed, the effect control CPU 126 selects the effect symbol changing process (step S504) as the next jump destination, and if the effect symbol changing process is completed, next As the jump destination of, the production symbol stop displaying process (step S506) is selected. As the variable winning device operating process (step S508), the main control CPU 72 selects the big winning variable winning device managing process (step S5000) or the small winning variable winning device managing process (step S6000). Is selected as the jump destination. In this case, steps S502 to S506 are not executed.

Step S502:
In the effect symbol pre-processing, the effect control CPU 126 performs an operation of adjusting the conditions for starting the variable display effect using the effect symbol. Further, in the process of step S502, the effect control CPU 126 selects the content of the reach effect according to various conditions (lottery result, winning type, change mode, change pattern, etc.), and an effect pattern (pre-read notice) for the notice effect. A notice pattern before the occurrence of a reach, a notice pattern after the occurrence of a reach, etc.) other than the production pattern is selected. In addition, the effect control CPU 126 also controls the demonstration effect when the pachinko machine 1 is in a so-called customer waiting state. The specific content of the processing will be described later using another flowchart. When the process of step S502 ends, the effect control CPU 126 shifts the process to step S504.

Step S504:
In the effect symbol changing process, the effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the special stop designation command including the information of the target special symbol is received. Specifically, the production control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130, and confirms whether or not a special stop designation command including information of the target special symbol is stored. As a result, when it is confirmed that the special stop specifying command including the information of the target special symbol is saved, the effect control CPU 126 outputs the special stop specifying command saved in the command buffer area of the RAM 130 to the effect display control device. To 144. The effect display control device 144 causes the variable effect of the effect symbol corresponding to the target special symbol included in the special stop designation command to be stopped and displayed in a display mode (for example, a display mode that is out of sync) unrelated to the internal lottery result.

  For example, when the target special symbol included in the special stop designating command is the special symbol A, the effect display control device 144 is in a display mode out of the effect effect of the effect symbol being executed on the liquid crystal display 42. The liquid crystal display 42 is controlled so that the display is stopped. Thereby, the pachinko machine 1 is before the special time B display device 35 and the movable liquid crystal display 43 before the end of each fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation on the special figure A display device 34 and the fluctuation effect on the liquid crystal display device 42. At the timing when the symbol for notifying the big hit is stopped and displayed, the shift symbol can be stopped and displayed on the special figure A display device 34 and the liquid crystal display 42. Further, for example, when the target special symbol included in the special stop designation command is the special symbol B, the effect display control device 144 displays the variation effect of the effect symbol that is being executed on the movable liquid crystal display 43 as a display. The movable liquid crystal display 43 is controlled so as to stop and display in this manner. Thereby, the pachinko machine 1 is before the special variation A display device 34 and the liquid crystal display 42 before each variation time of the symbol variation on the special figure B display device 35 and the variation effect on the movable liquid crystal display device 43 ends. At the timing when the symbol for notifying the big hit is stopped and displayed, the shift symbol can be stopped and displayed on the special figure B display device 35 and the movable liquid crystal display 43.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 1 uses the other of the special figure A display device 34 and the special figure B display device 35 at the timing of notifying the big hit by one of the special figure A display device 34 and the special figure B display device 35. On the other side, the liquid crystal display 42 or the movable liquid crystal display 43 can stop and display the symbols in the same display mode. As a result, the pachinko machine 1 can prevent the design mismatch between the special figure A display device 34 and the liquid crystal display 42, and the design mismatch between the special figure B display device 35 and the movable liquid crystal display 43. . In addition, the pachinko machine 1 is configured such that the movable liquid crystal display 43 performs the variation effect of the effect symbol, but the movable liquid crystal display 44 is configured to perform the variable effect of the effect symbol. If so, the special figure B display device 35 and the movable liquid crystal display 44 are configured to prevent inconsistencies in the symbols. Further, in the case of the pachinko machine 1, when the movable liquid crystal display 43 and the movable liquid crystal display 44 are both configured to execute the variable effect of the effect symbol, the special figure B display device 35 and the movable liquid crystal display are used. The device 43 and the movable liquid crystal display 44 are configured so as to prevent a mismatch of symbols from occurring.

  Further, the pachinko machine 1 can use the special stop designating command to force the stop symbol to be in a disengaged form. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1, even if the special symbol A and the special symbol B are won at the same time, or if one is a big hit and the other is a small hit, the variation of the symbol stops first. The jackpot symbol can be stopped and displayed, and the other symbol can be stopped and displayed. As a result, the pachinko machine 1 does not require a process of adjusting the big hit determination result of the target special symbol and the big hit determination result of the other special symbol in the special symbol variation preprocessing shown in FIG. In this way, the pachinko machine 1 uses the simple process of using the special stop designating command so that the special symbol A and the special symbol B simultaneously notify the big hit, or one notifies the big hit and the other notifies the small hit. Can be prevented.

  Further, in the effect symbol changing process, the effect control CPU 126 generates control information for instructing the effect display control device 144 (display control CPU 146) as necessary, and proceeds to step S506. For example, when performing the effect using the effect switching button 45 during the execution of the variable display effect using the effect pattern, the effect control CPU 126 monitors whether or not the player operates the effect button, and an effect corresponding to the result. The display control CPU 146 is instructed about the control information of the content (button effect).

Step S506:
In the effect symbol stop displaying process, the effect control CPU 126 controls the content of the stop display effect using the effect symbol and the moving image in a mode according to the result of the internal lottery, and proceeds to step S508. That is, the effect control CPU 126 instructs the effect display control device 144 (display control CPU 146) to end the variable display effect and execute the stop display effect. In response to this, the effect display control device 144 (display control CPU 146) ends the variable display effect that has been executed up to that point on the display screen of the liquid crystal display 42 or the movable liquid crystal display 43, and gives the stop display effect. Run. As a result, the stop display effect is executed substantially in synchronization with the stop display of the special symbol, and the result of the internal lottery can be directed to the player (disclosure, notification, notification, etc.) (symbol effect execution). means).

Step S508:
In the process at the time of operating the variable winning device, the effect control CPU 126 controls the effect contents during the small hit game or the big hit game. In the process of step S508, the effect control CPU 126 selects the content of the effect during major effect in accordance with various conditions (e.g., winning type). For example, in the case of "14 round big hit pattern 1", the effect control CPU 126 selects the big effect medium effect pattern corresponding to "14 round big hit pattern 1" as the effect content to be displayed on the liquid crystal display 42, and the selected big effect effect pattern. To the effect display control device 144 (display control CPU 146). As a result, an image of a major performance effect is displayed on the display screens of the liquid crystal display device 42 and the movable liquid crystal display devices 43 and 44 as necessary, and the effect contents change as the round progresses. become.

  Further, in the process of step S508, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting an effect indicating that the V winning is generated when the probability variation area passing command is received during the big hit game. On the other hand, when the probability variation area passing command is not received during the big hit game, processing for selecting an effect indicating that the V winning is not generated is executed. When the process of step S508 ends, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect control process (FIG. 54).

[Production pattern change preprocessing]
FIG. 44 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the effect symbol pre-processing. Hereinafter, description will be given along with a procedure example.

Step S600:
When the production symbol variation preprocessing is started, the production control CPU 126 first confirms whether a demonstration production command is received from the main control CPU 72. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether the demonstration effect command is stored. As a result, if it is confirmed that the demonstration effect command is stored (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S602.

Step S602:
The production control CPU 126 executes a demo selection process. In the process of step S602, the effect control CPU 126 selects a demonstration effect pattern. The demonstration effect pattern is a pattern that defines the content of the effect indicating that the pachinko machine 1 is in a so-called customer waiting state.

  When the above procedure is finished, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the end address of the low probability state effect symbol management process. The effect control CPU 126 directly returns to the effect control process, and controls the contents of the demonstration effect based on the demonstration effect pattern in the subsequent display output process (step S404 in FIG. 54) and lamp drive process (step S406 in FIG. 54). .

  On the other hand, if it is confirmed in step S600 that the demonstration effect command is not stored (No), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S604.

Step S604:
The production control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the variation this time is out (non-winning). Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not the lottery result command at the time of non-winning is stored. As a result, when it is confirmed that the lottery result command at the time of non-winning is saved (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S612. On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the lottery result command at the time of non-winning is not stored (No), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S606. It is also possible to confirm whether or not this fluctuation is out of order based on a fluctuation command or a stop symbol command in addition to the lottery result command. That is, if the variation command of this time corresponds to the out-of-normality variation or the out-of-range reach variation, it can be determined that the current variation is out-of-range. Alternatively, if the current stop symbol command designates a non-winning symbol, it can be determined that the current variation is a failure.

Step S606:
If the lottery result command is other than non-winning (missing) (step S604: No), then the effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the current variation is a big hit. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not the lottery result command at the time of a big hit is stored. As a result, when it is confirmed that the lottery result command at the time of the big hit is stored (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S610. On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the lottery result command at the time of the big hit is not stored (No), the only remaining lottery result command at the time of the small hit is, so in this case, the effect control CPU 126 executes step S608. It is also possible to confirm whether or not the change this time is a big hit, based on a change command or a stop symbol command. That is, if the current variation command corresponds to a big hit variation, it can be determined that the current variation is a big hit. Moreover, if the stop symbol command of this time corresponds to the big hit symbol, it can be determined that the change of this time is the big hit.

Step S608:
The effect control CPU 126 executes a small hitting variation effect pattern selection process. In the process of step S608, the effect control CPU 126 determines the effect pattern number of the variable effect to be executed, based on the variable command received from the main control CPU72. The effect pattern number is prepared in advance corresponding to the variation command, and the effect control CPU 126 refers to an effect pattern selection table (not shown) and selects the effect pattern number corresponding to the variation command of the variable effect to be executed. You can Since the small hit variation in the low probability state is set to a long variation time, it is possible to perform no production other than the production of the fourth symbol (non-production). Further, the effect pattern number may be prepared in combination with the variable command, or a plurality of effect pattern numbers may be prepared for one variable command.

  Further, when the effect pattern number is selected, the effect control CPU 126 refers to an effect table (not shown), and changes schedule of effect symbols corresponding to the variable effect pattern number of the variable effect to be executed (fluctuation time, reach type and reach occurrence timing). ), The mode of stop display, etc. are determined.

Step S610:
When it is confirmed in step S606 that it is a "big hit" (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes a big hit time variation effect pattern selection process. In the process of step S610, the effect control CPU 126 determines the effect pattern number of the variable effect to be executed, based on the variable command received from the main control CPU72. In the big hit production pattern selection process, the process may be further branched for each big hit stop pattern.

  Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 may execute a process of selecting different effects in the case of corresponding to “14 round big hit symbol 1” to “14 round big hit symbol 3”. Similarly, the effect control CPU 126 may execute a process of selecting different effects when corresponding to “8 round big hit symbol 1” to “8 round big hit symbol 4”. Similarly, the effect control CPU 126 may execute a process of selecting different effects when corresponding to the "2 round big hit symbol 1" to the "2 round big hit symbol 3".

  In the case of non-winning, the following procedure is executed. That is, if the effect control CPU 126 confirms that there is a deviation in step S604 (Yes), then step S612 is executed.

Step S612:
The effect control CPU 126 executes the off-time variation effect pattern selection processing. In the process of step S612, the effect control CPU 126 determines the effect pattern number at the time of departure based on the variation command received from the main control CPU 72. The effect pattern numbers at the time of falling off are classified into "outside normal fluctuation", "outside reach fluctuation", and the like, and a fine reach fluctuation pattern is defined in "outside reach fluctuation". It is to be noted that which effect pattern number the effect control CPU 126 selects is determined by the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control CPU 72.

  When the production pattern number at the time of departure is selected, the production control CPU 126 refers to a production table (not shown), and a variation schedule of production symbols corresponding to the variation production pattern number of the variation production to be executed (variation time or presence / absence of reach, reach). In the case of occurrence, the reach type and reach occurrence timing) and the mode of stop display (for example, "7"-"2"-"4" etc.) are determined. The specific content of the processing will be described later using another flowchart.

  When the processing of any of the above steps S608, S610, and S612 is executed, the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S614.

Step S614:
The effect control CPU 126 executes the notice selection process (notice effect executing means), and proceeds to step S616. In the process of step S614, the effect control CPU 126 selects the content of the notice effect to be executed during the current variable display effect by lottery. The content of the notice production is determined, for example, based on the result of the internal lottery (winning or non-winning). The notice production is a production for giving a notice to the player that a reach state may occur during the variable display production, or giving a notice that there is a possibility of a big hit eventually. Therefore, the selection ratio of the notice effect is set low at the time of non-winning, but the selection ratio of the notice effect is set relatively high at the time of winning so as to increase the expectation of the player. The selection ratio of the notice production is set higher in the winning case than in the non-winning case.

Step S616:
The effect control CPU 126 executes a mode effect management process. In the process of step S616, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting a background image according to the stay mode.

  When the above procedure is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the low-probability state effect symbol management process (end address). As a result, in the subsequent effect symbol fluctuation process (step S504 in FIG. 43), the variable display effect and the stop display effect are executed based on the actually selected fluctuation effect pattern (effect execution means), and various The notice production is executed based on the notice production pattern. In addition, various stay mode effects are executed based on the background (stay) mode pattern selected here (effect execution means).

  FIG. 45 is a flow chart for explaining a variation effect pattern selection process at the time of deviation from the effect symbol pre-change process. The variation mode command and the variation pattern command are set in the special symbol B game process (step S205a) and the special symbol A game process (step S205b) of the interrupt management process (see FIG. 9) executed in the main controller 70. After that, it is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process (step S212).

Step S612a
When the effect control CPU 126 starts the off-time variation effect pattern selection processing, it first analyzes the variation mode command received, and proceeds to step S612b. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and acquires the variation mode number included in the variation mode command.

Step S612b:
40. The effect control CPU 126 acquires the effect random number updated in step S410 shown in FIG. 40, and also refers to the first-half variation effect determination table (not shown) corresponding to the effect mode that is currently set, and thus the effect random number acquired. And the mode of the first-half variation effect is determined based on the variation mode number acquired in step S612a.

Step S612c:
The effect control CPU 126 sets the variation effect execution command for executing the first half variation effect determined in step S612b in the transmission buffer, and proceeds to step S612d. The variation effect execution command set in step S612c is transmitted to the effect display control device 144, and the effect display control device 144 performs control for displaying the variation effect image corresponding to the received variation effect execution command. Further, the effect control CPU 126 controls the glass frame electric decorative board 136, the panel electric decorative board 138, and the like based on the set variable performance execution command. As a result, the sound corresponding to the variation effect image displayed on the liquid crystal display 42 is output from the speakers 54, 55, 56, the panel lamp 53 is turned on, the movable liquid crystal displays 43, 44 and the movable body 40f are turned on. It will work.

Step S612d:
Next, the effect control CPU 126 analyzes the received variation pattern command, and proceeds to step S612e. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and acquires the variation pattern number included in the variation pattern command.

Step S612e:
The effect control CPU 126 acquires the effect random number updated in step S410 shown in FIG. 40, and refers to the latter half effect effect determination table (not shown) corresponding to the effect mode that is currently set, and the acquired effect random number. And the aspect of the latter half variation effect is determined based on the variation pattern number acquired in step S612d. When the process of step S612e ends, the effect control CPU 126 shifts the process to step S612f.

Step S612f:
The effect control CPU 126 sets the variation effect execution command for executing the latter half variation effect determined in step S612e in the transmission buffer, and proceeds to step S612g. The variation effect execution command set in step S612f is transmitted to the effect display control device 144, and the effect display control device 144 performs control for displaying the variation effect image corresponding to the received variation effect execution command. Further, the effect control CPU 126 controls the glass frame electric decorative board 136, the panel electric decorative board 138, and the like based on the set variable performance execution command. As a result, the sound corresponding to the variation effect image displayed on the liquid crystal display 42 is output from the speakers 54, 55, 56, the panel lamp 53 is turned on, the movable liquid crystal displays 43, 44 and the movable body 40f are turned on. It will work.

Step S612g:
The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the value of the received special effect variation pattern flag is “01H”. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the flag buffer area of the RAM 130, and confirms whether or not the value of the special effect variation pattern flag is “01H”. As a result, when the effect control CPU 126 confirms that the value of the special effect variation pattern flag is “01H” (Yes), the process proceeds to step S612h. On the other hand, if the effect control CPU 126 cannot confirm that the value of the special effect variation pattern flag is “01H” (No), the process proceeds to step S612i without executing step S612h described later.

Step S612h:
The effect control CPU 126 generates a special effect variation execution command based on the variation mode number set in step S612c and the variation pattern number set in step S612f. The effect control CPU 126 sets the generated special effect variation execution command in the transmission buffer, and proceeds to step S612i. The special effect variation execution command set in step S612h is transmitted to the effect display control device 144, and the effect display control device 144 performs control for displaying the special effect image corresponding to the received special effect variation execution command. It As a result, on the liquid crystal display 42, a suggestion effect that indicates the lottery result of the variation effect being executed on the movable liquid crystal display 43 is executed. Further, the effect control CPU 126 controls the glass frame electric decorative board 136, the panel electric decorative board 138, and the like based on the set special effect execution command. As a result, the sound corresponding to the variation effect image displayed on the liquid crystal display 42 is output from the speakers 54, 55, 56, the panel lamp 53 is turned on, and the movable body 40f is operated.

  By the way, when the value of the special variation effect pattern flag is “01H”, the initial position standby command for the movable liquid crystal display is always transmitted from the main control device 70 to the effect control device 124 (the deviation shown in FIG. 19 is lost). The flow from step S2406c to step S2406e of the stop timing process of time symbol fluctuation). Therefore, by the movable body control process (step S412) executed after the effect symbol management process (step S402) shown in FIG. 40, the movable liquid crystal displays 43 and 44 are set by the commands set in step S612c and step S612f. It is saved to the initial position regardless of the contents.

Step S612i
The effect control CPU 126 sets the data of the time table corresponding to the aspect of the first half variation effect determined in step S612b and the data of the time table corresponding to the aspect of the latter half variation effect determined in step S612e, and then step S612j. Move to.

Step S612j:
The effect control CPU 126 resets the variable time counting timer in order to measure the execution time of the variable effect. In the time schedule management process (details will be described later), the variable time counting timer reset here is incremented by a counter value every time a timer interrupt process in which the effect control process is executed. It will be timed.

[High probability state production symbol management processing]
FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of a high probability state effect symbol management process. The contents will be described below according to the procedure example.

[Basic performance management processing]
Step S510:
Production control CPU126, in the process of step S510, executes a process of selecting an image such as a background image or a character in which the internal state is a high probability state, and proceeds to step S512. Further, when the internal state is in a high probability state, a large effect symbol is not used, and mainly only the fourth symbol is used. Therefore, the effect control CPU 126 displays the variable display and the stop display of the fourth symbol. Control aspects.

[Remaining number management process]
Step S512:
In the process of step S512, the effect control CPU 126 executes the process related to the management of the remaining number of times on the liquid crystal screen displayed and the management of the number of latent times (remaining on-production teaching effect execution means), and proceeds to step S514. . The details of the specific processing will be described later.

[Additional effect management processing]
Step S514:
In the process of step S514, the effect control CPU 126 executes the process related to the additional effect with the remaining number of times in the effect as the axis (increase possibility effect executing means, increase effect executing means), and proceeds to step S516.

[Other performance management processing]
Step S516:
In the process of step S516, the effect control CPU 126 executes the process related to other effects during the effect when the internal state is the high probability state. For example, the notice effect is executed based on the lottery result, the look-ahead effect is executed based on the pre-determination command, or the demo effect is executed based on the demo effect command.

Further, the effect control CPU 126, in the process of step S516, confirms whether or not the special stop designation command including the information of the target special symbol is received, and saves the special stop designation command including the information of the target special symbol. When it is confirmed that it is rough, the same process as the process regarding the special stop designation command in the effect symbol changing process (step S504) of the low probability state effect symbol management process shown in FIG. 43 is executed. Thereby, in the pachinko machine 1, even in the high probability state, there is a mismatch between the symbols of the special figure A display device 34 and the liquid crystal display 42, and a mismatch of the symbols between the special figure B display device 35 and the movable liquid crystal display 43. It can be prevented from occurring. Further, even in the high probability state, the pachinko machine 1 can notify the special symbol A and the special symbol B at the same time by a simple process of using the special stop designation command, or one of them can notify the big hit and the other one of the small hits. Can be prevented from being notified.
When the above procedure is finished, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect symbol management process shown in FIG.

[Remaining number management process]
FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the remaining number management process. Hereinafter, description will be given along with a procedure example.

Step S800:
The production control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the operation of the second variable winning device 31 in the two-round big hit game or the small hit game is completed. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130, and confirms the big hit end time end command and the small hit end time end command corresponding to the special symbol B (second variable winning device 31). By doing so, it is possible to confirm whether or not the operation of the second variable winning device 31 has been completed.

  As a result, if it is confirmed that the operation of the second variable winning device 31 has ended (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S802, and if it cannot be confirmed that the operation of the second variable winning device 31 has ended ( No), the effect control CPU 126 returns to the high-probability state effect symbol management process shown in FIG.

Step S802:
The effect control CPU 126 executes a process of decrementing (reducing 1) the remaining number of times in the effect, and proceeds to step S804. The remaining number of times in the rendering is stored in the RAM 130, and the initial value is “80”. In the remaining number management process of the present embodiment, an example in which the remaining number on the effect is subtracted when the operation of the second variable winning device 31 is finished is described, but it is subtracted at the start of fluctuation of the special symbol. Good. Further, the special symbol A and the special symbol B may change the timing of subtracting the remaining number of times in the effect. For example, in the case of the special symbol A, the subtraction is performed when the fluctuation is stopped, and in the case of the special symbol B, the subtraction is performed when the fluctuation starts.

Step S804:
The effect control CPU 126 executes the remaining number of times update effect selection processing, and proceeds to step S804. Specifically, processing for selecting an effect pattern for displaying the remaining number after decrement on the display screen is executed.

Step S806:
The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the game ball has passed through the probability variation area. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not the probability variation area passage command is received, thereby confirming whether or not the game ball has passed through the probability variation area. You can

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the game ball has passed the probability variation region (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S808, and when it cannot be confirmed that the game ball has passed the probability variation region (No), the effect control CPU126 Returns to the high-probability state effect symbol management process shown in FIG. 46 without executing the processes of steps S808 to S814 described later.

Step S808:
The production control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the production execution condition is satisfied. Specifically, a predetermined random number lottery (for example, a lottery to win by 6/7) is performed, and when the random number lottery is won, it is determined that the performance execution condition is satisfied.

  As a result, when it is determined that the performance execution condition is satisfied (Yes), the performance control CPU 126 executes step S810. On the other hand, when it is determined that the performance execution condition is not satisfied (No), the performance control CPU 126 executes step S814.

Step S810:
The effect control CPU 126 executes the pseudo remaining number display effect selection process, and proceeds to step S812. In the process of step S810, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting an effect pattern that displays a pseudo remaining number of times as the remaining number of times in production, in which the actual number of probability changes is kept secret. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 may execute a process of selecting an effect pattern that does not clearly express that the number of probability changes has returned.

Step S812:
Production control CPU126 executes the latent count calculation process (increased number storage means), and returns to the high probability state production symbol management process shown in FIG. In the process of step S812, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of setting the value obtained by subtracting the pseudo remaining number in the effect from the actual number of probability changes as the number of latent times. For example, if the actual number of probable changes is 80 and the current remaining number of presentations is 30, the number of incubations is 50. The effect control CPU 126 stores the calculated number of latencies in the RAM 130.

Step S814:
The production control CPU 126 executes the true remaining number display production selection processing, and returns to the high-probability state production design management processing shown in FIG. 46. In the process of step S814, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting an effect pattern that directly displays the actual number of probability changes as the remaining number of effects. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting an effect pattern for clearly expressing that the number of probability changes has been restored on the liquid crystal display 42, for example.

[Time schedule management process]
FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the time schedule management process executed by the effect control CPU 126. The time schedule management process is executed in the timer interrupt process (interrupt management process) in which the effect control process is executed. In the time schedule management, the effect control CPU 126 individually manages the elapsed time of the variable effect corresponding to the special symbol A and the elapsed time of the variable effect corresponding to the special symbol B. The effect control CPU 126 measures the elapsed time of each variable effect of the special symbol A and the special symbol B, and refers to the time table set for each variable effect to correspond to the corresponding time stored in the time table. The process is executed, or when the special stop designation command is received, the elapsed time of the variable effect is forcibly reset. The flow of the time schedule management process will be described below.

Step S900:
When the time schedule management process is started, the effect control CPU 126 first adds the counter value of the variable time counting timer of the target variable effect, updates the variable effect execution time, and proceeds to step S901.

Step S901:
Next, the effect control CPU 126 refers to the time table set during the execution of the target variable effect, and sets various commands in the transmission buffer or various flags according to the current execution time of the variable effect. A control process for turning ON / OFF is executed, and the process proceeds to step S903.

Step S903:
Next, the production control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the special stop designation command including the information of the target special symbol is received. Specifically, the production control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130, and confirms whether or not a special stop designation command including information of the target special symbol is stored. As a result, when the production control CPU 126 confirms that the special stop designation command including the information of the target special symbol is stored, the process proceeds to step S905. On the other hand, when the production control CPU 126 confirms that the special stop designation command including the information of the target special symbol is not stored, the production control CPU 126 returns to the timer interrupt process. For example, if this process is a time schedule management process for the variable effect corresponding to the special symbol A, the effect control CPU 126 confirms that the special stop designation command including the information of the special symbol A is stored, and then performs the process. When it is confirmed that the special stop designation command including the information of the special symbol B is stored or the special stop designation command is not received, the process returns to the timer interrupt process. Further, for example, when this process is a time schedule management process for the variable effect corresponding to the special symbol B, the effect control CPU 126 confirms that the special stop designation command including the information of the special symbol B is stored, and then performs the process. The process proceeds to step S905, and if it is confirmed that the special stop designation command including the information of the special symbol A is stored or the special stop designation command is not received, the process returns to the timer interrupt process.

Step S905:
Next, the production control CPU 126 resets the counter value of the variation time counting timer of the target variation production, and returns to the timer interrupt process. By the production control CPU 126 resets the counter value of the variation time counting timer of the target variation production, the variation production is forcibly stopped based on the special stop designation command, and at the same time as the remaining variation time of this variation production. Is set to 0. This prevents the display mode on the liquid crystal display 42 or the movable liquid crystal display 43 from being inconsistent with the elapsed time of the fluctuation effect.
This completes the time schedule management process.

[Change timing of special symbols]
Next, the variation timing of the special symbol will be described with reference to FIGS. 49 to 52. Here, four operation examples of the parallel variation timing of the special symbol A and the special symbol B will be described.

(Parallel variation example 1)
FIG. 49 is a timing chart showing the variation timing of the special symbol in the parallel variation example 1 of the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment. The “special figure A display device” shown in the upper part of FIG. 49 shows the symbol variation of the special symbol executed in the special figure A display device 34. The “special figure B display device” shown in the lower part of FIG. 49 indicates a symbol variation of the special symbol executed in the special figure B display device 35. The rectangular frame shown in the upper part of FIG. 49 shows, from left to right, a period during which the special symbol A is changing, a period during which the symbol is being determined, and a period during which a big jackpot game triggered by a big hit of the special symbol A is being executed. ing. The rectangular frame shown in the lower part of FIG. 49 indicates a period in which the symbol of the special symbol B is being changed. Further, in FIG. 49, the passage of time is shown from left to right.

  As shown in FIG. 49, at the time t1, the special symbol A display device 34 is performing the variable display of the special symbol related to the big hit, and the special symbol B display device 35 is not performing the variable display of the special symbol B. .

  At a time t2 when a predetermined time has elapsed from the time t1, the game ball enters the second starting winning opening 27, so that the main control CPU72 wins the small hit in the special symbol variation preprocessing (see FIG. 17). It is determined that the stop symbol or the variation pattern is determined (steps S2300 to S2407), and the variation display of the special symbol is started on the special symbol B display device 35 as shown in FIG. Thereby, the pachinko machine 1 starts parallel fluctuation (simultaneous rotation) of the special symbol A and the special symbol B.

  At time t3 when a predetermined time has passed from time t2, the value of the variation timer of the special symbol A in the special symbol A display device 34 becomes “0” and the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 27) ends and the special symbol. Processing during stop display (see FIG. 28) is started, and a special symbol stop designating command is generated in which the stop of the big hit symbol related to the display mode showing the result of the lottery is specified, and the special symbol is stopped in the display mode based on the big hit. The main control device (an example of the symbol control means) 70 performs an output for displaying the special figure A display device 34. As a result, the special symbol A displayed on the special symbol A display device 34 is in a state where the stop display of the big hit symbol is started and the symbol is being determined. In the period during which the symbol is being determined, the special symbol B display device 35 does not perform a special process as the second symbol display unit that can be superposed with the execution of the first symbol display unit, and the small hit time is determined at time t2. The variable display of the special symbol B is continuously executed based on the variation pattern.

  Time t4 (the time when the fixed time of the stop display of the special symbol A ends) when a predetermined time for notifying that the display of the symbol stop is confirmed from time t3 (after the output of the special symbol stop designation command) At the start of the variable display of the next special symbol or a big hit state (a game state that is advantageous to the player), a definite symbol (big hit symbol) stop command is generated, and the main controller 70 causes the special symbol A display device. Based on the output to 34 (see step S4250 in FIG. 28), the stop display of the big hit symbol by the special figure A display device 34 is ended. Based on the end of stop display of the big hit symbol by the special figure A display device 34, the big hit game is started.

Further, in the special symbol stop displaying process, a special stop designation command is generated at the timing when the fixed symbol (big hit symbol) stop command is generated (step S4310). The special stop designation command to be generated will be output in order to make the other special symbol (special symbol B in the parallel variation example 1) that is the target of the special stop a predetermined stop mode . For this reason, as shown in FIG. 49, in response to that output to the main control unit 70 by the generated special stop command specified special symbol B display device 35, at time t4, special symbol B display device 35 In, at least stop by a symbol in a display mode unrelated to the internal lottery related to a predetermined winning is designated. Thereby, the special symbol B display device 35, without waiting for the end of the variable display process of the special symbol (the special symbol being executed by the second symbol display means (display mode of winning)) from the big hit game At the timing of time t4 before the start, the special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed in a predetermined display mode corresponding to, for example, “out” as a display mode unrelated to the result of winning the internal lottery.

  Although not shown in FIG. 49, the liquid crystal display 42 is controlled based on various commands transmitted from the main control device 70 to the effect control device 124, and the special symbol A displayed on the special symbol A display device 34. The effect design is displayed in the display mode corresponding to the mode. Thereby, in the pachinko machine 1, it is possible to prevent the stop symbol on the special figure A display device 34 and the stop symbol on the liquid crystal display 42 from becoming inconsistent.

  The movable liquid crystal displays 43 and 44 are controlled based on various commands transmitted from the main control device 70 to the effect control device 124, and correspond to the special symbol B mode displayed on the special symbol B display device 35. The effect design is displayed in the display mode. In particular, the movable liquid crystal display device (the movable liquid crystal display device 43 in the present embodiment) that displays the effect symbol is based on the special stop designation command transmitted from the main control device 70 to the effect control device 124 at time t4. The variation effect is forcibly stopped in a display mode that is off. Thereby, in the pachinko machine 1, it is possible to prevent the stop symbol on the special figure B display device 35 and the stop symbol on the movable liquid crystal display 43 from being inconsistent.

(Parallel variation example 2)
FIG. 50 is a timing chart showing the variation timing of the special symbol in the parallel variation example 2 of the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment. The "special view A display device" shown in the upper part of FIG. 50 has the same contents as the "special view A display device" shown in FIG. 49, and the "special view B display device" shown in the lower part of FIG. The contents are the same as those of the “special view B display device” shown in FIG. Since the three rectangular frames shown in the upper part of FIG. 50 have the same contents as the three rectangular frames shown in the upper part of FIG. 49, description thereof will be omitted. The rectangular frame shown in the lower part of FIG. 50 indicates a period during which the special symbol B is changing in order from the left, and a period during symbol determination. Further, in FIG. 50, the passage of time is shown from left to right.

  As shown in FIG. 50, at the time t1, the special symbol A display device 34 is performing the variable display of the special symbol related to the big hit, and the special symbol B display device 35 is not performing the variable display of the special symbol.

  At a time t2 when a predetermined time has elapsed from the time t1, the game ball enters the second starting winning opening 27, so that the main control CPU72 wins the small hit in the special symbol variation preprocessing (see FIG. 17). It is determined that the stop symbol or the variation pattern is determined (steps S2300 to S2407), and the variation display of the special symbol is started on the special symbol B display device 35 as shown in FIG. Thereby, the pachinko machine 1 starts parallel fluctuation (simultaneous rotation) of the special symbol A and the special symbol B.

  At time t3 when a predetermined time has passed from time t2, the value of the variation timer of the special symbol A in the special symbol A display device 34 becomes “0” and the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 27) ends and the special symbol. Processing during stop display (see FIG. 28) is started, and a special symbol stop designating command is generated in which the stop of the big hit symbol related to the display mode showing the result of the lottery is specified, and the special symbol is stopped in the display mode based on the big hit. The main control device (an example of the symbol control means) outputs to display the special figure A display device 34. As a result, the special symbol A display device 34 is in a state where the stop display of the big hit symbol is started and the symbol is being determined. In the period during which the symbol is being determined, the special symbol B display device 35 does not perform a special process as the second symbol display unit that can be superposed with the execution of the first symbol display unit, and the small hit time is determined at time t2. The variable display of the special symbol B is continuously executed based on the variation pattern.

  Time t4 (after the output of the special symbol stop designating command) until a predetermined time (for example, 500 ms as a symbol fixing time) for notifying that the display of the symbol stop is confirmed elapses (of the predetermined time) At a predetermined time during the passage), the value of the variation timer of the special symbol B in the special symbol B display device 35 becomes "0" and the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 27) ends and the special symbol stop displaying process (Refer to FIG. 28) is started and a special symbol stop designating command for designating the stop of the small hit symbol is generated, and the main controller 70 specially outputs the output for stopping and displaying the special symbol in the display mode based on the small hit. The display device 35 shown in FIG. As a result, while the symbol of the stop display of the big hit symbol by the special figure A display device 34 is being determined, the stop display of the small hit symbol is displayed on the special symbol B display device 35, and the state is being determined. At this time, in the special symbol A display device 34, the special symbol stop displaying process started at time t3 is performed without performing special processing as the first symbol displaying device that is executed so as to be superimposable with the execution of the second symbol displaying device. The jackpot pattern is displayed continuously.

  At time t5 when a predetermined time has passed from time t3 (time when the fixed time for the stop display of the special symbol A has elapsed), the start of the variable display of the next special symbol or the big hit state (a game state that is advantageous to the player) is started. Based on the fact that the definite symbol (big hit symbol) stop command for generating is generated and output to the special symbol A display device 34 by the main control device 70 (see step S4250 in FIG. 28), The stop display of the big hit symbol by 34 is ended. Based on the end of stop display of the big hit symbol by the special figure A display device 34, the big hit game is started.

  Further, in the special symbol stop displaying process, a special stop designation command is generated at the timing when the fixed symbol (big hit symbol) stop command is generated (step S4310). The special stop designation command to be generated will be output in order to make the other special symbol (special symbol B in the parallel variation example 2) that is the target of the special stop a predetermined stop mode. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 50, at the time t5, the special figure B display device 35 is triggered by the special stop designation command generated by the main controller 70 and output to the special figure B display device 35. Without waiting for the elapse of a predetermined time for notifying that the stop display of the small hit symbol has been confirmed (the measurement of the stop display execution time of the special symbol being executed by the second symbol display means is finished. ), Instead of the small hit symbol, at least stop by the symbol is designated in a display mode unrelated to the result of the internal lottery related to the predetermined winning. As a result, the special symbol B display device 35 corresponds to, for example, “out” at the timing of time t5 before starting the big hit game from when the big hit symbol is stopped by the special symbol A (display mode of winning). The special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed in a predetermined display mode.

  Although not shown in FIG. 50, the liquid crystal display 42 is controlled based on various commands transmitted from the main control device 70 to the effect control device 124, and the special symbol A displayed on the special symbol A display device 34. The effect design is displayed in the display mode corresponding to the mode. Thereby, in the pachinko machine 1, it is possible to prevent the stop symbol on the special figure A display device 34 and the stop symbol on the liquid crystal display 42 from becoming inconsistent.

The movable liquid crystal displays 43 and 44 are controlled based on various commands transmitted from the main control device 70 to the effect control device 124, and correspond to the special symbol B mode displayed on the special symbol B display device 35. The effect design is displayed in the display mode. In particular, the movable liquid crystal display device (the movable liquid crystal display device 43 in the present embodiment) that displays the effect design is dislocated based on the special stop designation command transmitted from the main control device 70 to the effect control device 124 at time t 5 . In the display mode, the variation effect of the effect symbol is forcibly stopped. In this way, the pachinko machine 1 is the special map display device on one side (during the execution of the special symbol stop display process) while the symbol of one special map display device (the special figure A display device 34 in the parallel variation example 2) is being fixed. Even if (the special figure B display device 35 in the parallel variation example 2) is in the process of symbol determination, the display device corresponding to the other special figure display device and the other special figure display device (the movable liquid crystal display in the parallel variation example 2) The device 43) can perform stop display in a display mode of a deviation based on the special stop designation command.

  As shown in the parallel variation examples 1 and 2, the pachinko machine 1 is a new special stop designating command when the special symbol that is stopped first is displayed as a big hit symbol in the parallel variation of the two special symbols. By a simple method of providing a command, it is possible to prevent the conventional problem, that is, the inconsistency between the stop design on the special figure display device to be stopped later and the stop design on the effect display.

(Parallel variation example 3)
FIG. 51 is a timing chart showing the variation timing of the special symbol in the parallel variation example 3 of the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment. The "special view A display device" shown in the upper part of FIG. 51 has the same contents as the "special view A display device" shown in FIG. 49, and the "special view B display device" shown in the lower part of FIG. 50 shows the same contents as the “special view B display device” shown in FIG. The “liquid crystal display” shown in the middle part of FIG. 51 shows the effect display on the liquid crystal display 42. The rectangular frame shown in the upper part of FIG. 51 shows a period during which the special symbol A is changing, and the rectangular frame shown in the middle part of FIG. 51 shows a period during which the effect effect of the effect symbol and the predetermined effect are executed. ing. The rectangular frame shown in the lower part of FIG. 51 indicates a period during which the special symbol B is changing from the left, a period during which the symbol is being determined, and a period during which the big hit game triggered by the big hit of the special symbol B is being executed. There is. Further, in FIG. 51, the passage of time is shown from left to right.

  As shown in FIG. 51, at the time t1, the special symbol B display device 35 is performing the variable display of the special symbol related to the big hit (the result of the first winning), and the special symbol A display device 34 is the variation of the special symbol. The display is not running. Furthermore, the liquid crystal display 42 does not display the effect such as the variation effect that is executed along with the progress of the game.

  At a time t2 when a predetermined time has elapsed from the time t1, the game ball enters the first starting winning opening 26, so that the main control CPU 72 causes the special symbol variation pre-process (see FIG. 17) to be non-winning (off). It is determined that the stop symbol or the variation pattern is determined (steps S2300 to S2410), and the variation display of the special symbol A is started on the special symbol A display device 34 as shown in FIG.

  Further, the main control CPU72, when determining the stop symbol, the variation pattern, etc., executes the stop timing process of the symbol variation at the time of the out (step S2410). The main control CPU72, based on the value of the big hit flag of the special symbol B is "01H", to generate a special effect variation pattern command (step S2406e (see FIG. 19)), the generated special effect variation pattern command. It transmits to the performance control device 124. Based on the special effect variation pattern command is transmitted to the effect control device 124, in addition to the variable display of the effect symbol (an example of the first variable effect) corresponding to the symbol variation of the special symbol A, on the liquid crystal display 42. Then, a big-hit suggestion effect (an example of a special effect related to the result of the second lottery) that suggests the lottery result (big hit) of special drawing B is started. The big hit suggestion effect patterns are stored in a table in which effect patterns of various effects executed on the liquid crystal display 42 are stored. This table is stored in the ROM 128 or the ROM 148. In this way, the pachinko machine 1 starts parallel fluctuation (simultaneous rotation) of the special symbol A and the special symbol B.

  At time t3 when a predetermined time has passed from time t2, the value of the variation timer of the special symbol B in the special symbol B display device 35 becomes “0” and the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 27) ends and the special symbol. Processing during stop display (see FIG. 28) is started, and stop of the big hit symbol is designated. As a result, the big hit symbol is displayed on the special figure B display device 35, and the state where the symbol is being determined is entered. At this time, in the special figure A display device 34, no special processing is performed, and the variable display of the special symbol A is continuously executed based on the out-of-time variation pattern determined at time t2.

  At this time, no special processing is performed on the liquid crystal display 42 either, and the variable display of the effect symbol is continued based on the effect pattern determined at the time t2 at the time of deviation, and the special figure B suggesting effect is continued.

  At time t4 when a predetermined time has elapsed from time t3 (time when the stop display time of the special symbol B ends (that is, the period during which the symbol is being determined expires)), a jackpot symbol stop command is generated (step S4250 in FIG. 28). Based on the above), the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the special figure B display device 35. When the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the special figure B display device 35, the big hit game is started thereafter.

  Although not shown in FIG. 51, the movable liquid crystal displays 43 and 44 are controlled based on various commands transmitted from the main control device 70 to the effect control device 124 and displayed on the special figure B display device 35. The effect symbol corresponding to the big hit symbol of the special symbol B is stopped and displayed in a manner of notifying the big hit.

  Further, in the special symbol stop display process, when the big hit symbol stop command is generated, a special stop designation command is also generated (steps S4250 to S4310 of the special symbol stop display process shown in FIG. 28). The generated special stop designation command also includes information on the other special symbol (special symbol A in the parallel variation example 3) that is the target of the special stop. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 51, when the special stop designation command including the information of the special symbol A is generated, at the time t4, the special symbol A display device 34 displays a display unrelated to the internal lottery. The stop by the symbol in the mode is designated. As a result, the special symbol A display device 34 displays the special symbol in a stopped manner in a display mode corresponding to “out”. The off symbol which is stopped and displayed on the special figure A display device 34 at the time t4 is not the off symbol which notifies the internal lottery result of the variable display of the special symbol A that has been executed until the time t4. The off symbol which is stopped and displayed on the special symbol A display device 34 at time t4 is a symbol based on the special stop designation command and is an irrelevant symbol which is not based on the internal lottery in the special symbol A.

  Further, the liquid crystal display 42 is controlled based on various commands transmitted from the main control device 70 to the effect control device 124, and in a display mode corresponding to the mode of the special symbol A displayed on the special symbol A display device 34. Display the effect design. In particular, the liquid crystal display 42 that displays the effect symbol is forced to change the effect effect of the effect symbol in the display mode corresponding to the out-of-control based on the special stop designation command transmitted from the main control device 70 to the effect control device 124 at time t4. Will be stopped. Thereby, the pachinko machine 1 prevents the stop symbol on the special symbol A display device 34 and the stop symbol on the liquid crystal display 42 from becoming inconsistent even if the variable display of the special symbol A is forcibly ended. it can.

  Further, the special symbol A is forcibly stopped regardless of the result of the internal lottery because the special symbol B is confirmed as a big hit during the change. Therefore, even if a big hit suggesting effect that suggests a big hit related to the lottery of the special symbol B is executed during the special symbol A exclusive effect mode, the display control of the liquid crystal display 42 that mainly notifies the lottery result of the special symbol A The problem does not occur under the situation of.

(Parallel variation example 4)
FIG. 52 is a timing chart showing the variation timing of the special symbol in the parallel variation example 4 of the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment. The "special figure A display device" shown in the first row in FIG. 52 has the same contents as the "special figure A display apparatus" shown in FIG. 49, and the "special figure B display" shown in the third row in FIG. The “device” has the same contents as the “special view B display device” shown in FIG. 49, and the “liquid crystal display” shown in the second row in FIG. 52 is the same as the “liquid crystal display” shown in FIG. Since the contents are shown, the description is omitted. The “movable liquid crystal display” shown in the fourth row in FIG. 52 shows effect display on the movable liquid crystal displays 43 and 44. The rectangular frame shown in the first tier in FIG. 52 is a period in which the special symbol A changes from the left, a period in which the measurement of the variation time of the special symbol A is suspended, and the variation of the special symbol A is restarted. Shows how long it has been running. The rectangular frame shown in the second row in FIG. 51 indicates the execution period of the variation effect of the effect symbol. The rectangular frame shown in the third row in FIG. 52 is a period in which the special symbol B is changing in order from the left, a period during symbol determination, and a small hit game triggered by a small hit of the special symbol B is being executed. The period and the period waiting for customers are shown. The rectangular frame shown in the fourth row in FIG. 42 shows the execution period of the variation effect of the effect symbol, and the shaded region of the rectangular frame shows the non-moving period in which the movable liquid crystal display is retracted. ing. Further, in FIG. 52, the passage of time is shown from left to right.

  As shown in FIG. 52, at time t1, the special symbol B display device 35 is performing variable display of the special symbol related to the small hit, and the special symbol A display device 34 is not performing variable display of the special symbol. . Furthermore, the liquid crystal display 42 does not display the effect such as the variation effect that is executed along with the progress of the game.

  At a time t2 when a predetermined time has elapsed from the time t1, the game ball enters the first starting winning opening 26, so that the main control CPU 72 causes the special symbol variation pre-process (see FIG. 17) to be non-winning (off). It is determined that the stop symbol or the variation pattern is determined (steps S2300 to S2410), and the variation display of the special symbol A is started on the special symbol A display device 34 as shown in FIG.

  Further, the main control CPU72, when determining the stop symbol, the variation pattern, etc., executes the stop timing process of the symbol variation at the time of the out (step S2410). The main control CPU72, the variable display of the special symbol B is stopped before the variable display of the special symbol A, and the internal lottery result of the special symbol A is "out", based on the initial position standby command. Along with the generation (step S2406c (see FIG. 19)), the value of the symbol fluctuation measurement suspension schedule flag of the special symbol A is set to “01H” (step S2406f (see FIG. 19)). Thereby, the main control CPU72 sends the generated initial position standby command to the effect control device 124. Based on the fact that the initial position standby command is transmitted to the effect control device 124, the movable liquid crystal displays 43 and 44 are retracted to the initial positions and become inoperative. In this way, the pachinko machine 1 starts parallel fluctuation (simultaneous rotation) of the special symbol A and the special symbol B.

  At time t3 when a predetermined time has passed from time t2, the value of the variation timer of the special symbol B in the special symbol B display device 35 becomes “0” and the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 27) ends and the special symbol. Processing during stop display (see FIG. 28) is started, and stop of the big hit symbol is designated. The main control CPU72, because the value "01H" is set to the symbol variation measurement interruption schedule flag of the special symbol A, the symbol variation measurement interruption schedule flag of the special symbol A is reset, and the symbol variation measurement interruption of the special symbol A is reset. The value "01H" is set in the flag. As a result, in starting the special symbol stop displaying process for the special symbol B, the measurement of the variation time of the special symbol A is interrupted.

  On the other hand, since no special processing is performed on the liquid crystal display 42, the variable display of the effect symbol corresponding to the special symbol A is continuously executed based on the out-of-time variation pattern determined at time t2.

  In addition, the movable liquid crystal displays 43 and 44 inform the small hit based on the fact that the main control unit 70 sends a command during the symbol stop display including the information of the small hit symbol as the stop symbol to the effect control unit 124. The effect design to be displayed is displayed, for example, in a state of slightly shaking.

  At a time t4 when a predetermined time has elapsed from the time t3 (time when the stop display time of the special symbol B ends (that is, the period during the symbol determination is completed)), a small hit symbol stop command is generated (step in FIG. 28). Based on this, see the special figure B display device 35, the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed. When the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the special figure B display device 35, the small hit game is then started.

  In addition, based on the fact that the small hit symbol stop command is transmitted from the main control device 70 to the effect control device 124, the effect symbol that is displayed in a slightly swaying state on the movable liquid crystal display 43 at time t4. Stops. As a result, on the movable liquid crystal display 43, the effect symbol for notifying the small hit is stopped and displayed. After that, on the movable liquid crystal displays 43 and 44, the effect for the small hit game is displayed with the start of the small hit game.

  At time t5 when a predetermined time has passed from time t4, the variation time of the effect symbol corresponding to the special symbol A determined at time t2 ends. At time t5, the measurement of the variation time of the special symbol A is suspended. Therefore, the symbol stop command is not transmitted from the main control device 70 to the effect control device 124. Therefore, on the liquid crystal display 42, the effect design for notifying the deviation as the result of the internal lottery at the time t2 is displayed in a state of, for example, slightly shaking. On the other hand, the movable liquid crystal displays 43 and 44 continue to produce the small hit game.

  At time t6 when a predetermined time has elapsed from time t5, the small hit game ends. In the parallel variation example shown in FIG. 52, it is assumed that the special symbol working memory sphere number of any of the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 is “0” at the time point after the time t6. For this reason, the main control CPU72 executes the demonstration setting process (step S2500) of the special symbol variation effect shown in FIG. 17, and generates a demonstration effect command. Based on the generated demonstration effect command being transmitted from the main control device 70 to the effect control device 124, a customer waiting effect is executed on the movable liquid crystal displays 43 and 44 at time t6 (step S602 ( (See FIG. 44)).

On the other hand, in the small hitting end process (see FIG. 39), the special symbol variation measurement interruption flag is reset (step S6506). Thereby, the measurement of the variation time of the special symbol A is restarted. In this way, the main control CPU72, the variation display of the special symbol A in the period from the end of the variation display of the special symbol B being executed by the special symbol B display device 35 to the end of the small hit game by the main control CPU72 Stops the execution time measurement of. Here, the timing at which the variable display of the special symbol B ends is the timing at which the state in which the special symbol B is changing is switched to the state in which the symbol is being determined.
On the other hand, since no special process is performed on the liquid crystal display 42, the liquid crystal display 42 continuously displays the slightly swaying state of the effect design started at time t5.

  At time t7 when a predetermined time has passed from time t6, the value of the variation timer of the special symbol A in the special symbol A display device 34 becomes “0” and the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 27) ends and the special symbol. Processing during stop display (see FIG. 28) is started, and stop of the off symbol is designated.

  Further, on the liquid crystal display 42, a symbol stop displaying command including information on a symbol that is out of order as a stop symbol is transmitted from the main control device 70 to the effect control device 124. On the liquid crystal display 42, the effect symbol for notifying the deviation is displayed from time t5 in a state of slightly shaking. Therefore, even if the symbol stop displaying command is transmitted from the main control device 70 to the effect control device 124, the display state of the liquid crystal display 42 does not change. As a result, the liquid crystal display 42 continuously displays a state in which the effect design for notifying the deviation is slightly shaken.

  At this time, the special figure B display device 35 does not perform any special processing and continues the customer waiting state determined at time t6. Also, no special processing is performed on the movable liquid crystal displays 43 and 44, and the customer waiting effect started at time t6 is continued.

  At a time t8 when a predetermined time has elapsed from the time t7 (time when the stop display time of the special symbol A ends (that is, the period during the symbol determination is completed)), a stray symbol stop command is generated (step S4250 in FIG. 28). On the basis of the above), the special symbol A display device 34 stops and displays the off symbol.

  In addition, based on the fact that the deviation symbol stop command is transmitted from the main control device 70 to the effect control device 124, the effect symbol displayed in the liquid crystal display 42 in a slightly swaying state at time t8 is stopped. To do. As a result, on the liquid crystal display 42, the effect symbol for notifying the deviation is stopped and displayed.

  At this time, the special figure B display device 35 does not perform any special processing and continues the customer waiting state determined at time t6. Also, no special processing is performed on the movable liquid crystal displays 43 and 44, and the customer waiting effect started at time t6 is continued.

  As described in the parallel variation example 4, the pachinko machine 1 can be in the forced standby state in which the movable liquid crystal displays 43 and 44 are not movable when displaying the variation of the effect symbol. Accordingly, the pachinko machine 1 can be in a state where the movable liquid crystal displays 43 and 44 are not arranged on the front surface of the liquid crystal display 42. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can ensure the visibility of the variation of the effect symbol displayed on the liquid crystal display 42 in the parallel variation of the special symbol A and the special symbol B.

  Further, the pachinko machine 1 can secure the visibility of the movable liquid crystal displays 43, 44 by setting the forced standby state in which the movable liquid crystal displays 43, 44 are not moved. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can execute the effect for notifying the result of the internal lottery of the special symbol B by the movable liquid crystal displays 43, 44 instead of the liquid crystal display 42. As a result, the pachinko machine 1 can reduce the chances of switching the effect for notifying the result of the internal lottery of the special symbol B from the movable liquid crystal displays 43, 44 to the liquid crystal display 42, so that the liquid crystal display 42 and The control load on the movable liquid crystal displays 43 and 44 can be reduced.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 1 recognizes the player as the state in which the production symbol stopped and displayed on the movable liquid crystal displays 43 and 44 is surely stopped by setting the forced standby state in which the movable liquid crystal displays 43 and 44 are not moved. Can be made. As a result, the pachinko machine 1 can be mistakenly regarded as a non-conformance that the stop design stopped and displayed on the special figure B display device 35 and the stop design stopped and displayed on the movable liquid crystal displays 43 and 44 do not match. Sexuality can be avoided.

[Example of display mode of special symbol and effect symbol]
Next, an example of the display mode of the special symbol and the effect symbol will be described with reference to FIGS. 49 to 52 and FIGS. 53 to 60. Hereinafter, a display mode example of the special symbol and the effect symbol in the parallel variation examples 1 to 4 of the special symbol A and the special symbol B described with reference to FIGS. 49 to 52 will be described.

(Parallel variation example 1)
53 and 54 are diagrams schematically showing an example of a variation mode of special symbols and effect symbols executed in the parallel variation example 1 of the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment. 53 and 54 and FIGS. 55 to 60 described later, the liquid crystal display 42 is schematically shown in the center, and the movable liquid crystal display 43 is schematically shown on the right side of the liquid crystal display 42. On the left side of 42, a special figure A display device 34 and a special figure B display device 35 are schematically shown in order from the left. In FIGS. 53 and 54 and FIGS. 55 to 60 to be described later, the segments that form the special figure A display device 34 and the segments that form the special figure B display device 35 are lit in black, and are turned off. The blinking state is indicated by white, and the blinking state is indicated by shading. In addition, in FIGS. 53 and 54 and FIGS. 55 to 60 described later, in order to facilitate understanding, the sizes of the special figure A display device 34, the special figure B display device 35, the liquid crystal display 42, and the movable liquid crystal display 43 are shown. The size and the arrangement position are shown differently from the size and the arrangement position in FIG. The movable liquid crystal display 44 is not shown in FIGS. 53 and 54 and FIGS. 55 to 60 described later.

  53 (a) to 54 (c), 54 (a) and 54 (b) show the passage of time in this order. 53A illustrates the state at time t1 illustrated in FIG. 49, FIG. 53B illustrates the state at time t2 illustrated in FIG. 49, and FIG. FIG. 54 (a) illustrates the state at time t4 shown in FIG. 49, and FIG. 54 (b) shows the state at a time after a predetermined time has elapsed from time t4 shown in FIG. 49. Is illustrated. The gaming state of the pachinko machine 1 is a normal state, and the special symbol A working memory number and the special symbol B working memory number are both "0".

  As shown in FIG. 53A, at the time t1, in the special figure A display device 34, only the central segment blinks, and, for example, the variable display of the special symbol A related to the big hit is executed. On the other hand, in the special symbol B display device 35, only the central segment is lit, and the state of notifying “out” as the result of the internal lottery by the previous variable indicator is maintained and the variable symbol of the special symbol B is not displayed. . Further, substantially in the center of the display screen of the liquid crystal display 42, in order to correspond to the variable display of the special symbol A being executed by the special symbol A display device 34, it is sequentially rotated in the direction indicated by the downward thick arrow in the figure. Performance symbols 420a, 420b, 420c that move (scroll) and change are displayed. Furthermore, in the lower part of the display screen of the movable liquid crystal display 43, as a disengagement pattern by the effect symbols 430a, 430b, 430c, corresponding to the disengagement symbol of the special symbol B stopped and displayed on the special symbol B display device 35. "5", "3", and "9" are stopped and displayed.

  At time t2 when a predetermined time has elapsed from time t1, it is assumed that a game ball has entered the second starting winning opening 27. The main control CPU 72 provided in the pachinko machine 1 processes as follows in the special symbol B memory update process (see FIG. 12) in the switch input event process (step S204) of the interrupt management process (see FIG. 9). In the special symbol B storage update process, the main control CPU72 confirms that the special symbol B working memory number is "0" and smaller than the maximum value ("4" in this example) (step S40: Yes), and "1" is added to the symbol B working memory number (step S41), a special symbol B jackpot determination random number value is acquired and stored (step S42), and a special symbol B jackpot symbol random value is acquired and stored (step S42). S43), the random number for special symbol B variation is acquired and stored (step S44), and then the processes of steps S45 to S49 are executed.

  Further, the main control CPU72 processes as follows in the special symbol variation preprocessing (step S2000) in the special symbol B game process (step S205a) of the interrupt management process. In the special symbol fluctuation preprocessing (see FIG. 17), the main control CPU72, the special symbol working memory number of the target (special symbol B working memory number) is "1" is greater than "0" (step) S2100: Yes), it is confirmed that the special symbol A is variably displayed and the other symbol stop displaying flag is not 1 (step S2120: No), and the special symbol storage area shift process (step S2200) is executed. The jackpot determination process (step S2300) is executed.

  In the big hit determination process, the main control CPU72 determines that the small hit is won, and sets the value of the target small hit flag (small hit flag related to the special symbol B) to "01H". Subsequently, the main control CPU72 confirms that the value of the target big hit flag is not "01H" (step S2400: No), but the value of the target small hit flag is "01H" (step S2401: Yes). . Subsequently, the main control CPU72 determines a small hitting stop symbol (step S2405), determines a small hitting variation pattern (step S2406), and executes a small hitting other process (step S2407), and a special symbol. The variation start flag and the symbol variation flag are set and a variation start command is generated (step S2411). The fluctuation start command includes information indicating that the target of fluctuation is the special symbol B. Further, the main control CPU72, in the effect control output process (step S212) of the interrupt management process, transmits the generated variation start command to the effect control device 124.

  Thereby, as shown in FIG. 53B, the special symbol B display device 35 is controlled by the main control CPU 72 to start the variable display of the special symbol B in which only the central segment is blinked. Moreover, the effect control CPU 126 instructs the effect display control device 144 to start the variable display of the effect symbol corresponding to the special symbol B, based on the received fluctuation start command. As a result, the movable liquid crystal display 43 is controlled by the effect display control device 144, and the effect symbols 430a, 430b, and 430c that are sequentially rotated (scrolled) in the direction indicated by the downward thick arrow in the drawing are displayed. To start. In this way, the variation effect of the effect symbols 430a, 430b, 430c is based on the variation start command of the variable display of the special symbol B. Therefore, the symbol display of the special symbol B executed by the special symbol B display device 35 triggers the variation effect of the effect symbols 430a, 430b, 430c.

  At time t2, no special processing is performed on the special figure A display device 34 and the liquid crystal display 42, and the special symbol A and the effect symbols 420a, 420b, based on the big hit time variation pattern that has already started at time t1. The variable display of 420c is continuously executed. In this way, the pachinko machine 1 starts the parallel fluctuation (simultaneous rotation) of the special symbol A and the special symbol B.

  At time t3 when a predetermined time has elapsed from time t2, it is assumed that the value of the fluctuation timer of the special symbol A in the special symbol A display device 34 becomes “0”. The main control CPU72 processes as follows in the special symbol changing process (step S3900 (see FIG. 15)) in the special symbol A game process (step S205b) of the interrupt management process. In the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 27), the main control CPU72 confirms that the value of the special symbol variation measurement interruption flag of the special symbol A that is the control target is not "01H" (step S3100: No), and varies. The value of the timer is subtracted (decremented by the interrupt period) (step S3200), and the value of the fluctuation timer after subtraction is confirmed to be 0 or less (step S3300: Yes), and the other special symbol is a special symbol. It is confirmed that the value of the special symbol fluctuation measurement suspension schedule flag of B is not "01H" (step S3400: No), the symbol stop displaying flag relating to the special symbol A is set, and a symbol stop displaying command is generated ( Step S3700). The symbol stop displaying command includes information indicating that the target symbol being stopped and displayed is the special symbol A. Further, the main control CPU72, in the effect control output process (step S212) of the interrupt management process, transmits the generated symbol stop display command to the effect control device 124.

  As a result, as shown in FIG. 53 (c), the special figure A display device 34 is controlled by the main control CPU 72 to turn on the two segments on the upper side and the right side, and in the display mode of the 8-round jackpot pattern 2, the special mode is displayed. Display of symbol A is started. Moreover, the effect control CPU 126 instructs the effect display control device 144 to start displaying the effect symbols 420a, 420b, 420c in a mode in which the symbol is being determined, based on the received symbol stop displaying command. As a result, the liquid crystal display 42 is controlled by the effect display control device 144, and the effect patterns 420a and 420b slightly swinging in the manner of "7", "7", and "7" corresponding to the 8-round jackpot pattern 2. The display of 420c is started.

  At time t3, no special processing is performed on the special figure B display device 35 and the movable liquid crystal display 43, and the special symbol B and the effect symbols 420a, 420b, 420c are based on the small hit time variation pattern determined at time t2. The variable display of is continuously executed.

  At time t4 when a predetermined time has elapsed from time t3, it is assumed that the stop display time of the special symbol A ends. The main control CPU72 processes as follows in the special symbol stop displaying process (step S4900 (see FIG. 15)) in the special symbol A game process (step S205b) of the interrupt management process. In the special symbol stop display process (see FIG. 28), the main control CPU72 subtracts the value of the stop symbol display timer (decrement only for the interrupt period), the value of the stop symbol display timer after subtraction is "0" or less. Therefore, it is confirmed that the period during the stop display of the special symbol A (during symbol determination) has ended (step S4200: Yes), and a symbol stop command and a stop display time end command are generated (step S4250). The symbol stop command and the stop display time end command include information on the special symbol A as a symbol to be stopped.

  Subsequently, the main control CPU72 confirms that the value "01H" is set in the big hit flag relating to the special symbol A to be controlled (step S4300: Yes), and generates and sets a special stop designation command (step S4310). ). The special symbol stop displaying process being executed at the time of time t4 is a process in the special symbol A game process. Therefore, the main control CPU72 includes the information of the special symbol B corresponding to the other special symbol in the special stop designation command. Next, the main control CPU72 sets the jump destination to "variable winning device management processing at the time of big hit" (step S4330), and sets "start big job (big hit game)" as an internal state flag on control (step S4400). ), A continuous operation number command is generated and set as a value representing “8 rounds” (step S4500). Further, the main control CPU72, in the effect control output process (step S212) of the interrupt management process, transmits the various commands generated in the special symbol stop display process to the effect control device 124.

  As a result, as shown in FIG. 54 (a), the special symbol A display device 34 stops and displays the special symbol A in the display mode of the 8-round big hit symbol 2. Based on the received symbol stop command and stop display time end command, the effect control CPU 126 also instructs the effect display control device 144 to stop and display the effect symbols 420a, 420b, and 420c whose symbols are being determined. Thereby, the liquid crystal display 42 is controlled by the effect display control device 144, and the effect symbols 420a, 420b, and 420c are stopped and displayed in the display modes of "7", "7", and "7" corresponding to the 8-round big hit symbol 2. To do. Thereby, it is notified that the variable display by the special symbol A that has been executed in the special symbol A display device 34 has been won in the big hit.

  Further, the main control CPU72 controls the special figure B display device 35 based on the generation of the special stop designation command including the information of the special symbol B. As a result, as shown in FIG. 54 (a), the special symbol B display device 35 turns on the central segment, and displays the special symbol B in a mode corresponding to “out” unrelated to the small hit in the internal lottery result. Stop display.

  Based on the fact that the received special stop designation command includes the information of the special symbol B as the symbol to be stopped, the effect control CPU 126, based on the movable liquid crystal display 43, the effect symbols 430a and 430b that are being variably displayed. , 430c are stopped and displayed to the effect display control device 144. The effect display control device 144 is directed to one of the liquid crystal display device 42 and the movable liquid crystal display devices 43 and 44, which interlocks with the special figure B display device 35 that displays the special symbol B included in the special stop designating command, and the effect control CPU 126. Outputs the special stop specification command sent from. As a result, as shown in FIG. 54A, the movable liquid crystal display 43 is controlled by the effect display control device 144, and corresponds to, for example, “out” in the lower part of the display screen as a display mode unrelated to the internal lottery. The effect symbols 430a, 430b, 430c are displayed in the display modes of "3" "4" "2". Thus, the main control CPU72, when the special symbol A of the display mode showing the result of the lottery is stopped and displayed on the special symbol A display device 34, the special stop designation command is displayed on the movable liquid crystal display via the effect display control device 144. The output is provided to the devices 43 and 44.

  When receiving the command including the information of the internal state flag set to "start big role (during big hit game)", the effect control CPU 126 selects the content of the big effect effect, and displays the selected big effect effect pattern on the effect display control device. 144 (display control CPU 146) is instructed. As a result, as shown in FIG. 54 (b), on the respective display screens of the liquid crystal display 42, the movable liquid crystal display 43, and the movable liquid crystal display 44 (not shown in FIG. 54 (b)), a big hit game effect is produced. The image is displayed. In FIG. 54 (b), the liquid crystal display 42, the movable liquid crystal display 43, and the movable liquid crystal display 44 indicate that the image of the effect during the big hit game is displayed. And the movable liquid crystal display 43.

  In this way, the pachinko machine 1 has a mismatch between the stop design on the special figure A display device 34 and the stop design on the liquid crystal display 42, and the stop design on the special figure B display device 35 and the movable liquid crystal display 43. It is possible to prevent the disagreement with the stop pattern.

(Parallel variation example 2)
Next, a parallel variation example 2 of the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described using FIG. 55 with reference to FIGS. 50 and 53. FIG. 55 is a diagram schematically showing an example of a variation mode of special symbols and effect symbols executed in the parallel variation example 2 of the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment. 55 (a) to 55 (c) show the passage of time in this order. Further, FIG. 55 (a) illustrates the state at time t4 shown in FIG. 50, FIG. 55 (b) illustrates the state at time t5 shown in FIG. 50, and FIG. The state at a time after a predetermined time has elapsed from time t5 is illustrated. The gaming state of the pachinko machine 1 is a normal state, and the special symbol A working memory number and the special symbol B working memory number are both "0".

  In the parallel variation example 2, the pachinko machine 1 operates in the same manner as the parallel variation example 1 from time t1 to time t3 shown in FIG. Therefore, at the time t3 in the parallel variation example 2, as shown in FIG. 53C, the special symbol A display device 34 displays the special symbol A corresponding to the 8-round big hit symbol 2 and the special symbol B display. On the device 35, the special symbol B according to the variable display mode is displayed. Further, on the display screen of the liquid crystal display 42, the effect symbols 420a, 420b, 420c that are slightly swaying in the manner of "7", "7", and "7" corresponding to the 8-round big hit symbol 2 are displayed, and the movable liquid crystal. On the display screen of the display unit 43, effect symbols 430a, 430b, 430c that sequentially rotate (scroll) in the direction indicated by the downward thick arrow in the figure to change are displayed.

  At time t4 when a predetermined time has elapsed from time t3, it is assumed that the value of the fluctuation timer of the special symbol B in the special symbol B display device 35 becomes “0”. The main control CPU72 processes as follows in the special symbol changing process (step S3000 (see FIG. 14)) in the special symbol B game process (step S205a) of the interrupt management process. In the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 27), the main control CPU72 confirms that the value of the special symbol variation measurement interruption flag of the special symbol A that is the control target is not "01H" (step S3100: No), and varies. The value of the timer is subtracted (decremented by the interrupt period) (step S3200), and the value of the fluctuation timer after subtraction is confirmed to be 0 or less (step S3300: Yes), and the other special symbol is a special symbol. It is confirmed that the value of the special symbol variation measurement suspension flag of B is not "01H" (step S3400: No), the symbol stop displaying flag relating to the special symbol B is set, and a symbol stop displaying command is generated ( Step S3700). The symbol stop displaying command includes information indicating that the target symbol being stopped and displayed is the special symbol B. Further, the main control CPU72, in the effect control output process (step S212) of the interrupt management process, transmits the generated symbol stop display command to the effect control device 124.

  Thereby, as shown in FIG. 55 (a), the special symbol B display device 35 is controlled by the main control CPU 72 to turn on the upper and lower segments and display the special symbol B in the display mode of the small hit symbol. To start. Moreover, the effect control CPU 126 instructs the effect display control device 144 to start displaying the effect symbols 430a, 430b, 430c in a manner in which the symbol is being determined, based on the received symbol stop displaying command. As a result, the movable liquid crystal display 43 is controlled by the effect display control device 144, and the effect symbols 430a, 430b, 430c are slightly swaying in the manner of "1", "3", "5" corresponding to the small hit symbol. To start displaying.

  At time t4, special processing is not performed on the special figure A display device 34 and the liquid crystal display 42, and the special figure A display device 34 and the liquid crystal display 42 are in the display mode during the symbol determination started at time t3. To continue. In this way, the pachinko machine 1 may start the display of the symbol being confirmed for the other special symbol during a short period (for example, 500 milliseconds) during which the symbol is being confirmed for the one special symbol.

  At time t5 when a predetermined time has elapsed from time t4, it is assumed that the stop display time of the special symbol A ends. The operation of the pachinko machine 1 at time t5 is almost the same as that at time t4 (see FIGS. 49 and 54 (a)) in the parallel variation example 1 except for the control of the special figure B display device 35 and the movable liquid crystal display 43. Therefore, different points will be described.

  In the special symbol stop displaying process (see FIG. 28), the main control CPU 72 generates and sets a symbol stop command and a stop display time end command including information of the special symbol A as a symbol to be stopped (step S4250). Subsequently, the main control CPU72 generates and sets a special stop designation command including the information of the special symbol B corresponding to the other special symbol (step S4310). In the effect control output process (step S212) of the interrupt management process, the main control CPU72 sends the various commands generated in the special symbol stop display process to the effect control device 124.

  Thereby, as shown in FIG. 55 (b), the special symbol A display device 34 continues to display the special symbol A in the display mode of the 8-round big hit symbol 1. Further, the liquid crystal display 42 is controlled by the effect display control device 144 to stop and display the effect symbols 420a, 420b, 420c in the display modes of "7", "7", and "7" corresponding to the 8-round big hit symbol 2. . Thereby, it is notified that the variable display by the special symbol A that has been executed in the special symbol A display device 34 has been won in the big hit.

  Further, the main control CPU72 controls the special figure B display device 35 based on the generation of the special stop designation command including the information of the special symbol B. Thereby, as shown in FIG. 55 (b), the special figure B display device 35 switches the display mode of the small hit symbol to a mode corresponding to “out” unrelated to the small hit of the internal lottery result and specially. The symbol B is stopped and displayed.

  Further, the effect display control device 144 is directed to one of the liquid crystal display 42 and the movable liquid crystal displays 43, 44 that is interlocked with the special figure B display device 35 that displays the special symbol B included in the special stop designation command. The special stop designation command transmitted from the control CPU 126 is output. As a result, the movable liquid crystal display 43 is controlled by the effect display control device 144, and in the lower part of the display screen, the effect is slightly swaying in the form of "1" "3" "5" corresponding to the small hit symbol. Rather than displaying the symbols 430a, 430b, 430c in the state of "1", "3", and "5" in a stopped manner, for example, "4", "5", and "2" that are irrelevant to the internal lottery By switching to the mode, the effect symbols 430a, 430b, 430c are stopped and displayed.

  After the special symbol A display device 34 and the special symbol B display device 35 stop-display the special symbols, and the liquid crystal display device 42 and the movable liquid crystal display device 43 stop-display the effect symbols, respectively, as shown in FIG. 55 (c). On the respective display screens of the liquid crystal display 42, the movable liquid crystal display 43, and the movable liquid crystal display 44 (not shown in FIG. 54 (b)), an image of the big hit game effect is displayed.

  In this way, the pachinko machine 1 has a mismatch between the stop design on the special figure A display device 34 and the stop design on the liquid crystal display 42, and the stop design on the special figure B display device 35 and the movable liquid crystal display 43. It is possible to prevent the disagreement with the stop pattern. In addition, the pachinko machine 1, by using the special stop designation command, even if the display of the special symbol related to the small hit is being confirmed while the symbol is being confirmed for a short period while the special symbol is being confirmed. The stop display mode of the other special symbol and the stop display mode of the effect symbol corresponding to the other special symbol can be matched. In this way, the pachinko machine 1 can prevent incompatibility between the special figure display device and the liquid crystal display or the movable liquid crystal display by a simple method using the special stop designation command.

(Parallel variation example 3)
Next, a parallel variation example 3 of the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 51 and FIGS. 56 and 57. 56 and 57 are diagrams schematically showing an example of a variation mode of the special symbol and the effect symbol executed in the parallel variation example 3 of the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment. 56 (a) to 55 (c), 57 (a) and 57 (b) show the passage of time in this order. Further, FIG. 56 (a) illustrates the state at time t1 shown in FIG. 51, FIG. 56 (b) illustrates the state at time t2 shown in FIG. 51, and FIG. 56 (c) shows in FIG. FIG. 57 (a) illustrates the state at time t4 shown in FIG. 51, and FIG. 57 (b) shows the state at a time after a predetermined time has elapsed from time t4 shown in FIG. 51. Is illustrated. The gaming state of the pachinko machine 1 is a normal state, and the special symbol A working memory number and the special symbol B working memory number are both "0".

  As shown in FIG. 56 (a), at time t1, in the special figure B display device 35, only the central segment blinks, and, for example, the variable display of the special symbol B related to the big hit is executed. On the other hand, in the special symbol A display device 34, only the central segment is lit, and the state of notifying “out” as the result of the internal lottery by the previous variable display is maintained and the variable display of the special symbol A is not executed. . Further, in the lower part of the display screen of the movable liquid crystal display 43, in order to correspond to the variable display of the special symbol B executed by the special symbol B display device 35, it is sequentially rotated in the direction indicated by the downward thick arrow in the figure. Performance symbols 430a, 430b, 430c that move (scroll) and change are displayed. Further, in the center of the display screen of the liquid crystal display 42, as a dislocation symbol by the effect symbols 420a, 420b, 420c, corresponding to the disparity symbol of the special symbol A stopped and displayed on the special symbol A display device 34, "5", "1" and "3" are stopped and displayed.

  It is assumed that a game ball has entered the first start winning opening 26 at a time t2 when a predetermined time has elapsed from the time t1. The main control CPU 72 provided in the pachinko machine 1 processes as follows in the special symbol A storage update process (see FIG. 11) in the switch input event process (step S204) of the interrupt management process (see FIG. 9). In the special symbol A storage update process, the main control CPU72 confirms that the special symbol A working memory number is "0" and smaller than the maximum value ("4" in this example) (step S30: Yes), "1" is added to the number of symbols A working memory (step S31), a special symbol A jackpot determination random number value is acquired and stored (step S32), and a special symbol A jackpot symbol random value is acquired and stored (step S31). S33), the random number for special symbol A variation is acquired and stored (step S34), and then the processes of steps S35 to S39 are executed.

  In addition, the main control CPU72 processes as follows in the special symbol variation preprocessing (step S2900) in the special symbol A game process (step S205b) of the interrupt management process. In the special symbol fluctuation preprocessing (see FIG. 17), the main control CPU72, the special symbol working memory number of the target (special symbol A working memory number) is "1" is greater than "0" (step) S2100: Yes), it is confirmed that the special symbol B is variably displayed and the other symbol stop displaying flag is not 1 (step S2120: No), and the special symbol storage area shift process (step S2200) is executed. The jackpot determination process (step S2300) is executed.

  The main control CPU72, in the big hit determination process, it is determined that it is non-win (miss), the target big hit flag (big hit flag related to special symbol B) and the target small hit flag (small hit flag related to special symbol B) The value of is set (reset) to "00H". Subsequently, the main control CPU72 confirms that the value of the target big hit flag is not "01H" (step S2400: No) and the value of the target small hit flag is not "01H" (step S2401: No). Subsequently, the main control CPU72 determines a stop time stop symbol (step S2408), determines a stop time variation pattern (step S2409), and executes a stop time symbol variation stop timing determination process (step S2410).

  In the stop timing determination process of the symbol variation at the time of deviation (FIG. 19), the main control CPU72, the current process is the stop timing determination process of the symbol variation at the time of the special symbol A game process, so the target special symbol is a special symbol. It is determined to be A (step S2406a: Yes). Subsequently, the main control CPU72 compares the time of the symbol variation of the special symbol A based on the out-of-shift variation pattern determined in step S2409, with the remaining time of the symbol variation of the special symbol B which is currently being executed, and the special symbol B of It is determined that the symbol variation stops before the symbol variation of the special symbol A (step S2406b: Yes), and an initial position standby command for the movable liquid crystal display is generated and set (step S2406c). Subsequently, the main control CPU72 confirms that the value of the big hit flag relating to the special symbol B is "01H" because the special symbol B currently being executed is a variable display relating to the big symbol (Yes in step S2406d), The special effect variation pattern command is generated and set (step S2406e), the special symbol variation preprocessing is executed again by returning to the special symbol variation preprocessing.

  In the special symbol fluctuation start process, the main control CPU72 sets the fluctuation start flag of the special symbol and the symbol fluctuation flag and generates a fluctuation start command (step S2411). The fluctuation start command includes information indicating that the target of fluctuation is the special symbol A. Further, the main control CPU72, in the effect control output process (step S212) of the interrupt management process, transmits the generated initial position standby command, the special effect change pattern command, the change start command, and the like to the effect control device 124.

  At time t2, no special processing is performed on the special symbol B display device 35, and the variable display of the special symbol A is continuously executed based on the big hit time variation pattern that has already started at time t1.

  On the other hand, the effect control CPU 126 outputs a control signal for making the movable liquid crystal display 43 stand by at the initial position to the driving IC of the movable liquid crystal display 43 based on the received initial position standby command, and the movable liquid crystal A control signal for making the movable liquid crystal display 44 stand by at the initial position is output to the driving IC of the display 44. The driving IC of the movable liquid crystal display 43 drives the movable body solenoid 58 to move the movable liquid crystal display 43. Further, the driving IC of the movable liquid crystal display 44 drives the movable body solenoid 59 to move the movable liquid crystal display 44. Thereby, as shown in FIG. 56B, the movable liquid crystal display 43 is provided on the right side of the liquid crystal display 42 so as not to overlap with the liquid crystal display 42 by being retracted from the front surface of the liquid crystal display 42. It is forcibly moved to the initial position and temporarily becomes inoperable. Similarly, the movable liquid crystal display 44 (not shown in FIGS. 56 and 57) is provided on the left side of the liquid crystal display 42 so as to be retracted from the front surface of the liquid crystal display 42 and not overlap with the liquid crystal display 42. It is forcibly moved to the initial position and temporarily becomes inoperable. This ensures the visibility of the display screen of the liquid crystal display 42. Further, the movable liquid crystal displays 43 and 44 are arranged on both sides of the liquid crystal display 42 in a stopped state, thereby ensuring the visibility of the display screen. Thus, when the variable display of the special symbol B is completed before the variable display of the special symbol A by the special symbol A display device 34, the movable liquid crystal displays 43 and 44 are kept in the initial position.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 56 (b), the special symbol A display device 34 is controlled by the main control CPU 72 to start the variable display of the special symbol A which blinks only the central segment. Further, the effect control CPU 126 instructs the effect display control device 144 to start the variable display of the effect symbol corresponding to the special symbol A, based on the received fluctuation start command. As a result, the liquid crystal display 42 is controlled by the effect display control device 144, and the effect symbols 420a, 420b, and 420c that are sequentially rotated (scrolled) in the direction indicated by the downward thick arrow in the figure to be changed are displayed. Start. In this way, the variation effect of the effect symbols 420a, 420b, 420c is based on the variation start command of the variable display of the special symbol A. Therefore, the symbol display of the special symbol A executed by the special symbol A display device 34 is a trigger for the variable effect of the effect symbols 420a, 420b, 420c.

Further, the effect control CPU 126 notifies the effect display control device 144 that the effect symbols 420a, 420b, 420c being executed on the movable liquid crystal display 43 notify the big hit based on the received special effect change pattern command. Instruct to start suggestive jackpot suggestion production. As a result, the liquid crystal display 42 is controlled by the effect display control device 144 to start the big hit suggesting effect above the effect symbols 420a, 420b, 420c which are being displayed in a variable manner. In FIG. 56 (b), as a big hit suggestion effect, an image showing the characters "Attention to the right screen! As a result, the pachinko machine 1 gives the player not the fluctuation effect on the liquid crystal display 42 which is the main display during the progress of the game, but the fluctuation effect on the movable liquid crystal display 43 which is the sub-display during the progress of the game. It can be noticed.
In this way, the pachinko machine 1 starts the parallel fluctuation (simultaneous rotation) of the special symbol A and the special symbol B.

  At time t3 when a predetermined time has elapsed from time t2, it is assumed that the value of the fluctuation timer of the special symbol B in the special symbol B display device 35 becomes “0”. The main control CPU72 processes as follows in the special symbol changing process (step S3000 (see FIG. 14)) in the special symbol B game process (step S205a) of the interrupt management process. In the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 27), the main control CPU72 confirms that the value of the special symbol variation measurement interruption flag of the control target special symbol B is not "01H" (step S3100: No), and the variation timer. The value of is subtracted (decrement only for the interrupt period) (step S3200), and the value of the fluctuation timer after subtraction is confirmed to be 0 or less (step S3300: Yes), and the other special symbol is the special symbol A. It is confirmed that the value of the special symbol fluctuation measurement suspension scheduled flag is not "01H" (step S3400: No), the symbol stop displaying flag relating to the special symbol B is set, and a symbol stop displaying command is generated (step S3700). The symbol stop displaying command includes information indicating that the target symbol being stopped and displayed is the special symbol B. Further, the main control CPU72, in the effect control output process (step S212) of the interrupt management process, transmits the generated symbol stop display command to the effect control device 124.

  As a result, as shown in FIG. 56 (c), the special figure B display device 35 is controlled by the main control CPU 72 to turn on the two segments on the upper side and the right side, and in the display mode of the 8 round jackpot pattern 2, the special mode is displayed. Display of symbol B is started. Moreover, the effect control CPU 126 instructs the effect display control device 144 to start displaying the effect symbols 430a, 430b, 430c in a manner in which the symbol is being determined, based on the received symbol stop displaying command. As a result, the movable liquid crystal display 43 is controlled by the effect display control device 144, and the effect symbols 430a and 430b slightly swinging in the manner of "7", "7", and "7" corresponding to the 8-round big hit symbol 2. , 430c is started to be displayed.

  At time t3, no special processing is performed on the special symbol A display device 34 and the liquid crystal display 42, and the special symbol A display device 34 continues the variable display of the special symbol A started at time t2. On the other hand, the liquid crystal display 42 continues the variation effect of the effect symbols 420a, 420b, 420c started at time t2 and the big hit suggestion effect.

  At time t4 when a predetermined time has elapsed from time t3, it is assumed that the stop display time of the special symbol B ends. The main control CPU72 processes as follows in the special symbol stop displaying process (step S4000 (see FIG. 14)) in the special symbol B game process (step S205a) of the interrupt management process. In the special symbol stop display process (see FIG. 28), the main control CPU72 subtracts the value of the stop symbol display timer (decrement only for the interrupt period), the value of the stop symbol display timer after subtraction is "0" or less. Therefore, it is confirmed that the period during the stop display of the special symbol B (during symbol determination) has ended (step S4200: Yes), and a symbol stop command and a stop display time end command are generated (step S4250). The symbol stop command and the stop display time end command include information on the special symbol B as a symbol to be stopped.

  Subsequently, the main control CPU72 confirms that the value of the big hit flag relating to the special symbol B is "01H" (step S4300: Yes), and generates and sets a special stop designation command (step S4310). The special symbol stop displaying process being executed at the time of time t4 is a process in the special symbol B game process. Therefore, the main control CPU72 includes the information of the special symbol A corresponding to the other special symbol in the special stop designation command. Next, the main control CPU72 sets the jump destination to "variable winning device management processing at the time of big hit" (step S4330), and sets "start big job (big hit game)" as an internal state flag on control (step S4400). ), A continuous operation number command is generated and set as a value representing “8 rounds” (step S4500). Further, in the effect control output process (step S212) of the interrupt management process, the main control CPU72 transmits various commands such as the special stop designation command and the symbol stop command generated in the special symbol stop displaying process to the effect control device 124. To do.

  Thereby, as shown in FIG. 57A, the special symbol B display device 35 stops and displays the special symbol B in the display mode of the 8-round big hit symbol 2. Based on the received symbol stop command and stop display time end command, the effect control CPU 126 also instructs the effect display control device 144 to stop and display the effect symbols 430a, 430b, 430c for which symbols are being determined. Thereby, the movable liquid crystal display 43 is controlled by the effect display control device 144 to stop the effect symbols 430a, 430b, 430c in the display mode of "7" "7" "7" corresponding to the 8-round big hit symbol 2. indicate. As a result, it is notified that the variable display by the special symbol B which has been executed on the special symbol B display device 35 has been won as a big hit. In this way, the movable liquid crystal displays 43, 44 change production of the production symbols 430a, 430b, 430c prior to the variation production (one example of the first variation production) of the production designs 420a, 420b, 420c by the liquid crystal display 42. When ending (an example of the second variation effect), the process waits at the initial position.

  Further, the main control CPU72 controls the special figure A display device 34 based on the generation of the special stop designation command including the information of the special symbol A. As a result, as shown in FIG. 57 (a), the special symbol A display device 34 lights the central segment, and stops the special symbol A in a mode corresponding to "off" irrelevant to the off of the internal lottery result. indicate.

  Based on the fact that the received special stop designation command includes the information of the special symbol A as the symbol to be stopped, the effect control CPU 126, the effect symbols 420a, 420b, which are being variably displayed on the liquid crystal display 42, The effect display control device 144 is instructed to stop and display 420c and end the jackpot suggestion effect. Therefore, the effect display control device 144, in the liquid crystal display device 42 and the movable liquid crystal display devices 43, 44, the one that interlocks with the special symbol A display device 34 that displays the special symbol A included in the special stop designation command, The special stop designation command transmitted from the effect control CPU 126 is output. As a result, as shown in FIG. 57 (a), the liquid crystal display 42 is controlled by the effect display control device 144, and corresponds to, for example, “out” in the center of the display screen that is unrelated to the internal lottery. The effect symbols 420a, 420b, and 420c are displayed in the display modes of "6", "2", and "4". Further, the liquid crystal display 42 is controlled by the effect display control device 144, and the character image of “Attention to the right screen! Even if a deviation pattern is displayed in a conspicuous manner in the center of the liquid crystal display 42, the big hit pattern is displayed on the movable liquid crystal display 43 which has been paying attention to the player by the big hit suggestion effect, so the pachinko machine 1 is It is possible to prevent the interest from decreasing.

  When receiving the command including the information of the internal state flag set to "start big role (during big hit game)", the effect control CPU 126 selects the content of the big effect effect, and displays the selected big effect effect pattern on the effect display control device. 144 (display control CPU 146) is instructed. As a result, as shown in FIG. 57 (b), on the respective display screens of the liquid crystal display 42, the movable liquid crystal display 43 and the movable liquid crystal display 44 (not shown in FIG. 57 (b)), a big hit in-game effect is produced. The image is displayed. In FIG. 57B, the liquid crystal display 42, the movable liquid crystal display 43, and the movable liquid crystal display 44 indicate that the image of the effect during the big hit game is displayed. And the movable liquid crystal display 43.

  In this way, the pachinko machine 1, even if forcibly ending the variable display of the special symbol A, the stop symbol on the special symbol A display device 34 does not match the stop symbol on the liquid crystal display 42. It can be prevented. Further, the special symbol A is forcibly stopped regardless of the result of the internal lottery because the special symbol B is confirmed as a big hit during the change. Therefore, even if the special symbol B suggesting effect that suggests a big hit related to the lottery of the special symbol B is executed during the special symbol A exclusive effect mode, the liquid crystal display 42 that mainly notifies the lottery result of the special symbol A No problem occurs under the condition of display control.

(Parallel variation example 4)
Next, a parallel variation example 4 of the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 52 and FIGS. 58 to 60. 58 to 60 are diagrams schematically illustrating an example of a variation mode of the special symbol and the effect symbol executed in the parallel variation example 4 of the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment. 58 (a) to 58 (c), FIGS. 59 (a) to 59 (c), 60 (a) and 60 (b) show the passage of time in this order. Further, FIG. 58 (a) illustrates the state at time t1 shown in FIG. 52, FIG. 58 (b) illustrates the state at time t2 shown in FIG. 52, and FIG. 58 (c) shows in FIG. The state at time t3 is illustrated. Further, FIG. 59 (a) illustrates the state at time t4 shown in FIG. 52, FIG. 59 (b) illustrates the state at time t5 shown in FIG. 52, and FIG. 59 (c) shows in FIG. The state at time t6 is illustrated. Further, FIG. 60A illustrates the state at time t7 shown in FIG. 52, and FIG. 60B illustrates the state at the time after a predetermined time has elapsed from time t8 shown in FIG. Further, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 1 is a normal state, and the special symbol A working memory number and the special symbol B working memory number are both "0".

  As shown in FIG. 58 (a), at the time t1, in the special figure B display device 35, only the central segment blinks, and, for example, the variable display of the special symbol B relating to the small hit is executed. On the other hand, in the special symbol A display device 34, only the central segment is lit, and the state of notifying “out” as the result of the internal lottery by the previous variable display is maintained and the variable display of the special symbol A is not executed. . Further, in the lower part of the display screen of the movable liquid crystal display 43, in order to correspond to the variable display of the special symbol B executed by the special symbol B display device 35, it is sequentially rotated in the direction shown by the downward thick arrow in the figure. Performance symbols 430a, 430b, 430c that move (scroll) and change are displayed. Further, in the center of the display screen of the liquid crystal display 42, as a dislocation symbol by the effect symbols 420a, 420b, 420c, corresponding to the disparity symbol of the special symbol A stopped and displayed on the special symbol A display device 34, "5", "1" and "3" are stopped and displayed.

  It is assumed that a game ball has entered the first start winning opening 26 at a time t2 when a predetermined time has elapsed from the time t1. The main control CPU 72 provided in the pachinko machine 1 processes as follows in the special symbol A storage update process (see FIG. 11) in the switch input event process (step S204) of the interrupt management process (see FIG. 9). In the special symbol A storage update process, the main control CPU72 confirms that the special symbol A working memory number is "0" and smaller than the maximum value ("4" in this example) (step S30: Yes), "1" is added to the number of symbols A working memory (step S31), a special symbol A jackpot determination random number value is acquired and stored (step S32), and a special symbol A jackpot symbol random value is acquired and stored (step S31). S33), the random number for special symbol A variation is acquired and stored (step S34), and then the processes of steps S35 to S39 are executed.

  In addition, the main control CPU72 processes as follows in the special symbol variation preprocessing (step S2900) in the special symbol A game process (step S205b) of the interrupt management process. In the special symbol fluctuation preprocessing (see FIG. 17), the main control CPU72, the special symbol working memory number of the target (special symbol A working memory number) is "1" is greater than "0" (step) S2100: Yes), it is confirmed that the special symbol B is variably displayed and the other symbol stop displaying flag is not 1 (step S2120: No), and the special symbol storage area shift process (step S2200) is executed. The jackpot determination process (step S2300) is executed.

  The main control CPU72, in the big hit determination process, it is determined that it is non-win (miss), the target big hit flag (big hit flag related to special symbol B) and the target small hit flag (small hit flag related to special symbol B) The value of is set (reset) to "00H". Subsequently, the main control CPU72 confirms that the value of the target big hit flag is not "01H" (step S2400: No) and the value of the target small hit flag is not "01H" (step S2401: No). Subsequently, the main control CPU72 determines a stop time stop symbol (step S2408), determines a stop time variation pattern (step S2409), and executes a stop time symbol variation stop timing determination process (step S2410).

  In the stop timing determination process of the symbol variation at the time of deviation (FIG. 19), the main control CPU72, the current process is the stop timing determination process of the symbol variation at the time of the special symbol A game process, so the target special symbol is a special symbol. It is determined to be A (step S2406a: Yes). Subsequently, the main control CPU72 compares the time of the symbol variation of the special symbol A based on the out-of-shift variation pattern determined in step S2409, with the remaining time of the symbol variation of the special symbol B which is currently being executed, and the special symbol B of It is determined that the symbol variation stops before the symbol variation of the special symbol A (step S2406b: Yes), and an initial position standby command for the movable liquid crystal display is generated and set (step S2406c). Subsequently, the main control CPU72 confirms that the value of the big hit flag relating to the special symbol B is "00H" and not "01H" because the special symbol B currently being executed is a variable display relating to the small hit. No of step S2406d), the symbol fluctuation measurement suspension schedule flag is set (step S2406f), and the special symbol fluctuation start process (step S2411) is executed by returning to the special symbol fluctuation preprocessing.

  In the special symbol fluctuation start process, the main control CPU72 sets the fluctuation start flag of the special symbol and the symbol fluctuation flag and generates a fluctuation start command (step S2411). The fluctuation start command includes information indicating that the target of fluctuation is the special symbol A. Further, the main control CPU72, in the effect control output process (step S212) of the interrupt management process, transmits the generated initial position standby command and variation start command to the effect control device 124.

  At time t2, no special processing is performed on the special symbol B display device 35, and the variable display of the special symbol A is continuously executed based on the big hit time variation pattern that has already started at time t1.

  On the other hand, the effect control CPU 126 outputs a control signal for making the movable liquid crystal display 43 stand by at the initial position to the driving IC of the movable liquid crystal display 43 based on the received initial position standby command, and the movable liquid crystal A control signal for making the movable liquid crystal display 44 stand by at the initial position is output to the driving IC of the display 44. As a result, the movable liquid crystal displays 43 and 44 are controlled by the driving IC as in the parallel variation example 3. As a result, as shown in FIG. 58B, the movable liquid crystal display 43 is provided on the right side of the liquid crystal display 42 so as not to overlap the liquid crystal display 42 by being retracted from the front surface of the liquid crystal display 42. It is forcibly moved to the initial position and temporarily becomes inoperable. Similarly, the movable liquid crystal display 44 (not shown in FIGS. 58 to 60) is provided on the left side of the liquid crystal display 42 so as to be retracted from the front surface of the liquid crystal display 42 and not overlap with the liquid crystal display 42. It is forcibly moved to the initial position and temporarily becomes inoperable. This ensures the visibility of the display screens of the liquid crystal display 42 and the movable liquid crystal displays 43 and 44. Thus, when the variable display of the special symbol B is completed before the variable display of the special symbol A by the special symbol A display device 34, the movable liquid crystal displays 43, 44 are put on standby at the initial position.

Further, as shown in FIG. 58 (b), the special symbol A display device 34 is controlled by the main control CPU 72 to start the variable display of the special symbol A in which only the central segment is blinked. Further, the effect control CPU 126 instructs the effect display control device 144 to start the variable display of the effect symbol corresponding to the special symbol A, based on the received fluctuation start command. As a result, the liquid crystal display 42 is controlled by the effect display control device 144, and the effect symbols 420a, 420b, and 420c that are sequentially rotated (scrolled) in the direction indicated by the downward thick arrow in the figure to be changed are displayed. Start.
In this way, the pachinko machine 1 starts the parallel fluctuation (simultaneous rotation) of the special symbol A and the special symbol B.

  At time t3 when a predetermined time has elapsed from time t2, it is assumed that the value of the fluctuation timer of the special symbol B in the special symbol B display device 35 becomes “0”. The main control CPU72 processes as follows in the special symbol changing process (step S3000 (see FIG. 14)) in the special symbol B game process (step S205a) of the interrupt management process. In the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 27), the main control CPU72 confirms that the value of the special symbol variation measurement interruption flag of the control target special symbol B is not "01H" (step S3100: No), and the variation timer. Is subtracted (decremented by the interrupt period) (step S3200), and it is confirmed that the value of the fluctuation timer after subtraction is 0 or less (step S3300: Yes).

  Subsequently, the main control CPU72 confirms that the value of the special symbol fluctuation measurement suspension schedule flag of the special symbol A which is the other special symbol is "01H" (step S3400: Yes), and the special symbol variation of the special symbol A The measurement interruption schedule flag is reset (value "00H" is set) (step S3500), and the value of the special symbol variation measurement interruption flag of the special symbol A is set to "01H" (step S3600).

  Subsequently, the main control CPU72 sets the symbol stop displaying flag relating to the special symbol B, and generates a symbol stop displaying command (step S3700). The symbol stop displaying command includes information indicating that the target symbol being stopped and displayed is the special symbol B. Further, the main control CPU72, in the effect control output process (step S212) of the interrupt management process, transmits the generated symbol stop display command to the effect control device 124.

  Thereby, as shown in FIG. 58 (c), the special symbol B display device 35 is controlled by the main control CPU 72 to light the upper and lower segments, and display the special symbol B in the display mode of the small hit symbol. To start. Moreover, the effect control CPU 126 instructs the effect display control device 144 to start displaying the effect symbols 430a, 430b, 430c in a manner in which the symbol is being determined, based on the received symbol stop displaying command. As a result, the movable liquid crystal display 43 is controlled by the effect display control device 144, and the effect symbols 430a, 430b, 430c are slightly swaying in the manner of "1", "3", "5" corresponding to the small hit symbol. To start displaying.

  Furthermore, the main control CPU72 suspends the measurement of the variation time of the special symbol A based on the value of the special symbol variation measurement interruption flag of the special symbol A being set to "01H". Although the main control CPU72 suspends the measurement of the variation time of the special symbol A, it does not mean that the variation time of the special symbol A has ended, and thus does not perform any special processing on the special symbol A display device 34. Moreover, the main control CPU72 does not transmit the information related to interrupting the measurement of the variation time of the special symbol A to the effect control device 124. Therefore, at time t3, the special symbol A display device 34 continues the variable display of the special symbol A started at time t2. On the other hand, the liquid crystal display 42 continues the variable effect of the effect symbols 420a, 420b, 420c started at time t2.

  At time t4 when a predetermined time has elapsed from time t3, it is assumed that the stop display time of the special symbol B ends. The main control CPU72 processes as follows in the special symbol stop displaying process (step S4000 (see FIG. 14)) in the special symbol B game process (step S205a) of the interrupt management process. In the special symbol stop display process (see FIG. 28), the main control CPU72 subtracts the value of the stop symbol display timer (decrement only for the interrupt period), the value of the stop symbol display timer after subtraction is "0" or less. Therefore, it is confirmed that the period during the stop display of the special symbol B (during symbol determination) has ended (step S4200: Yes), and a symbol stop command and a stop display time end command are generated (step S4250). The symbol stop command and the stop display time end command include information on the special symbol B as a symbol to be stopped.

  Subsequently, the main control CPU72 confirms that the value of the big hit flag relating to the special symbol B is not "01H" (step S4300: No), and confirms that the value of the small hit flag is "01H" (step S4600). : Yes). Subsequently, the main control CPU72 sets the jump destination to "variable winning device management processing during small hit" (step S4605), and sets "start small hit (during small hit game)" as an internal state flag on control. (Step S4606), the count cut counter value is loaded (step S4610), it is confirmed that the loaded counter value is not "0" (step S4620: Yes), and the process returns to the special symbol B game process (see FIG. 14). In the effect control output process (step S212) of the interrupt management process, the main control CPU72 sends the various commands generated in the special symbol stop display process to the effect control device 124.

Thereby, as shown in FIG. 59 (a), the special symbol B display device 35 stops and displays the special symbol B in the display mode of the small hit symbol. Based on the received symbol stop command and stop display time end command, the effect control CPU 126 also instructs the effect display control device 144 to stop and display the effect symbols 430a, 430b, 430c for which symbols are being determined. Thereby, the movable liquid crystal display 43 is controlled by the effect display control device 144 to stop and display the effect symbols 430a, 430b, 430c in the display modes of "1", "3" and "5" corresponding to the small hit symbol. . As a result, it is notified that the variable display by the special symbol B, which has been executed on the special symbol B display device 35, has won the small hit. In this way, the movable liquid crystal displays 43, 44 change production of the production symbols 430a, 430b, 430c prior to the variation production (one example of the first variation production) of the production designs 420a, 420b, 420c by the liquid crystal display 42. When ending (an example of the second variation effect), the process waits at the initial position.
After a predetermined time has elapsed since the small hit symbol was stopped and displayed on the special figure B display device 35, the small hit game is started, and the effect for the small hit game is started on the movable liquid crystal displays 43 and 44.

  Further, at time t4, no special processing is executed on the special figure A display device 34 and the liquid crystal display 42. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 59 (a), the special symbol A display device 34 continuously displays the variable symbols of the special symbol A based on the out-of-time variation pattern determined at time t <b> 2, and the liquid crystal display 42. In, the variation effect of the effect symbols 420a, 420b, 420c based on the out-of-time variation pattern determined at time t2 is continuously executed.

  Further, at time t4, the value "01H" is set in the symbol variation measurement interruption flag of the special symbol A. Therefore, in the special symbol variation process (step S3900) of the special symbol A game process (see FIG. 15) at time t4, the main control CPU72 has a value of the symbol variation measurement interruption flag of the special symbol A which is a control target. Confirm that it is "01H" (step S3100: Yes), and return to the special symbol A game process. Therefore, at time t4, the measurement of the variation time of the special symbol A remains suspended.

  At time t5 when a predetermined time has elapsed from time t4, the special symbol A based on the variation pattern determined in the special symbol variation preprocessing (FIG. 17) out-of-time variation pattern determination process (step S2409) in the special symbol A game process Suppose that the fluctuation time has been reached. At time t5, the value “01H” is set in the symbol variation measurement interruption flag of the special symbol A. Therefore, the measurement of the variation time of the special symbol A remains suspended.

  Therefore, as shown in FIG. 59 (b), the variable display of the special symbol A based on the out-of-time variation pattern determined at time t <b> 2 is continuously executed on the special figure A display device 34.

  On the other hand, since the production control device 124 has not transmitted the information related to the interruption of the measurement of the variation time of the special symbol A, the production control CPU 126 sets the time based on the variation pattern determined in the variation pattern determination process at the time of the out-of-sync. The measurement of the execution time of the variable effect of the effect symbols 420a, 420b, 420c selected at t2 is not interrupted. As a result, as shown in FIG. 59 (b), the effect control CPU 126 expires the variation effect execution period of the effect symbols 420a, 420b, 420c selected at the time t2, so that the display screen of the liquid crystal display 42 displays. , The production symbols 420a, 420b, 420c that are slightly swaying in the manner of "6", "3", "8" corresponding to the internal lottery result (disappearance) of the special symbol A are displayed.

  Since the small hit game is continued at time t5, as shown in FIG. 59 (b), on the respective display screens of the movable liquid crystal display 43 and the movable liquid crystal display 44 (not shown in FIG. 59 (b)). An image of a small hit game effect is displayed. Note that, in FIG. 59 (b), the fact that the image of the effect for the small hit game is displayed on the movable liquid crystal display 43 and the movable liquid crystal display 44 is represented by the character "small hit game".

  At time t6 when a predetermined time has elapsed from time t5, it is assumed that the small hit game is over. The main control CPU72, in the special symbol B game process of interrupt management process (step S205a) in the small winning time variable winning device management process (step S6000 (see FIG. 14)), as follows. In the small hitting end processing (step S6500 (see FIG. 35 and FIG. 39)) of the small hitting variable winning device management processing, the main control CPU 72 counts down the small hitting end timer in the small hitting end time timer countdown processing. In step S6502, it is determined that the value of the small hitting end time timer after the countdown is 0 and the small hitting end time has elapsed (step S6504: Yes).

  Subsequently, the main control CPU72 resets the special symbol fluctuation measurement interruption flag of the special symbol A which is the other special symbol (sets "00H") (step S6506), resets the small hit flag (step S6508), and small. A hit end time end command is generated (step S6510), and then the processes of steps S6512 and S6514 are executed to return to the special symbol B game process. The small hitting end time end command includes information on the special symbol B that triggered the small hitting game to be ended. The generated small hit end time end command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process (step S212) of the interrupt management process.

  When the small hitting end time end command is received, the effect control CPU 126 instructs the effect display control device 144 (display control CPU 146) of a small hit game end effect pattern for notifying that the small hit game is over. Thereby, as shown in FIG. 59 (c), an image of the small hit game end effect is displayed on the respective display screens of the movable liquid crystal display 43 and the movable liquid crystal display 44 (not shown in FIG. 59 (c)). It Note that, in FIG. 59 (c), the fact that the image of the small hit game end effect is displayed on the movable liquid crystal display 43 and the movable liquid crystal display 44 is represented by the character "small hit game end".

  At time t6, no special processing is executed on the special figure A display device 34, the special figure B display device 35, and the liquid crystal display 42. For this reason, as shown in FIG. 59C, the special figure A display device 34, the special figure B display device 35, and the liquid crystal display 42 maintain the state at time t5.

  The special symbol variation measurement interruption flag of the special symbol A is reset in the small hitting end process of the small hitting variable winning device management process executed at time t6. In the special symbol variation process (step S3900) of the special symbol A game process (see FIG. 15) in the interrupt management process executed next to the interrupt management process in which the special symbol variation measurement interruption flag of the special symbol A is reset The main control CPU72 confirms that the value of the symbol variation measurement interruption flag of the special symbol A that is the control target is not "01H" (step S3100: No), and subtracts the value of the variation timer (decrement for the interrupt period). ) (Step S3200), it is confirmed that the value of the variation timer after subtraction is not 0 or less (step S3300: No), and the process returns to the special symbol A game process. Thus, at the time t6, the special symbol variation measurement interruption flag of the special symbol A is reset, and the measurement of the variation time of the special symbol A is restarted.

  At time t7 when a predetermined time has elapsed from time t6, it is assumed that the value of the fluctuation timer of the special symbol A in the special symbol A display device 34 becomes “0”. The main control CPU72 processes as follows in the special symbol changing process (step S3900 (see FIG. 15)) in the special symbol A game process (step S205b) of the interrupt management process. In the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 27), the main control CPU72 confirms that the value of the special symbol variation measurement interruption flag of the special symbol A that is the control target is not "01H" (step S3100: No), and varies. The value of the timer is subtracted (decremented by the interrupt period) (step S3200), and the value of the fluctuation timer after subtraction is confirmed to be 0 or less (step S3300: Yes), and the other special symbol is a special symbol. It is confirmed that the value of the special symbol fluctuation measurement suspension schedule flag of B is not "01H" (step S3400: No), the symbol stop displaying flag relating to the special symbol A is set, and a symbol stop displaying command is generated ( Step S3700). The symbol stop displaying command includes information indicating that the target symbol being stopped and displayed is the special symbol A. Further, the main control CPU72, in the effect control output process (step S212) of the interrupt management process, transmits the generated symbol stop display command to the effect control device 124.

  As a result, as shown in FIG. 60A, the special symbol A display device 34 is controlled by the main control CPU 72 to turn on the central segment and start displaying the special symbol A in a display mode of the off. Moreover, the effect control CPU 126 instructs the effect display control device 144 to start displaying the effect symbols 420a, 420b, 420c in a mode in which the symbol is being determined, based on the received symbol stop displaying command. As a result, the liquid crystal display 42 is controlled by the effect display control device 144 to display the effect symbols 420a, 420b, 420c that are slightly swaying in the modes of "6", "3", and "8" corresponding to the deviation. continue.

  On the other hand, no special processing is executed on the special figure B display device 35 and the movable liquid crystal displays 43 and 44. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 60 (a), the special symbol B display device 35 displays the special symbol B corresponding to the small hit symbol stopped and displayed at time t4.

  Further, a customer waiting effect is executed on the movable liquid crystal display 43 and the movable liquid crystal display 44 (not shown in FIG. 60A). The customer waiting effect executed at time t7 is a special symbol B game process in the interrupt management process executed next to the interrupt management process in which the special symbol fluctuation measurement interruption flag of the special symbol A is reset (see FIG. 14). ) The special symbol variation pre-process (step S3900) is determined and started. Specifically, in this special symbol fluctuation preprocessing, the main control CPU72, the special symbol working memory number of the target (special symbol B working memory number) is "0", and confirm that it is not greater than "0". (Step S2100: No), the other special symbol working memory number (special symbol A working memory number) is "0", and it is confirmed that it is not larger than "0" (Step S2110: No), and the demonstration effect command. Is generated (step S2500), and returns to the special symbol B game process. The generated demonstration effect command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process (step S212) of the interrupt management process.

  The production control CPU 126 determines that the demonstration production command has been received in the production symbol variation pre-process (see FIG. 44) in the production symbol management process (step S402) of the production control process (see FIG. 40) (step S600). : Yes), a demonstration effect pattern is selected (step S602), and the process returns to the effect control process. The effect control CPU 126 instructs the effect display control device 144 to start the demonstration effect based on the selected demonstration effect pattern. Thereby, the movable liquid crystal displays 43 and 44 are controlled by the effect display control device 144 to start displaying the customer waiting effect image as a demonstration effect. In FIG. 60 (a), the fact that the customer waiting effect image is displayed on the movable liquid crystal display 43 and the movable liquid crystal display 44 is indicated by the character “waiting for customer”.

  At time t8 when a predetermined time has elapsed from time t7, it is assumed that the stop display time of the special symbol A ends. The main control CPU72 processes as follows in the special symbol stop displaying process (step S4900 (see FIG. 15)) in the special symbol A game process (step S205b) of the interrupt management process. In the special symbol stop display process (see FIG. 28), the main control CPU72 subtracts the value of the stop symbol display timer (decrement only for the interrupt period), the value of the stop symbol display timer after subtraction is "0" or less. Therefore, it is confirmed that the period during the stop display of the special symbol A (during symbol determination) has ended (step S4200: Yes), and a symbol stop command and a stop display time end command are generated (step S4250). The symbol stop command and the stop display time end command include information on the special symbol A as a symbol to be stopped.

  Subsequently, the main control CPU72 confirms that the value "01H" is not set in the big hit flag relating to the special symbol A to be controlled (step S4300: No), and to the small hit flag relating to the special symbol A to be controlled. It is confirmed that the value “01H” is not set (step S4600: No). Subsequently, the main control CPU72 sets the jump destination to "special symbol variation preprocessing" (step S4602), loads the number-of-times cut counter value (step S4610), and confirms that the loaded counter value is not "0". (Step S4620: Yes), the special symbol A game process (see FIG. 14) is returned to. In the effect control output process (step S212) of the interrupt management process, the main control CPU72 sends the various commands generated in the special symbol stop display process to the effect control device 124.

  Thereby, as shown in FIG. 60 (b), the special symbol A display device 34 stops and displays the special symbol A in the display mode of the off symbol. Based on the received symbol stop command and stop display time end command, the effect control CPU 126 also instructs the effect display control device 144 to stop and display the effect symbols 420a, 420b, and 420c whose symbols are being determined. As a result, the liquid crystal display 42 is controlled by the effect display control device 144 to stop and display the effect symbols 420a, 420b, 420c that were slightly swaying in the manner of "6", "3", and "8" corresponding to the deviation. To do. As a result, it is notified that the variable display by the special symbol B, which has been executed on the special figure A display device 35, is out.

  On the other hand, no special processing is executed on the special figure B display device 35 and the movable liquid crystal displays 43 and 44. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 60 (b), the special symbol B display device 35 maintains the display of the special symbol B corresponding to the small hit symbol stopped and displayed at time t4. Further, the movable liquid crystal displays 43 and 44 maintain the display of the customer waiting effect image.

  In this way, the pachinko machine 1 can be in a forced standby state in which the movable liquid crystal displays 43 and 44 are not movable when displaying the variation of the effect symbol. As a result, the pachinko machine 1 can ensure the visibility of the liquid crystal display 42 and the movable liquid crystal displays 43, 44 even when the special symbol A and the special symbol B change in parallel.

  The pachinko machine 1 notifies the result of the internal lottery of the special symbol B by performing the effect for notifying the result of the internal lottery of the special symbol B on the movable liquid crystal displays 43 and 44, not on the liquid crystal display 42. Since it is possible to reduce the chances of switching the effect to the liquid crystal display device 42 from the movable liquid crystal display devices 43 and 44, it is possible to reduce the control load on the liquid crystal display device 42 and the movable liquid crystal display devices 43 and 44.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 1 recognizes the player as the state in which the production symbol stopped and displayed on the movable liquid crystal displays 43 and 44 is surely stopped by setting the forced standby state in which the movable liquid crystal displays 43 and 44 are not moved. Can be made. Thereby, the pachinko machine 1 can prevent the incompatibility that the stop symbol stopped and displayed on the special figure B display device 35 and the stop symbol stopped and displayed on the movable liquid crystal displays 43 and 44 do not match.

  In the above description, the variation effect related to the special symbol A is executed on the liquid crystal display 42, and the variation effect related to the special symbol B is executed on the movable liquid crystal displays 42 and 43, but it is not limited to this. I can't.

Three liquid crystal display screens in the liquid crystal display 42 and the movable liquid crystal displays 43, 44 (an example of the first variation effect executing means) are variable displays for a predetermined time a of the special symbol A displayed on the special symbol A display device 34. The display area is dividedly executed so as to interlock or cooperate with each other to display the special figure A display effect animation (indication or notification of the result of the first lottery) as the first variation effect that is interlocked / synchronized with.
In addition, a part of the liquid crystal display screen of the movable liquid crystal display 43 (an example of the second variation effect executing means) is interlocked with / synchronized with the variation display of the special symbol B displayed on the special symbol B display device 35 for a predetermined time b. As the second variation effect, the display of the special figure B effect animation (indication or notification of the result of the second lottery) is not overlapped with the effect figure for special figure A (execution area in which the first variation effect is performed), or is superposed. Execution is possible in a predetermined initial position execution area (display area of the effect symbols 430a, 430b, 430c) having a small portion to be performed. The movable liquid crystal display 43 is capable of displaying the special figure B effect animation while being held at the preset movable position (the area of the execution area where the second variation effect is performed). In addition, an execution area different from the initial position depending on the type of the special moving image for special figure A (for example, one of the liquid crystal display 42 and the movable liquid crystal display 44 or different from the initial position in the movable liquid crystal display 43 The special moving image for special figure B can be displayed by moving to the display area).

  Further, the first fluctuating effect execution means, as a dynamic effect based on the suggestion or notification of the result of the first lottery, a movable body for production (an example of a movable accessory means) 40f, a liquid crystal display 42 and a movable liquid crystal display. It is possible to perform the first variation effect in which at least one of the containers 43 and 44 is moved toward a predetermined position.

  Then, when the first variation effect is executed (when the start condition for the result determination of the first lottery is satisfied), the execution time of the first variation effect by the first variation effect execution means (the predetermined time a) and the second If the second variation effect ends before the first variation effect ends with reference to the remaining execution time (second time b) of the second variation effect by the variation effect execution means, an execution area different from the initial position The display of the special figure B effect video that is moved to the position of the special figure B and the display of the special figure B effect video (visibility of the second variation effect) are not affected / interference by not moving the movable body 40f or the movable liquid crystal display 43. It is possible to suggest or notify the result of the first lottery so as not to perform (to secure the area of the execution area in which the second variation effect is performed or to hold the area).

  In the above-mentioned parallel variation examples 1 to 4, the production using the liquid crystal display 42 and the movable liquid crystal displays 43, 44 was mainly described, but in the parallel variation of the special symbol A and the special symbol B, the movable body 40f for production ( It is also possible to operate the example of the movable accessory means).

  For example, the effect control device (an example of the first variation effect executing means), the effect symbol 420a using the movable body 40f that operates as an effect related to the suggestion or notification of the lottery result of the special symbol A (an example of the result of the first lottery). , 420b, 420c are provided so as to be able to execute the variation effect (an example of the first variation effect), and when the variation effect by the effect symbols 420a, 420b, 420c is executed, the variation effect by the effect symbols 430a, 430b, 430c (the first In the case where the lottery result (the result of the second lottery) of the special symbol B in the example of the second variation production is the result of the small jackpot (the example of the second lottery) different from the predetermined jackpot (the example of the first lottery) , It is impossible to execute the variable effect by the effect symbols 420a, 420b, 420c based on the operation of the movable body 40f, and by the effect symbols 430a, 430b, 430c. After performing area reservation or regions hold execution region to perform the change effect may be an indication or notification of draw results special symbol A.

  In the parallel variation example 4, in the case where the lottery result of the special symbol B started earlier is a small hit (second winning), after the variable display of the special symbol B related to the small hit ends. The measurement of the execution time of the variable time of the special symbol A which is being superimposed and executed during the period until the small hit game ends (for example, the period from time t3 to time t6 shown in FIG. 52) is resumably suspended. It When the lottery result of the special symbol B is a big hit (one example of the first winning), the measurement of the execution time of the variation time of the special symbol A that is started subsequently is the end of the variation display of the special symbol B (for example, It may be ended at the time t4) shown in FIG.

  In the above-mentioned embodiment, the interruption of the measurement of the variation time of the special symbol is managed by the symbol variation measurement interruption schedule flag and the symbol variation measurement interruption flag, but since the special symbol is the display mode of the winning, it is a hit based on this winning. Based on that the special symbol special stop designation command is generated before starting the game, the execution time of the variable display or the stop display of the special symbol being executed by the special symbol A display device 34 or the special symbol B display device 35 The measurement may be interrupted or terminated.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, in the parallel fluctuation of the two special symbols, when the special symbol that is stopped first is stopped and displayed as the big hit symbol, a new command called a special stop designation command is issued. By the simple method of providing, it is possible to prevent the inconsistency between the stop design in the special figure display device that is stopped later and the stop design in the effect display, which has been a problem in the past. In this way, the pachinko machine 1 can simplify the control of two types of special symbols that are changing in parallel.

  The pachinko machine 1 determines whether or not the stop time of the special symbol B until the variable display of the special symbol A is finished, and when the stop time of the special symbol B is earlier, corresponds to the special symbol B. It is possible to forcibly retract the movable liquid crystal display that displays the effect symbol to the initial position and temporarily set it in the non-movable state. As a result, the pachinko machine 1 ensures the visibility of the movable liquid crystal displays 43 and 44, can notify the result of the internal lottery of the special symbol B on the movable liquid crystal displays 43 and 44, and has an opportunity to switch to the liquid crystal display 42. Since this can be reduced, the control load on the liquid crystal display 42 and the movable liquid crystal displays 43, 44 can be reduced.

  Further, since the pachinko machine 1 can forcibly retract the movable liquid crystal display device for displaying the effect symbol corresponding to the special symbol B to the initial position to temporarily make it non-movable, the movable liquid crystal display device 43. , 44, it is possible to let the player recognize that the effect symbol stopped and displayed is surely stopped. As a result, the pachinko machine 1 can be mistakenly regarded as a non-conformance that the stop design stopped and displayed on the special figure B display device 35 and the stop design stopped and displayed on the movable liquid crystal displays 43 and 44 do not match. Sexuality can be avoided.

The present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications can be made.
The pachinko machine 1 according to the above-described embodiment is configured so that the variation time of the special symbol B is not interrupted, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the pachinko machine 1 may perform the same process as the stop timing process of the out-of-time symbol fluctuation shown in FIG. 19 when the special symbol B is the target special symbol. In this case, it is not necessary to replace "special drawing A" with "special drawing B" in the stop timing process of the symbol variation at the time of deviation shown in FIG. 19 and to provide the process corresponding to step S2406c. Thereby, the pachinko machine 1 can restart the variable display of the special symbol B, which was being executed before the small hit in the special symbol A was notified, after the small hit game of the special symbol A is finished.

  In the above embodiment, the movable body 40f for effect can operate even in a state where the movable liquid crystal displays 43 and 44 are forcibly retracted to the initial position, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, with respect to the movable object for effect that hides the effect symbols 420a, 420b, 420c displayed on the liquid crystal display device 42 during the operation, it is controlled in the same manner as the movable liquid crystal display devices 43, 44, and if necessary, this The visibility of the liquid crystal display 42 can be secured by forcibly retracting the movable body for presentation to the initial position.

  The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment and can be variously modified and implemented. The aspect of the effect described in the embodiment is an example, and is not limited to the aspect of the effect described above.

  In the above-described embodiment, the first variable winning device 30 and the second variable winning device 31 are described as an example in which they are arranged in the right-handed area, but they may be arranged in the left-handed area.

  The images given in the other performance examples are merely examples, and these can be appropriately modified. Further, the structure, board configuration, specific numerical values, etc. of the pachinko machine 1 are preferable examples including those shown in the drawings, and it goes without saying that these can be appropriately modified.

1 Pachinko machine 8a Game area 20 Start gate 26 First start winning opening 27 Second starting winning opening 27a Second starting winning opening 28 Variable starting winning device 28a Second starting winning opening 28a Variable starting winning opening 28b Opening / closing member 30 First variable Winning device 30a Opening / closing member 30b First big winning opening 31 Second variable winning device 31a Opening / closing member 31c Opening / closing member 31d for probability variation area Probability changing area 34b First big winning opening 35b Second big winning opening 42 Liquid crystal display 43, 44 Movable liquid crystal Display 70 Main control device 72 Main control CPU
124 Production control device 126 Production control CPU
144 Display control device 146 Display control CPU

Claims (1)

A first lottery means for performing a first lottery when a first lottery opportunity occurs during a game,
A first fluctuation effect executing means for executing a first fluctuation effect in which the result of the first lottery is suggested or notified,
Second lottery means for performing a second lottery when a second lottery opportunity different from the first lottery opportunity occurs during the game,
A second variation effect execution means that is provided in parallel with the first variation effect execution means and that executes a second variation effect in which the result of the second lottery is suggested or notified,
The first variation effect execution means,
Provided to be able to execute the first variation effect using a movable accessory means to operate as an effect related to suggestion or notification of the result of the first lottery,
When the winning result of the second lottery can be prioritized and notified when executing the first variation effect, the execution of the first variation effect that performs a predetermined notification related to the winning result of the second lottery It is possible to perform the second variation effect without executing the first variation effect using the movable accessory means, and to execute a predetermined winning suggestion regarding the result of the second lottery. A gaming machine characterized in that it is possible to execute the first variation effect that secures an area or holds an area .

Images